KR20110080376A - Inputting method of character - Google Patents
Inputting method of character Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- KR20110080376A KR20110080376A KR1020100000556A KR20100000556A KR20110080376A KR 20110080376 A KR20110080376 A KR 20110080376A KR 1020100000556 A KR1020100000556 A KR 1020100000556A KR 20100000556 A KR20100000556 A KR 20100000556A KR 20110080376 A KR20110080376 A KR 20110080376A
- Authority
- KR
- South Korea
- Prior art keywords
- button
- buttons
- character
- input
- letter
- Prior art date
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/018—Input/output arrangements for oriental characters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/02—Input arrangements using manually operated switches, e.g. using keyboards or dials
- G06F3/023—Arrangements for converting discrete items of information into a coded form, e.g. arrangements for interpreting keyboard generated codes as alphanumeric codes, operand codes or instruction codes
- G06F3/0233—Character input methods
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/02—Constructional features of telephone sets
- H04M1/23—Construction or mounting of dials or of equivalent devices; Means for facilitating the use thereof
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Input From Keyboards Or The Like (AREA)
Abstract
The twin input method means that the keypad
There are two combination induction buttons that do the same function.
When multiple letters are assigned to one button,
Group a number of letters by a predetermined number and divide them into groups,
It is an easy way to enter the letters of each order in each group.
Description
Character input method on small keypad including mobile phone
Character input technology using small keypad
You want to enter letters quickly on the small keypad.
The twin button method is used.
The second paragraph of the specific content for the practice of the invention,
See section Twin advantages.
Chapter 1 Twin Character Input Method (Character Accelerator)
In the following, the abbreviation for 'twin character input method' is referred to as 'twin'.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++
Later in this commentary,
Since the description of the multi-tap method, T9 method, `* &#` method, 2-TOUCH method, adjacent key input method, and the advantages and disadvantages and the method in parallel with twins are mentioned,
Open the search box with CONTROL + F
For the multi-tap method, type 'multi-detailed description' as a search term.
For the T9 method, search for 'T9 detailed description' by typing.
Search for `* &# method` by entering` * &# details` as the search term.
For '2-TOUCH Method', enter '2-TOUCH Detailed Description' as a search term.
For 'Neighboring key input method', enter 'detailed key detail description' as a search term.
'Twins' are outlined in 'Twin Deranged Descriptions' or Figure 01, Figures 06-08, and their descriptions.
(If you look at only part of the lesson, you can see how that works.)
And,
For how to apply twins to Pinyin Chinese input method, enter 'Chinese Input Details'.
For the meaning of `auto cursor time setting`, enter` AUTO` as a search term and search.
For the meaning of `combination induction button`, you can search for the term 'combination induction button' in detail.
The traditional Hangul input methods
Samsung's explanation of 'Cheonjiin' is in the explanation of Figure 21.
Pantech's 'sky' or 'curitel' method is described in the description of Figure 24.
LG's 'EZ' method is explained in the explanation of Figure 28.
A description of the Motorola approach is given in the description of Figure 34.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++
Twins multiple advantages
Twins
Such as mobile phones and landlines
Among the advantages of applying to devices with small keypads, usually including 0-9, *, # buttons
Some of the important ones are:
(Applying twins to devices with QWERTY keyboards, including QWERTY phones, also brings some of the benefits below.)
1. In conventional character input modes, it is possible to carry out twins without changing modes.
So in applying twins, there is no risk to manufacturers or carriers.
You can apply them all to the same model, or you can download and use only the users you need.
(Although twins can be used independently, twins are not exclusive to other character input methods, and in combination with other character input methods in combination with other character input methods without changing the character input mode in other character input modes, the character input is supported. This speeds it up, so it's sometimes called a `character accelerator '.
The other character input method above
Multi-tap method, T9 method, `* &#` method, 2-TOUCH method, Samsung's Cheonjiin method in Korean input method, LG's EZ method, Pantech affiliated Sky, Curitel method, Motorola method, Handol code method, etc. Say
Therefore, twins make the Korean input, which is the fastest in the world on the small keypad, faster and more convenient in a format that helps the conventional method.)
In foreign countries, two methods using a multi-tap method and a DB including T9 are applied to almost all mobile phones, and are useful because they greatly improve the input method.
It also helps other input methods, but it also makes me think that there is no need for other input methods (especially the T9 method). Conventional Hangul input has the world's No.1 speed and convenience with the multi-tap method and Hangul's unique character transformation and combination without the T9 method, because if twins are applied to foreign languages, foreign languages can be entered faster than Korean.)
-Chinese letters can be entered quickly, so the Chinese alphabet can be used to express Chinese characters, ie, Pinyin and then Pinyin or Pinyin to Chinese.
-Even in countries where there are no letters of their own country, pinyin to the English alphabet, or using a slightly modified letter
We can input letter quickly
2. It is possible to increase the speed of the conventional method by applying the twins in the conventional mode, leaving the conventional keyboard assignment as it is and keeping the conventional method, or input the new style twins without changing the mode.
3. Each phoneme used for letters in almost all languages
The first phone of each button can be typed as 1, and all other phonemes can be typed as 2, making it easy to enter characters.
(2 strokes are 2 strokes with both hands, so you can use one hand to enter all phonemes at the speed of touching the touchpad with the (stylus) pen, or by pressing the phone number with one hand.) You can also type a little faster than speed.
Thus, there is no inconvenience in writing a novel with a mobile phone having a small keypad.
Since the second stroke is two strokes based on the combination of the induction button and the letter button, it feels like a beat, so it is more psychologically comfortable than double-clicking or pressing two different buttons for inputting different phonemes. Combination induction button and letter button combination of the two strokes do not have a fatigue of two strokes, but only a psychological fatigue of 1 ~ 1.3 strokes.)
4. About 100 special characters (text, symbols, figures, picture emoticons, etc.) that are used frequently can be easily input in 2-3 letters without changing the text mode in general text mode.
5. Since you can make 6 twin combination induction buttons on 12 buttons, up to 6 letters per button can be entered within 2 strokes.
6. To facilitate the functioning of the function buttons on the computer keyboard buttons, but not on keyboards (including QWERTY keyboards, especially small keypads) used mainly in telephones.
7. When entering the same sequence of letters on each button, as in the case of entering FOLLOW or CIRCLE described later, the number of strokes is greatly reduced since the combination-inducing button pressed in the front can be used as it is. Eventually, the copper line will be reduced.
8. Since the letter button is a combination induction button
Fig. 42 As when entering 'WING`
With the copper line at 0, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the combination induction button for entering the next letter.
In the state that the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous character becomes the character button of the latter character,
Minimization of copper wire occurs.
If the movement is 0, there is an effect of increasing the speed by which 1 stroke is reduced.
You can type letters just like a relay game.
Therefore, it is highly recommended that you enter the second letter of each button as twins rather than double-clicks.
9. Since there are two or more combination induction buttons of the same function,
Column 1 covers the left hand, column 3 covers the right hand, and column 2 covers the right or left hand depending on the situation.
It is possible to dramatically reduce the horizontal line to press the combination induction button, to better balance the two-handed load, and to avoid the situation where both hands are biased in one or three rows. The stability holding the device is also improved.
In addition, since the letter buttons in the 1 to 3 lines can be combined induction button, the vertical copper line for pressing the combination induction button can be significantly reduced.
Thus, the input speed of a small keypad mobile phone is not much slower than that of a small QWERTY mobile phone.
10. Function buttons or letter buttons that are not combination induction buttons may be combination induction buttons in addition to their original functions. In other words, any button can be combined induction buttons, so there is no distinction between combination induction buttons, function buttons, and character buttons.
(This is because the function buttons can be converted into letter buttons and combination induction buttons.)
11. In countries other than Korea and Japan, it is possible to eliminate the T9 mode that is mostly applied, so DB memory and good processor chip required for T9 method are unnecessary.
When you want to manufacture a low-cost mobile phone, you can further reduce the cost of manufacturing the mobile phone, and you can easily enter text through such a mobile phone, allowing you to communicate with a convenient text message to increase the number of mobile phone customers outside of Korea. This can result in an explosion of Thumbs.
(Twins should be applied to low- and medium-priced cell phones, which are in demand in poor and developing countries, or to home, office and landline phones, Internet phones, and remote control capable of text input.)
12. There are few typos because you can enter the desired letters only when the button with the desired letter is assigned and the combination induction button suitable for the letter order (second or more) to be entered.
(The multi-tap method can miss typos.)
13. Other advantages are well documented in the application and in this commentary.
(And besides the advantages described in this booklet, there are likely advantages that you haven't found yet, so you can assume that you have twins in your cell phone, so that you can use words, sentences, special characters, etc. As you type, feel the convenience of the twins, explore new benefits and expand the applications of the twins.)
In the future, if twins are applied to input foreign characters,
Greek letters, including English, Russian,
Arabic Language,
-Indian characters, including Southeast Asian characters
It can also be faster than the conventional Hangul input.
sure
-Chinese letters can be entered quickly, so the Chinese alphabet can be used to express Chinese characters, ie, Pinyin and then Pinyin or Pinyin to Chinese.
-Even in countries where there are no letters of their own country, pinyin to the English alphabet, or using a slightly modified letter
You can enter text quickly.
Japanese, which uses 50 phonetic characters, can be entered quickly.
As a result, you can quickly type characters from almost any language.
(Hereinafter, only twins are applied to English, Japanese, Korean, and Chinese.)
Traditionally, Korean characters can be input most quickly among characters expressing language on a small keypad, so even if a user wants to smoothly input Korean characters on a mobile phone, they said that they do not need a mobile phone with a QWERTY keyboard. The sales rate of mobile phones owned is less than 1%. More than 99% of mobile phones with small keypads are sold. If you're Korean, you can look around.
Nowadays, in some foreign countries, the number of people who work on the Internet and work on mobile phones is so inconvenient that it is too inconvenient to input text from the small keypad to the conventional method (mainly multi-tap method and T9 method). It is said to have increased to a degree. (Outside of Korea, almost all mobile phones can select the desired text input mode from the multi-tap and T9 text input modes.
As with Korean consumers, the convenience of text input is one of the main factors in selecting a mobile phone.)
However, if a cell phone using twins is produced, it is possible to enter text quickly and easily even in a small keypad in such a region, and the sales ratio of QWT phones is expected to decrease as much as in Korea.
As I'll explain later, typing in twins on a small keypad has a minimal speed difference from typing on a Qwerty keyboard.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Proof of the fastest way to type in twins on a small keypad:
A small keypad is a keypad commonly used in telephones, consisting of 0-9, *, #, or 12 buttons.
Danta can only input 12 characters anyway, so the first letter of each button is entered as danta.
The rest of the letters, that is, the second or more sequence of
The method of inputting different pressing times including long hits takes too much time, and if there are many kinds of pressing times, input errors are inevitably high.
Typing in the multi-tap method gets too many strokes,
T9 is also inconvenient,
Anyway, you have to enter a combination of two buttons.
Like `* &# how`
If you use the button * or button # on the 4th line away from the 1 ~ 3 line where the letters are assigned as the combination induction button (= shift button),
The vertical copper wire becomes big,
Since only one combination induction button is assigned to the same function, the horizontal line is also increased, and the thumb of both hands may be biased in one or three rows. It's not stable
If you type in twins
While the first character of each button can be entered in single strokes, all the second or more characters can be entered in two strokes,
Since almost all letters (English characters are all letters) are assigned to the combination-induced buttons by using the buttons in rows 1 to 3, almost all characters (in English) Entire characters) can be entered, vertical copper lines are reduced,
Since two or more combination induction buttons (= shift buttons) can be specified (usually in columns 1 and 3) that have the same function, you can select and use a combination induction button that is close to the situation, thus reducing horizontal lines.
Since the two-handed thumb is not biased in one or three rows, there is no interference between the fingers, the stability of holding the device is increased, and the load of both hands is as even as possible.
As the first mentioned 'Twins Advantages' section, the text input speed is the fastest on the small keypad.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Why you should improve your character input method on the small keypad
(= Why mobile phones with Qwerty keyboards in countries other than Korea may have a low market share in the future)
Understand the psychological state of the consumer.
80% to 90% of consumers worldwide (99.9% in Korea)
Do not choose a mobile phone with a QWERTY keyboard. Choose a mobile phone with a small keypad.
The reason is as follows.
Even with current technology, every cell phone can have a QWERTY keyboard,
Qwerty keyboard phones
The phone itself is large and inconvenient to carry,
QWERTY mobile phones are usually horizontal folders or horizontal slides, which makes you feel uncomfortable when dialing or making phone calls with one hand.
Qwerty phones that are vertical folders or vertical slides have a smaller button size than fingers, which makes it difficult to press the right button properly.
Some phones are equipped with a small keypad and QWERTY keyboard, but they are thicker.
Anyway, in countries other than Korea, Qwerty keyboard phones are unfavorable to most users who don't write very much.
And in real life, most customers don't type too much text to buy QWERTY phones.
(A typical small keypad phone is a vertical folder or a vertical slide.)
Bar-shaped Qwerty phones that aren't folders or slides aren't sophisticated in design.
And most QWERTY phones are expensive.
For the above reasons, I purchased a mobile phone equipped with a small keypad, but after purchasing it, I feel uncomfortable for entering a search word or typing text when searching for a phone number. However, the next time you buy a cell phone, it's not always inconvenient enough to make you think you should buy a cell phone with a QWERTY keyboard.
By the way,
Even from the Korean input point of view, the small keypad can be used to enter characters in the world fastest.
At the time of purchase, customers who did not choose mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards,
After purchase, in the text input,
-The best way is Samsung's heaven and earth,
-LG EZ is the best way,
The best way is Motorola.
-I changed my phone manufacturer, and the changed keyboard layout and text input method is not my style, so it's too hard to enter text.
I talk a lot. In particular, when a person who enters text using the LG EZ method is used as a method of Samsung Electronics 'heaven and earth or the Pantech affiliated Sky or Curitel method, many people want to purchase LG Electronics' mobile phones again.
In this situation, in order to realize customer satisfaction, there is no choice but to improve the character input method on the small keypad.
Now Hangul input is
By combining twins with conventional methods including Samsung Electronics 'EZ, LG Electronics' EZ, Pantech's Sky or Curitel, and Motorola's method,
Innovative improvements to conventional methods
In the conventional text mode,
While it is possible to input as conventional (and the person who prefers the conventional method is satisfied ),
Without changing the text input mode
In parallel
It is possible to input several advantages of the aforementioned twins, such that 40 Korean phonemes can be entered within 2 strokes. ( Satisfied users who want to enter text quickly )
Thus, there is no risk to manufacturers or carriers in applying twins.
So now
-The best way is Samsung's heaven and earth,
-LG EZ is the best way,
Motorola's method is the best.
-The best way that Samsung Cheonjiin and twins combined is,
The best way is to combine the EZ method with the twins.
-The best way to combine Pantech Sky and Curitel with twins
-Motorola's way and twins is the best way to say that will come out.
Anyway, if you do a texting contest on a small keypad, the method of applying twins is always number one.
(Is currently
If you look at various mobile community boards and portal site comments,
'Samsung Cheonjiin can learn quickly, but when you write, you get a lot of strokes, and the same button problem occurs a lot, which makes you uncomfortable' and 'LG EZ method is difficult to learn because there are many hidden (= derived) phonemes. The number of strokes and the same button problem does not occur, so you can enter easily and quickly`.
In fact, LG EZ system is ranked first in various character input competitions and is recognized for its excellence in speed.
(In fact, the LG EZ method has 15 phonemes that require 3 or more strokes to input, and there is a problem that there is a large moving line to press the button * (stroke add function) and button # (double consonant function) on the 4th row.
Twins allow all phonemes to be entered within two ties, and the movement can be made very small within one to three lines.)
Forward,
When combined with twins, the heavens and the earth can input much faster than the conventional LG EZ method. However, I don't know if it will be faster than the conventional LG EZ and twins combined.)
Conventionally,
Korea with the fastest Korean alphabet
In countries other than the small keypads, it was too inconvenient to input characters using any of the various input methods including the multi-tap method and the T9 method.
Now that there are twins, characters that represent languages other than Korean on the small keypad can be entered faster than Korean input speed.
Qwerty cell phone sales in some regions outside Korea will increase by 10 ~ 20%, and the QWERTY mobile phone sales will be reduced as much as Hangul.
(We know that the global Qwerty mobile phone sales target for 2008 is around 10-15%.
We know that Samsung Electronics' Qwerty mobile phone sales target is 15% in 2008.)
In addition, the QWERTY mobile phone ratio may also increase in Korea due to the increase in information exchange through mobile phones, such as the Internet via mobile phones. More than 50% of globally, more than 500 million units a year will be in demand worldwide. (Currently, the global mobile phone market is just over 1 billion units a year. The wired telephone market with the same small keypad is now global. More than 100 million units a year.)
Also, even if the vertical small keypad requires a horizontal screen for Internet search, the liquid crystal can be rotated 90 degrees like some conventional models.
Twins are essential for the smooth exchange of information on small keypad phones.
(And, not just the information exchange aspect, phone book search, simple sentence input, even if you apply the twin only to the English word input of the English dictionary built in the mobile phone can feel more comfortable than before.)
Even if you only review alphabet letters,
In QWERTY mobile phones, you can enter all phonemes in single strokes, so the average number of strokes per phone is 1,
In the small keypad, the eight phonemes, the first phone, are required to be single and the other 18 phonemes are two, so the average number of strokes is 1.7 strokes ((1x8 + 2x18) /26=1.69].
Small keypads have a much smaller copper wire than Qwerty keyboards and take 1.1 to 1.2 times as long as the other advantages of twins (especially 5, 6, 7) are mentioned. It seems. In other words, it seems to be almost the same speed as QWERTY keyboard.
Note that
Since a mobile phone having a touch pad can express the keyboard electronically on the touch pad, it is easy to express a small keypad and a QWERTY keyboard.
However, when the QWERTY keyboard is expressed vertically, the button size becomes very small, so there is too much input error when you touch it with your finger, and you need to touch it with the (stylus) pen. There is also some inconvenience.
In addition, the current technology, when expressing a small keypad on the touch pad to express a large button size, a lot of input error, and the touch feeling is not good. For example, Samsung's full-touch mobile phones mostly provide only a small keypad, but there are still more inconveniences than physical buttons when entering text. (Of course, by applying twins to mobile phones, which are both touchpads and small keypads, characters can be entered more quickly and easily than in conventional touchpads.)
Nowadays, when you enter a phone number or enter a letter, you use the actual physical buttons of the conventional small keypad on the bottom plate,
Game, photo albums, programs, etc. The function that works with the touch pad is advantageous, a new type of mobile phone using the touch pad of the top plate has received a great response. Samsung's soul phone or LG's secret phone is a good example.
(It's not important that you get back to the physical buttons on the touchpad; it's important to keep using the small keypad anyway.)
The lowest priced mobile phone is a mobile phone with a small keypad anyway.
(Small keypad phones range from low price to high price, but most QWERTY phones are expensive. First of all, the number of buttons, large display screen, and high power consumption make the battery expensive.)
If twins are applied, the user can enter the characters conveniently.
Twins should be essential for low- and medium-priced cell phones or domestic and office landline phones, which are in demand in poor and developing countries.
In the mobile phone market, which is fiercely competitive in emerging countries, cost reduction has become a major challenge for the mobile phone industry.
(In particular, as technology has leveled out in recent years, prices have emerged as the biggest differentiator. Emerging markets such as Southeast Asia, Latin America, and Africa have emerged as growth engines. Nokia, Samsung, Motorola, LG Electronics, Sony, etc.) It is also more important how Ericsson's Big 5 monopolizes 80% of the entire market and how efficiently it can build its economies of scale and lower its prices. The strategy was successful in coordinating with emerging markets and securing second place over Motorola in terms of volume.)
In countries other than Korea and Japan, T9 mode can be eliminated. Most of the time, DB memory and good processor chip are not required. Therefore, the cost of cell phone manufacturing can be reduced.
(Now, it is possible to enter texts on a mobile phone with a small keypad so that communication costs can be saved even with the lowest priced mobile phone used by the poor.
In poor countries, they skip the demanding landline and move directly to the open cell phone without the need for telecommunication lines. Some people do not. Now, even a mobile phone with a small keypad can communicate with most text messages, so even those people can buy a mobile phone and live in a communication life to receive more benefits of civilization. And while not in a poverty, the common people can greatly reduce communication costs.)
So far, only physical button-type phones with small keypads can see and enter the keypad.
(Even if the keypad is a touch pad, if you do not see the touch pad when you press it, you will not know if you have pressed the desired button correctly. You cannot enter text even if you do not memorize the keyboard assignment.) Because of this inclined texture, the touch between the button and the button, you can see which button is currently pressed.Of course, it is applied to the mobile phone, which is both a touchpad and a small keypad, more than the conventional touch small keypad. You can type letters quickly and easily.)
Note that,
Talking about the touch of the keypad,
If you divide the type of computer keyboard into two
It is divided into membrane type and mechanical type.
Membrane and mechanical, both of which don't have a touchpad and are physical buttons,
The touch is different as follows,
In addition, the lowest price among membrane types is 3000 won, and the lowest price among mechanical types is 25,000 won, which is about 8 times different. In general, most users (99%?) Use membranes.
Not to mention the difference between the touchpad and the physical buttons on the phone.
(Membrane expression
When I press the key, there's a little bit of repulsion
There is a silicon pad on the membrane contact substrate, which covers the entire key. When you press a key on the membrane keyboard, you feel the elasticity of the silicone pad as it contracts.
It's like pressing a remote control button.
Mechanical
The repulsive force of the key is better, which makes it lighter and reduces finger fatigue as you type longer. The error rate is also less than that of the membrane method. The reason for this is a click.
Under the keys of the mechanical keyboard are individually metal contacts and springs. So when you hit the keys on the mechanical keyboard, you can feel a light key. The advantage of a mechanical keyboard is that it feels good to press the key (there may be a personal variation) and can detect if the key is pressed. It also has a long lifespan. Instead, it is expensive because you have to make contacts for each key.
It feels like you're pressing a mouse button.)
)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Definition of Terms
Hereinafter, a button is referred to as an electronic touch button of a touch pad, a physical button such as a general computer keyboard, and a button of a laser pad.
In the following, the word "letter" includes the following three types.
1. a letter that represents a language
2. Special Characters
Yes)
Punctuation
-General special characters (usually special characters in word processor special character tables-mostly black and white)
-Letter emoticons (classic emoticons, usually composed of letters, punctuation, and general special characters)
-Emoji, animated emoji or flash emoji-Mostly colored
3. Functions: There are buttons on the computer keyboard, but not on the phone keypad, Hangul phone conversion button function, text mode change function or selection function. Mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards also have many of the buttons below, so it would be good to apply them to QWERTY phones.
( Yes:
-'DEL' button on the computer keyboard (usually, the 'cancel' button on the phone only has the BACK-SPACE function, not the DEL button function),
-'INSETRT' button function,
-Inverse function of 'INSETRT' button (On the computer keyboard, the 'INSETRT' button is a toggle key, but the toggle key is always a mistake. It is possible. )
-'SPACE' button function (In Korean input method, there is no space dedicated button, and one space is used only by right key. English button already has space dedicated button on 4 lines, but when twins are applied, 1 ~ You can add that functionality to line 3),
-`ENTER` function: This function is the same as the ENTER function of the computer keyboard such as a line break function and a confirmation function after inputting an Internet search word.
-Functions such as `HOME`,` END`, `PAGE DOWN`,` PAGE UP`, `ESC`` TAB`, `CAPS LOCK` and` NUM LOCK` buttons
-One phoneme erase function instead of one syllable in Hangul input (when the cursor is moved to the next space while inputting wrong vowel in Cheonjiin method, if you press the cancel button, the whole character is erased, but you want to erase only the wrong stroke of the previous character. Can be used.
And even in other input methods and computer keyboards, if the cursor moves to the next space with the wrong phoneme of the previous letter, pressing the Cancel button (BACK SPACE on the computer) will erase the entire previous letter. Can be used)
-Korean input method
Double consonant button, stroke add button,
'#' Button in Motorola (= actually adds a stroke)
Including VK Handol code, finish button and shift button
Hangul phonetic conversion button function ==> This may be the case. In this case, it is recommended to treat the character button as a combination induction button (= shift button) that functions as such.
In the following, the same button problem is
This phenomenon occurs when inputting using the multi-tap method.
Occurs when trying to enter characters assigned to the same button consecutively.
In letterless systems like English, this can happen in all spellings of words,
In characters with a trailing (= backing) character, such as Hangul, it occurs when the trailing letter of the first letter and the trailing letter of the back letter are assigned to the same button. It is also called consonant collision. It doesn't happen with vowels unless you're just stupid.
E.g
When 'ABC' is assigned to Button 2,
If you press button 2 two times in succession to enter 'AA', the device recognizes that you want to enter the second character `B`, so press button 2 once and press the space button to move the cursor to the next space. After moving (or waiting for 2 seconds, the cursor will move to the next space), and then press button 2 again to enter 'AA' without error.
In the English keyboard, since the button * or button 0 or button # in the fourth row beyond the one to three lines in which the alphabet is assigned is used as the space button, the number of large strokes is increased.
In Korean, if button 1 is assigned to ㄱㅋ ㄲ,
When you need to enter phonemes in order of `ㄱ ㅜ ㄱ ㄱ ㅏ` to enter `country`,
When you enter the third letter, the last word `ㄱ` and the fourth letter, the first letter `ㄱ`,
If you press Button 1 two times in succession, the unit will recognize that you want to enter ㅋ, and it will display `` Kuka, '' so press Button 1 once and press the Right button to move the cursor to the next space. (Or wait two seconds before the cursor moves to the next space by itself). Press Button 1 again to enter 'ㄱ ㄱ'.
If you need to enter phonemes in order of `ㅅ ㅣ ㄱ ㅋ ㅏ ㄹ`,
When you enter the third letter, the last word `ㄱ` and the fourth letter, the first letter `ㅋ`,
If you press Button 1 once and then press Button 1 twice, the device will recognize that you want to type `ㄲ` and will display 'Simple'.
Press button 1 once, move the cursor by pressing the right button, and then press button 1 twice. `ㄱ ㅋ` is recognized properly so that the `knife` can be input without error. In the case of Hangul, there is no space button, so you need to press the right button to move the cursor. The movement of the thumb from the right button to the right button again returns to the small keypad of 4 rows and 3 columns.
When the same button problem occurs as above, it is mainly solved by using the right button or the space-only button. Although the space button is smaller than the right button, the space button is also outside the 1 ~ 3 line where the letter is mainly assigned. Since it is in line 4, it can be said that the copper line is large.
At any rate, when entering characters in any language,
When the same button problem occurs, the number of strokes is increased by one stroke, which is perceived by the user as psychologically unnecessary, and the movement is also large, stressing, very annoying, and causing a lot of typos.
Therefore, a person who inputs a lot of characters prefers an input method with less problem of the same button, especially in Korean input having various input methods.
Samsung's Cheonjiin and Pantech's Sky or Curitel methods input consonants based solely on the multi-tap method, so the same button problem occurs frequently, and the LG EZ method does not cause the same button problem at all.
So when you consider the vowels,
One of the reasons why LG EZ is preferred over Pantech's input method, which requires fewer phonemes, is the difference with the same button.
If you enter a word consisting of each phoneme,
This is because there are fewer LG EZ shots that do not require additional bats because the same button problem does not occur, and less stress or irritability occurs even when the LG EZ shots have more total hits.
Among the things that twins can do
In parallel with the multi-tap method, it almost never causes the same button problem,
Please note later that some twin-only modes do not cause the same button problem at all.
Let's list some more cases where the same button problem occurs in Korean.
1 a a (words in the case where both the last letter and the first letter are a)
: Height, each, footlight, each, country, each, each, each, angle, angle, angle, angle, angle, flu, eating, eating, eating, wood carving, cut, tableware, musical instrument, writer, right angle, illusion, touch There are many ways to feel, touch, chin, tyrant, academia, department, school, school district, semester.
2 ㅋ: eat knife, kitchen knife, hack club, magic nose , mid color, etc.
(When the initial letter and the initial letter are a or l)
From now on, I'll give you an example as I usually think of only one family.
3 ㄴ ㄴ: come across, bastard
4 b d: brief, ~ grandmother (words when the initial letter of the first letter and the initial letter of the latter letter are b or d)
5c c: pour out
6 d: equal
7 ㅌ: red beans
8 ㅂ 갑: rich
9 ㅂ ッ: Bob Full
10 ㅁ: Straw Grass
11 ㅅ ㅎ: It looks like
12 ㅅ ㅅ: bullshit
13: don't tear
14 j: don't chase
15 ec: lacquer
16 o o: this force, the charging property, property lines, primary infantile ~
17 ㅇ ㅁ: Protest
18 ㅁ ㅁ: Reduction
19 M: thank
20 ㅇ ㅎ: I love you , quietly , strong
21 a ㄲ: be sure
22 ㄷ ㄸ:? (Not thought)
23 ㅂ 잡: bone
24. ㅆ ㅆ: Wedge
25 ㅉ:? (Not thought)
1 ~ 18 occur mainly in Samsung Cheonjiin,
1 ~ 10, 12 ~ 16, 19,20 are generated by Pantech's Sky, Curitel,
21-25 occurs in Motorola.
In the future, if there are more new words such as compound words, abbreviations, and foreign words, the same button problem may appear more.
Combination Induction Button Details
To understand the meaning of `combination induction button 'below, think of it as' shift button' on a computer keyboard.
For the sake of proficiency, I will express it as 'combination induction button' (= shift button) only a few more times below, and only 'combination induction button' thereafter.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Twin details
This twin commentary has many examples of various applications of the points mentioned in the patent application (supplement the explanation of the advantages and applications of the twin input method in the patent application).
I will now slowly describe twins.
Although twins can be usefully applied to QWERTY keyboards (sometimes they have little effect), the effects are much larger when applied to small keypads. At that time, I would like to mention that keyboards will be useful.
The twin input method means that the keypad
There are two combination induction buttons that do the same function.
When multiple letters are assigned to one button,
Group a number of letters by a predetermined number and divide them into groups,
This is an easy way to enter the letters of each group in each group.
For example, on a typical small keypad with 12 buttons (hereafter referred to simply as letter buttons): 0-9, *, #,
When 30 letters are assigned to each button, it is a way to group the 6 pieces into 5 groups, and to easily input the letters in the 1st to 6th order of each 5 groups.
What is needed at this time
A signal to enter the second group and
It is a signal to input the letter of the order in the particular group called the 'second'.
To input the second letter (usually a special character) on the computer keyboard, hold down the shift button as if you were pressing the letter button to which the target special character was assigned.
Twin button method
The signal for inputting the letters in the order of the order is, on the small keypad, by pressing the appropriate combination induction button (= shift button) from the six types of combination induction buttons (= shift button) for inputting the letters in the 1st to 6th order. If you press the letter button that the target letter is assigned to
The signal for inputting the second group is a method of giving the signal while changing the combination method of the combination induction button (= shift button) and the letter button.
In this case, it is difficult to make six kinds of combination induction buttons (= shift buttons) physically in a new way because of space constraints, and even if they are made, even if the copper wire is too big even inside the 12 letter buttons, 6 If there are two combination induction buttons (= shift buttons), the moving line becomes too large.
So I added a combination induction button (= shift button) function to the original function of the 12 buttons to make a character button a combination induction button (= shift button) for a while,
How do you do it?
When each of the 12 buttons is ON alone and then OFF, a conventional letter button function or function button function (e.g., a character mode change function, a function of selecting a target word among candidate words in T9, and strokes in Korean) Additional button function, double consonant button function),
When there is a button combination in which one of the 12 buttons is pressed (= holding state) and another button is pressed (= turning on), one of the two buttons is a combination induction button (= shift Button), and the other button becomes a letter button.
As with computer shift buttons, it is usually recommended to turn on the combination induction button (= shift button) before the letter button, but you can turn it on later.
In this case, the twin input method takes the form of adding the same combination induction button (= shift button) to each of the two letter buttons.
Since there are 12 buttons, six kinds of combination induction buttons (= shift button) can be added.
(Not necessarily adding the same combination induction button (= shift button) to only two buttons,
When added to each of the three buttons, four types of combination induction buttons (= shift button) function is added,
When added to each of the four buttons, three kinds of combination induction buttons (= shift buttons) are added.However, except for special cases, the same type of combination induction buttons (= shift buttons) are applied to each of the two buttons as above. Add a feature.)
If you apply this to a computer keyboard (although not too much)
Add the shift button function to the Q and P buttons,
Add control buttons to the A and L buttons,
It's the same as adding the Alt button function to the Z and M buttons,
In small devices like Qwerty phones that want to maximize space efficiency, shift buttons, control buttons and alt buttons can be eliminated.
(Of course, you can get rid of it in computer keyboards, but it seems unlikely.)
In computer keyboards, control buttons and alt buttons do not have the ability to write text, and there is a problem of space limitation, and most of the QWERTY phones do not have control buttons or alt buttons. .)
Now, mobile phones can easily implement control or alt button functions without such a button.
in front
The signal for inputting the first group is said to give the signal while changing the combination induction button (= shift button) and the character button pressing method.
Specifically, it is shown in the following table.
(You may not understand it right the first time you see the table below, but you don't need to understand it right now, so you can just skim through it and see a few examples later with specific examples to understand the whole thing.)
As to the sequence of pressing the combination induction button and the character button in the twin method, the combination induction button is attached to the character button as shown in the following <Figure 01> or <Figure 02> table. Preceding There is a way, there is a way to follow,
As shown in the following <Figure 01> table
We recommend that the combination induction button precedes the letter button in most cases (because it has more advantages than the latter method, which will be explained later).
'Combination induction button precedes the character button' means that the character button is pressed while the combination induction button is pressed. Means to press,
'Combination induction button trails the character button' is the opposite of the above, means that you hold down the character button and press the combination induction button, you can enter the second letter of a button on the computer keyboard. Now it means that you press the shift button while pressing the letter button.
It is rarely recommended that a combination-induced button follows a letter button. However
. In parallel with 2-TOUCH and twins
. When the traditional Hangul input method is combined with the twins, the traditional Hangul input method (eg, LG EZ method) itself is a method of pressing a character conversion button (eg, stroke addition button, consonant button) after the character button. In case of assigning the twins in parallel to the letter conversion button (e.g. stroke add button, consonant button) function in combination with another letter button as a combination induction button, the combination induction button is preceded by the character button in the twin When applied, it is confused with the conventional method, so even when applying twins, it is recommended that the combination induction button is used only after the letter button.
If you are confident that you will not be confused at this time, it is better to do it first.
In addition, when applied to actual products, even if only one or two groups or one to three groups of input methods are applied, many purposes, including punctuation and emoticons, can be quickly and easily achieved. The input method also seems to be almost unnecessary, so changing the push method further and further expansion is still of course unnecessary.
(In fact, the second to fifth group letter input method may be referred to as an application of the first group letter input method.)
In the top row of <Figure 01> and <Figure 02>,
There is a cumulative alphabetic order number up to 30 in one button, which means that 30 characters are assigned to one button.
'Group' is the fifth group of letters, which means that 30 letters are divided into five groups.
The order of grouping letters is up to 6, which means that 30 letters are divided into 5 groups and grouped into 6 letters per group.
And the contents of <Figure 01> and <Figure 02> below are in the form of 'A button + B button', which means pressing B button while pressing A button. (A button + B button type is two strokes, but psychologically feels one stroke.)
For example, the combination induction button is a third combination induction button,
In the `combination induction button precedes the letter button`,
`Third Combination Induction Button + Letter Button Danta` means that you hold down the Combination Induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, and press the button assigned to the letter you want to enter shortly.
`Third Combination Induction Button + Letter Button Long 'means that you hold down the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, and press and hold the button to which you want to enter (for example, 0.5 seconds or longer). `KEYZET`, a computer keyboard shortcut program, performs a shortcut command by pressing and holding for 0.5 seconds.),
The third combination induction button double-click + letter button danta` is the letter that you want to enter while holding the finger, do not release the button after double-clicking the combination induction button to enter the third character Short button press
The third combination induction button double-click + letter button long hit is to double-click the combination induction button to enter the third letter, do not release your finger from the button, and while holding, Long press (e.g., 0.5 seconds or more),
`Double-click 3rd Combination Button + Double-Click Character Button` means that you want to enter the letter you want to input while holding down your finger from the button after double-clicking the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter. Is to double click on the button,
And
In the way that the combination induction button follows the character button
`Character button + third combination induction button danta` means to press the combination induction button to enter the third letter while pressing the button to which the desired letter is assigned.
'Character button + 3rd combination induction button long stroke' means that you press and hold the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter while holding the button assigned to the letter you want to enter (for example, 0.5 seconds or more).
'Double-clicking button + 3rd combination induction button' is a combination induction that allows you to enter the third letter without holding your finger off the button after double-clicking the button to which you want to enter. Short button press
'Double-clicking the letter button + third combination induction button long stroke' is a combination induction that allows you to enter the third letter without holding your finger off the button after double-clicking the button to which you want to enter the letter. Long press (e.g., 0.5 seconds or more),
'Double-clicking the letter button + double-clicking the third combination induction button' is a combination that allows you to enter the third letter while holding down your finger from the button after double-clicking the button to which the letter you want to enter is assigned. This means double-clicking the induction button.
In the following <Figure 01> and <Figure 02> table,
In the method of inputting the first letter among the first group of letters in the group
When the combination induction button precedes the character button, 'first combination induction button + character button'
If the combination induction button follows the character button, press the button + the first combination induction button.
You can also enter 2 tarot
In the method of inputting the first letter of the first group of characters, it is possible to input as much as in the multi-tap method or in the twin-only mode, 'one button single stroke', that is, one by one.
The basic form of the combination method of the combination induction button and the letter button in twins is shown in Figure 01 and Figure 02 below (the changed form will be explained later).
<Figure 01>: Combination Induction Buttons Leading to Character Buttons (Recommended for Most Uses)
Within the button
Cumulative letters
turn
of mine
letter
order
letter
First Combination Induction Button + Character Button
Second Combination Induction Button + Character Button
Third Combination Induction Button + Character Button
4th Combination Induction Button + Character Button
Fifth Combination Induction Button + Character Button
6th Combination Induction Button + Character Button
letter
First Combination Induction Button + Character Button Long Hit
letter
letter
letter
(If the combination induction button precedes the letter button,
Once a button is turned on, it can be assumed that the button acts as a combination induction button so that the letters of the buttons that can be input when a button acts as the combination induction button are displayed on the display screen along with the button number. It is better to use when there are too many characters to assign to the button. )
<Figure 02>: Combination Induction Button Trailing to Character Button (Almost Not Recommended)
Within the button
Cumulative letters
turn
of mine
letter
order
letter
Letter Button + First Combination Induction Button
Letter Button + Second Combination Induction Button
Letter Button + Third Combination Induction Button
Letter Button + 4th Combination Induction Button
Letter Button + Fifth Combination Induction Button
Letter Button + 6th Combination Induction Button
letter
Letter Button + First Combination Induction Button
letter
letter
letter
(If the combination induction button follows the letter button,
When there are too many characters to assign to the button,
Once a button is turned on, it can be assumed that the button is a letter button to be combined with a combination induction button so that the letters assigned to the button are displayed on the display screen.)
In addition to the pressing method of the two tables shown in the above <Figure 01,02>, the form of 'A button + B button double click' can be additionally applied, but 'A button + B button twice' application of 'A button + B button' Pressing (pressing B button two times in a row with the other hand while holding A button) and the signal may be mixed, so it is possible to introduce it without proper introduction or rule.
Just by entering the above first group of characters
Conventional keyboards, including English, Korean, and Japanese, in particular on small keypads, support the conventional input method while simultaneously combining various conventional input methods and twins without changing the mode. Innovatively improve the input method, and depending on the language, about 10 to 40 special characters (about 40 for English, about 30 for Korean, and about 20 for Japanese) can be changed without changing the text mode. Innovative improvements to the input method, such as typing in Thai, are made, and it is of course practical in countries that use English alphabets to input their own words, including Pinyin to Chinese characters in Chinese and Chinese.
Although the method of inputting characters of the second group or more mainly improves the special character input method,
Even though it is the same pronunciation as in English, there are uppercase and lowercase letters, and as is the same pronunciation as in Japanese, there are hiragana and katakana,
Even though the letters represent the same pronunciation, they are divided into two types of languages.
Quickly enter the second character without changing the character mode in the first character mode (e.g., enter uppercase letters without changing the character mode in the lowercase alphabetic mode or enter katakana quickly without changing the character mode in the Japanese hiragana mode)
In the second text mode, the first text may be quickly input without changing the text mode. (E.g., enter lowercase letters quickly without changing the character mode in English uppercase mode or enter hiragana quickly without changing the character mode in Japanese Katakana mode)
Furthermore, in Japanese input method, similar to T9,
In addition to the input method using a DB, a method of inputting a search word only as a definite letter (commonly called a PREDICTION method) is used.
One of the second to fifth group input methods may be applied as a signal when only a kanji or hiragana or katakana is present.
For example, in the hiragana / kanji mode,
Conventionally, all candidate words composed of hiragana or kanji are presented.
When the first group input method is used, all candidate words composed of hiragana or kanji are presented as before.
By using the second group input method, candidate words composed only of Katakana can be presented.
By using the third group input method, candidate words composed only of hiragana may be suggested.
If you use the 4th group input method, you can use it to make candidate words composed only of Chinese characters. (But I can't read even 50 Japanese words, so I don't know if they are useful as explained in English below.)
Normal button * (in English mode
1.capital mode for the first letter of a sentence
2.capital letter mode
3.lowercase mode
This method must make a mistake in not changing the mode correctly, and it is likely to make a lot of mistakes in entering uppercase and lowercase letters differently from their intentions. This toggle key makes a lot of mistakes, and in countries other than English-speaking countries, such as Korea, the Hangul / English Letter Mode Change button is a toggle key.
Even if you change the mode correctly,
To type in lowercase letters and capital letters, press the button * once to change the first letter of a sentence to uppercase mode and type in uppercase letters.
Pressing the button * twice again will change the mode to lowercase, which can be very difficult and cumbersome.
Thus, in the present invention, when inputting a capital letter in a lowercase mode, a method of inputting a capital letter one by one in a second group letter input method that is a combination of a combination-inducing button and a letter button long button without a mode change is required. In addition, it is proposed to speak in parallel to the conventional method used as a lowercase conversion button. (However, if you want to enter a series of long capital letters, you can change to uppercase mode and type a capital letter.)
Note that
Let's look at just a few of the cases where you need to type capital letters in the middle of a sentence.
It seems trivial, but if you don't obey this rule, the sentence looks pretty poor.
1 `I` for me
2 uppercase letters in the names of people
ex) Last night Mrs. Harvey visited Gil-dong Hong.
(1 and 2 appear especially much during chat)
3 The first letter of every sentence must be capitalized
ex) The more John read of the book, the more he enjoyed it.
4 The words written on the calendar are capitalized.
Day of week, month and national holiday
ex) Thursday, Saturday, January, April, Valentine`s Day, Easter.
5 Well-known places are capitalized
When speaking part of the map (country, continent, etc.), when speaking of states or provinces, when speaking of cities or towns, streets, islands, mountains, seas, famous places (the Blue House)
ex) Europe, Korea, Newyork, Jeju Island
Because capital letters are used more or less frequently in the middle of a sentence, you should be able to enter uppercase letters in lowercase mode quickly and accurately as twins.
Later, we will explain the process of entering the words `Hi, I am Susy` in a case-sensitive manner. Just look at the description of the upcoming <Table 08> table.
Note that
Let's find out how to use hiragana and katakana
1.Hiragana: It is the most basic character to express everyday language with Chinese characters.
2. Katakana: Pronunciation is the same as hiragana and is mainly used in foreign language notation, onomatopoeia, phrasal verbs, telegrams, animal and plant names, advertisements or special emphasis.
(It is said that Katakana uses only about 10% of frequencies compared to Hiragana.)
Note that,
Almost all mobile phones
In call waiting mode, the phone responds as soon as the button is turned on if you press a phone number or press the call button.
In text input mode, the phone does not respond as soon as the button is turned on, but it checks the time until the button is turned off and reacts accordingly. If the time is short, normal or special characters are entered. If the time is long (usually more than 1 second), the number assigned to the button is entered.
In such a state, if the other button is turned on while the shift button is turned on like the computer shift button, it is possible to realize the button press method required by the twins when the command is executed by combining with a combination key (shortcut key).
I will now give a concrete example.
There are several types of characters in English, Japanese, and Korean assignment tables, including Figures 03-06 and Figures 17-36.66.
Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,
Green is a character that was not written on a conventional keyboard but could be entered by tapping multiple times in a multi-tap method.
Blue is a character that was not marked on a conventional keyboard but could be entered by continuously operating the character button and the character transformation button (e.g., a stroke addition button or a consonant button).
Red is the letters added randomly by the inventor (eg sentence code, symbols, Korean phonemes).
(The picture emoji is naturally added by the inventor.)
Green and blue are only Korean phonemes in this manual.
Characters that are not black may be written smaller than black, memorized, or dedicated to a portion of the display screen, so that a person who prefers the conventional method may feel less rejected at the first impression.
When you actually add a cell phone notation to apply twins, it is recommended to change the color of the text so that the user can easily identify the origin of the text. Especially in the case of Hangul phonemes.
1. For English
<Figure 03>: Conventional Type A English Keyboard (= Standard Keyboard)
: English description in the future shall be of type <Figure 03> only.
(Button 1 is not assigned an alphabet,
Button 7 is assigned 'PQRS'
Button 9 is assigned WXYZ.)
Button 1, *, 0, # to /:. , @? ! There are about 0 ~ 7 special characters depending on the manufacturer. Many types have two or three special characters.
<Figure 03> is a keyboard layout applied to almost all mobile phones around the world. It's almost a standard.
LG Electronics and Motorola are of <Figure 03> type for both Korean and non-Korean sales.
Sharp Electronics, Nokia, etc. are also produced only in <Figure 03>.
Samsung Electronics and Pantech affiliates SKY and Curitel are sold to Korea in the form of <Figure 04> but for export to <Figure 03>.
(In the application, it is not known that <Picture 04> is the world standard, so it is explained only as <Picture 04>. You can change it to <Picture 03>.)
In <Figure 03>
Of the symbols displayed on the keyboard above, the following ones do not have any function in the text input mode.
+ (Button 0) is a symbol added after the country code when entering an international phone number in standby mode.
While keeping the conventional button notation as it is,
Newly assign punctuation marks or other special characters or picture emoticons
You can use it by memorizing it, dedicate some display screens, or use it while you carry your assignments (more on that later.
<Figure 04>: Conventional Type B English Keyboard (Not a standard keyboard)
(Button 1 is assigned 'QZ',
Button 7 is assigned 'PRS'
Button 9 is assigned a `WXY`.)
<Picture 05>: English keyboard: Improvement-2 lines per button
The above <Figure 05> keyboard description will be explained in <Figure 06>.
And when you see this keyboard picture for the first time and think it is too complicated, you should be familiar with the letter assignments from buttons 0 to 9 in <Figure 16.5 or 16.6>.
In all other languages, only a few letters can be assigned, as in Figure 16.5 or 16.6.
<Figure 06>: English Keyboard: Improvement: 3 Lines per Button
If you understand <Figure 06>, you understand 99% of the improvement of Korean keyboard and Japanese keyboard.
The keyboard <Figure 06> is assigned to the conventional keyboard <Figure 03> in addition to the red special characters, which are mainly punctuation marks, and the figure emoticons.
Conventional keyboard <Figure 03> has no letters assigned to buttons 1, *, #. Additional letters were assigned.
(In button #
Each button has an additional three lines of text (special characters or picture emoticons).
The letters of each button in <Figure 06> can be divided into 2 groups or into 3 groups.
Let's divide it into three groups first.
In lower case mode,
The first group is mno?
The second group is MNO
(In order to enter uppercase letters in lowercase mode without changing the mode, we have made this assignment rule.)
The third group is blank
Divide into three groups.
Now that we have divided the groups, let's take an example of combining the letter buttons into the combination induction buttons as shown in <Figure 07>.
<Figure 07>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
The combination induction button assignment table in <Figure 07> will be explained.
The case where the combination induction button precedes the letter button will be explained.
The arrangement of the numbers 1 ~ 6, which is the number in parentheses to indicate the number of combination induction buttons, can be changed as shown in <Fig.07.1 ~ 07.8>, but as shown in the <Fig.07> table above I will explain.
In the above <Figure 06>, 0 ~ 9, *, # 12 buttons are
When it is ON alone and then OFF
As in the prior art, it functions to input the first letter assigned to each button, or executes any function including a function of changing a character mode, adding a stroke, and inputting a character including a double consonant function.
If each of the 12 buttons is ON and the other buttons are ON,
It acts as a combination induction button.
Buttons 1 and 3 act as combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the first letter of any group.
Buttons 4 and 6 act as combination induction buttons that let you enter the second letter of an arbitrary group.
Buttons 7 and 9 act as combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the third letter of an arbitrary group.
Buttons 2 and 8 act as combination induction buttons that let you enter the fourth letter of any group.
Button 5,0 acts as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the fifth letter of an arbitrary group.
The buttons * and # mean that they act as combination induction buttons that let you enter the sixth letter of an arbitrary group.
In addition to <Figure 07>, the combination induction button assignment can be changed as shown in the table below. However, in the following description, it is based on <Figure 07>.
<Figure 07.1>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table 2
<Figure 07.2>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table 3
<Figure 07.3>: Combination guide button assignment table 4
<Figure 07.4>: Combination guide button assignment table 5
<Figure 07.5>: Combination Guidance Button Assignment Table 6
<Figure 07.51>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
<Figure 07.6>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
<Figure 07.65>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
<Figure 07.66>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
<Figure 07.7>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
<Figure 07.75>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
<Figure 07.76>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
<Figure 07.8>: Figures 7 through 07.76 plus numbers in parentheses plus any number including 1:
Ex) Add 1 to Fig.07
<Figure06> Since each button's letters are divided into 3 groups, only the first ~ 3 group letter input method is needed from the table contents of <Figure 01>. After extracting the necessary parts, press buttons 6,9, # as below. Learn how to type your letters
First, let's take a look at <Figure 08> how to input letters assigned to button 6 in parallel in twin tap mode without changing mode.
<Figure 08>: Combination induction button (see Figure 07) is entered before the character button by dividing the letters assigned to button 6 into 3 groups in lower case mode when twins are used in multi-tap mode.
Within the button
Cumulative letters
turn
of mine
letter
order
letter
First Combination Induction Button + Character Button
1.6 OR
2. Can be entered as 1 + 6 OR 3 + 6
In other words
1. Make button 6 single, or
2. Button 1 and Button 3 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the first letter (see Figure 07 below).
A. Hold down button 1 and press button 6, or
B. Press and hold button 3 and press button 6.
(In this case, method B is recommended because the two-handed thumb is biased in three rows, causing two-handed thumb to interfere, and the mobile phone is inclined to one side.
(99% use method 1, but sometimes use method 2. I will explain later)
(small letter)
Second Combination Induction Button + Character Button
1. 66 OR
2. 4 + 6
In other words
1.Double click button 6
2. Button 4 and Button 6 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter a second letter.
Hold down button 4 and press button 6. (Pressing button 6 while holding button 6 cannot be done.)
(small letter)
Third Combination Induction Button + Character Button
1.666 OR
2. 7 + 6 OR 9 + 6
In other words
1. Click button 6 three times in quick succession, or
2. Button 7 and Button 9 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter a third letter.
A. Hold down button 7 and press button 6, or
B. Press button 6 while pressing button 9.
(In this case, the method B is recommended because the thumb of both hands is biased in three rows, so the two-handed thumb is interfering and the mobile phone is inclined to one side.
(small letter)
4th Combination Induction Button + Character Button
1.6666 OR
2. 2 + 6 OR 8 + 6
In other words
1.Click button 6 quickly 4 times or
(However, if a person who prefers the conventional multi-tap method enters alphabets, it may be inconvenient if the number of characters circulating is limited, so it may be limited to the second method only.)
2. Button 2 and Button 8 are combination induction buttons that let you enter the fourth letter.
A. Hold down button 2 and press button 6, or
B. Hold down button 8 and press button 6.
Fifth Combination Induction Button + Character Button
1.66666 OR
2. 5 + 6 OR 0 + 6
In other words,
1.Click button 6 quickly five times or
(However, if a person who prefers the conventional multi-tap method enters alphabets, it may be inconvenient if the number of characters circulating is limited, so it may be limited to the second method only.)
2. Button 5 and Button 0 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the fifth letter.
A. Hold down button 5 and press button 6, or
B. Press button 6 while pressing button 0.
6th Combination Induction Button + Character Button
1.666666 OR
2. * + 6 OR # + 6
In other words
1.Click button 6 quickly six times or
(However, if a person who prefers the conventional multi-tap method enters alphabets, it may be inconvenient if the number of characters circulating is limited, so it may be limited to the second method only.)
2. Button * and Button # are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the sixth letter.
A. Hold down button * and press button6, or
B. Press Button 6 while pressing Button #.
(In this case, the method B is recommended because the thumb of both hands is biased in three rows, so the two-handed thumb is interfering and the mobile phone is inclined to one side.
letter
First Combination Induction Button + Character Button Long (for example: 0.5 seconds or longer)
1. 6 ~
2. 1 + 6 ~ OR 3 + 6 ~
In other words
1.Press and hold button 6 (e.g. 0.5 seconds or more) or
(In the conventional text mode, if you press a button for more than 1 second, the number assigned to the button is a function of entering many mobile phones.
2. Button 1 and Button 3 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the first letter.
A. Press and hold Button 6 (for example, 0.5 seconds or more) while holding Button 1,
B. Press and hold button 6 (for example, 0.5 seconds or more) while pressing button 3.
(In this case, method B is recommended because the two-handed thumb is biased in three rows, causing two-handed thumb to interfere, and the mobile phone is inclined to one side.
It is much easier to change the mode to the uppercase mode, but to change the mode to uppercase after entering the uppercase letter and then change the number of strokes to lowercase.
This is because the conventional method has many strokes and many mode change mistakes. The same applies to the following.
(Hereinafter, pressing for more than 0.5 seconds is an example of long pressing.)
(capital letter)
4 + 6 ~
In other words
Since Button 4 and Button 6 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the second letter,
Press and hold button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds while button 4 is pressed. (Pressing button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds while holding button 6 cannot be done.)
(capital letter)
7 + 6 ~ OR 9 + 6 ~
In other words
Since Button 7 and Button 9 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the third letter.
A. Press and hold button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds
B. Press and hold button 9 for more than 0.5 seconds.
(In this case, the method B is recommended because the thumb of both hands is biased in three rows, so the two-handed thumb is interfering and the mobile phone is inclined to one side.
(capital letter)
2 + 6 ~ OR 8 + 6 ~
In other words
Since Button 2 and Button 8 are combination induction buttons that allow the fourth character to be entered,
A. Hold down Button 2 and press Button 6 for at least 0.5 seconds,
B. Press and hold button 8 for more than 0.5 seconds.
5 + 6 ~ OR 0 + 6 ~
In other words,
Since Button 5 and Button 0 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the fifth letter,
A. Press and hold button 5 for more than 0.5 seconds
B. Hold down button 0 and press button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds.
* + 6 ~ OR # + 6 ~
In other words
Since Button * and Button # are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the sixth letter,
A. Press and hold button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds
B. Hold down button # and press button 6 for more than 0.5 seconds.
(In this case, the method B is recommended because the thumb of both hands is biased in three rows, so the two-handed thumb is interfering and the mobile phone is inclined to one side.
letter
2 double + 6 OR 8 double + 6
In other words
Since Button 2 and Button 8 are combination induction buttons that allow the fourth character to be entered,
A. After double-clicking button 2, do not release your finger from button 2, and then press button 6 while holding it.
B. After double-clicking button 8, do not release your finger from button 8 and press button 6 while pressing.
5 double + 6 OR 0 double + 6
In other words,
Since Button 5 and Button 0 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the fifth letter,
A. After double-clicking button 5, press and hold button 6 without releasing
B. After double-clicking button 0, press button 6 while pressing your finger.
* Double +6 OR #Double +6
In other words
Since Button * and Button # are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the sixth letter,
A. After double-clicking button *, do not release your finger * from the button * and press button6, or
B. After double-clicking button #, do not release your finger from button #.
(In this case, the method B is recommended because the thumb of both hands is biased in three rows, so the two-handed thumb is interfering and the mobile phone is inclined to one side.
(If you are not yet trained in twins, choose the combination induction button while thinking about the order in which the letters you want to enter are assigned to the buttons. Will be selected.)
In the case of twins in multi-tap mode, the letters assigned to button 9 are divided into 3 groups in lower case mode and the combination induction button is entered before the letter button as shown in the above <Figure 08>.
And
In the case of twins in multi-tap mode, the letters assigned to button # in lowercase mode are divided into 3 groups, and the combination-induced button is preceded by the letter button. The only way to enter `=`, which is the first character of group 1, is to change it.
In other words, method 1 and 2 below are not available, method 1 is not possible, and method 2 is only possible.
1. # (not possible) OR
2. Can be entered as 1 + # OR 3 + #
In other words
1. Make button # single (impossible),
2. Button 1 and Button 3 are combination induction buttons that allow you to enter the first letter.
A. While holding button 1, press button #, or
B. Hold down Button 3 and press Button #.
(In this case, method B is recommended because the two-handed thumb is biased in three rows, causing interference between two-handed thumb, mobile phone inclining to one side, and poor stability of holding posture.)
Because button # already has
So, in <Figure 08>, `(1 method 99% is used but method 2 is used in the last phrase that explains how to input` m `which is the first letter of group 1 of button 6. I will.
In the same way, the button * already
And, as will be explained later, the same button problem was conventionally solved by a right button or a space button, but it can also be solved by the above combination method. Even when the T9 method or the 2- TOUCH method is combined with the twins, the input method is different when the multi-tap method and the twins are combined in that the first letter of each button is input by a combination method instead of a single stroke. This will be explained later.
now
Let's divide the letters of the buttons in Figure 6 above into two groups.
How to enter each letter
<Fig.08> is the same method as the 1st ~ 2nd group character input method. I will not explain separately.
And in <Picture 06>
On the 6th letter of the group 1 letters of button 1
On the 6th letter of the 1 group letter of button 2
On the 6th of the group 1 letters of button 3
On the 6th letter of 1 group of buttons 5
This is a feature that was added to the computer keyboard buttons to eliminate the inconvenience of not present in the phone keypad. In the age of mobile phone Internet seems to be a necessary function.
If you wish, you can also add function buttons such as HOME, END, PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN and ESC.
If you want to continuously perform functions such as CLR, INS, DEL, ENTER, etc., press and hold button 1 or button 2 or button 3 or button 5 continuously while pressing the combination induction button for inputting the 6th character. .
If you want to delete multiple letters by using the DEL function, press and hold the left button * (or button #), which is a combination-inducing button that allows you to enter the sixth letter, because the DEL function is the sixth letter of button 3. Button 3 with DEL assigned to
Functions exist in conventional mobile phones, but are usually located just above the 4 * 3 (4 rows and 3 columns) keypad, i.e., slightly off the 4 * 3 (4 rows and 3 columns) keypad. Even if manipulated, it was allocated for those who prefer the twin route with less copper.
This won't be very beneficial in English,
When you want to erase only the phonemes that you have entered by mistake
Erase phonemes one by one
Cancels the function just realized, including stroke addition or double consonant.
If you use it as a function, the gain is huge (you can use it like a CONTROL + Z shortcut on a PC, or you can add the CONTROL + Z function as a new letter).
For example, in the input method
When operating the celestial button to enter ㅙ
. ㅡ ㅣ. ㅣ In order
. When you type ㅡ ㅣ ㅣ
If a group (eg group 3) is assigned only a 'picture emoji' that shows emotion, another group (eg group 4) assigns a 'picture emoji' of a specific group (eg group 3) to 'letter emoji' You can also assign changes.
(In this state, it is not necessary to write the letters of other groups (for example, the fourth group) one by one.
But here,
`Can we assign so many letters to a button on the phone, as shown in Figure 05 or Figure 06?
You might be wondering if this is possible. And even if it's possible, we'll also show you how to make more room for the buttons in Figure 15-16.3.
First, let's see and feel that we can assign a lot of letters to the buttons on the phone. <Figure 14>: LG Electronics 706ie (Wine Phone) For Export to Japan
<Figure 09>: Samsung Electronics SPH-V9150 4 Row (1,4,7, *) Slide Type
The button has a border, so there is less button space.
However, the number of characters per button is 3 lines long enough and 4 lines long, and 4 lines long enough horizontally. If you write a small number or move it slightly to the left, you can see 1 ~ 2 lines horizontally. Since there is more space to mark, you can mark a total of 5 ~ 6 lines horizontally.
You can see this more clearly by looking at the `@` pattern on Button #. Therefore, simple patterns or picture emoticons can be marked enough.
Nevertheless, it is recommended to make the button space bigger by making the button without border as shown in Figure 10 ~ 14.
<Figure 10>: Samsung SCH-B820 4 row (1,4,7, *) slide type
(The button has no border, so the button space is large)
However, since the button space is large, the letters are displayed largely, so the number of characters that can be allocated per button does not seem to be different from Figure 09.
<Figure 11>: LG Electronics sh-650 5 row (call button, 1,4,7, *) slide type
Slide type
Usually, 4 rows slide as shown in <Figure 09 ~ 10>.
<Figure 11> is five rows, so even if the button interval is narrower than the four-row slide phone, the number of characters that can be assigned per button is three vertically and four lines are possible. The more you slide, the larger the height of the button will be, so you will be able to add more letters or make them larger.
There is a phrase called `` Add stroke '' of button * and `` double consonant '' of button #, and the letters are more clearly visible in the actual product. Can be written.
If you write a small number slightly smaller or move it to the left a little more, there will be more space for one or two lines. Therefore, you can mark a total of seven to eight lines horizontally.
Obviously, the four-row slide phone in Figure 10 can be more relaxed.
As shown in Figures 11, 12, and 13, the Korean phonemes of LG Electronics are printed on the keyboard considerably larger than the English alphabet. If you reduce the size of Korean phonemes to the size of the English alphabet like other manufacturers including Samsung, the space becomes larger.
<Figure 12>: LG Electronics SV-300 (Wine Phone)
See Figure 14, Figure 13, and Figure 11 for description.
<Figure 13>: Enlarged Keypad of 'LG Electronics SV-300 (Wine Phone) Folder Type'
This is an enlarged picture of the keypad of Figure 12.
See Figure 11 and Figure 14 for description.
<Figure 14>: LG Electronics 706ie (Wine Phone)
Figure 14 is for export to Japan of LG Electronics SV-300 (wine phone) clamshell in Figure 12. The design is the same as for sale in Korea, and only the keyboard letters are Japanese.
There are two lines of Japanese and Chinese characters on button 0, and you can clearly see them. There are spaces for inputting two more lines vertically, and one space for more one side.
Thus, a total of four vertical lines and four horizontal lines can be written.
If you write a small number slightly smaller or move it a little to the left side, there will be more space for one or two lines on the side, so you can mark a total of 5 to 6 lines horizontally.
It is possible to write Chinese characters so that they can be recognized. It is obvious that a simple pattern or a picture emoticon can be marked enough.
Whether it is in Korea or Japan, the wine phone has a large button size, so the letters are printed largely. In Korea, the wine phone was hit as a filial piety phone because old people can see the letters well because the letters on the keyboard and LCD are large.
Now that may be assigned to input characters as soon as a number of characters on the big button, the button size is suitable because the more easy to operate the buttons as fast as you can be born again as a high-speed text phone.
In this respect, the folding type rather than the slide type may be more advantageous to provide convenience to users by realizing twins.
While looking at <Figure 09 ~ 14>, we can see that a lot of letters can be assigned to mobile phone buttons.
For those who want to assign a small number of special characters to the keypad so that there is a lot of white space on the button, or to add more characters, here is one way.
The following <Figure 15> is a picture of Samsung's mobile phone display screen exported to Japan. (The display state of the keypad is almost similar to <Figure 14>.)
I think there are so many Koreans in Japan that you can input Korean or Korean.
If you write Korean on the keypad, you may have trouble selling it to Japanese people who do not use Korean.
Hangul is not written on the keypad.
In the Hangul input mode, the part of the display screen is devoted to see the Hangul phonemes on the display screen and the actual input is done by pressing the buttons on the keypad.
(You do not touch the display screen to enter it.)
Even if there are complicated Chinese characters in Button * and Button # in Figure 15, it can be recognized enough, so we can assign about 4 picture emoticons per electronic button on the display screen.
In fact, in any country, special characters are almost always entered this way.
just
In the special character mode, the phrase that has been entered so far is displayed on the display screen, and there are types of special characters (for example, some models of Samsung Electronics).
There were only types (e.g., some models of LG Electronics) that only dedicate a certain character to the current space and display it.
<Figure 16> allocates a picture emoticon by allocating a part of the display screen mentioned above, and inputs the picture emoticon of the display screen as an example by pressing a button on the keypad. In order to assign one more special character, the number of the button is not indicated, but a person who is thirsty for the special character can use it with a little spatial awareness even without the button number. You can also number them, as in 16.3.
Samsung's Haptic 2 (SCH-W550 model), launched in the second half of 2008, is a full-touch screen mobile phone with no front panel, no physical buttons, and only an electronic virtual button, a touchpad. 14.6> In the Hangul mode or in the special character mode, there is no button number on the keypad. Is.)
<Figure 14.5>: Haptic 2 (SCH-W550 Model) Touch Screen Keypad in Korean Mode
<Figure 14.6>: Touch Screen Keypad in Haptic 2 (SCH-W550 Model) Special Character Mode
And to show the character assignment table for inputting special characters that dedicate part of the display screen as shown in Figures 16.1 ~ 16.3.
It would be better if the user could choose to be able to make it visible at that time, or to make it invisible.
(If you use a lot of special characters, make it visible by default.
If you use less special characters, you may want to make it invisible by default.)
This is because some people dislike having a part of the display screen show character assignments for entering special characters.
To suggest one way,
In the text input mode, there is no call button
Part of the display screen has a letter assignment table for entering special characters.
How about running it with a toggle key that makes it visible and invisible?
(As in the conventional character input mode, volume adjustment in addition to the button and nothing happens, the call button, button 2, the Internet Connection button, it also camera button can be toggled such a button, key, or when the touch pad more than the physical buttons way As a conceivable method, a new button (physical button or touch pad button) can be added to use a portion of the display screen as a dedicated toggle key to make the letter assignment table for inputting special characters visible and invisible .
Toggle keys do not worry about confusion because the current status is not clearly displayed, which always brings a lot of typing errors to the user, but in this case, the assignment is shown on the screen and the current status is clearly displayed. )
(Or, as in the previous example,
As you assign the CLR, INS, DEL, and ENTER functions to the sixth letter of the different buttons,
You can also assign the function of making it visible or not.
Alternatively, it can be assigned with a combination induction button.)
And,
With part of the display screen showing the letter assignment table for entering special characters,
You can also create multiple page layout group pages.
(Of course, it is recommended to place the most frequently used special characters closer to the first page, and not to create several pages of special characters, as in <Figure 15>. It may be a letter representing a dog language.)
It is as if there are several special character group pages in the conventional special character mode.
In doing so, virtually no special character mode is necessary.
All special character group pages are displayed in normal character mode, including Korean mode, English uppercase letter mode, English lowercase mode, hiragana mode, and katakana mode, allowing input without changing the character mode.
How would you change each special character group page in this situation?
At this time, too,
In the conventional text input mode, why not operate the volume control button that does not respond as a page change button.
(In addition to the conventional character input mode, volume control, the button and nothing happens button, call button, an Internet connection button, it also camera button can also be used for such a button, the page change button, or a better way when the touch pad rather than physical buttons as a method that you think may add a new button (physical button or touchpad button) to use a portion of the display screen with dedicated buttons for special groups of characters on page change function).
Pressing the volume up button changes the page to the top page, and pressing the volume down button changes the page to the bottom page.
Alternatively, you can change the page by pressing any button while holding the direction button.
E.g
Hold down the up button and press button 1 to go to the top page.
If you press button 1 while holding down button, page changes to lower page.
(Or, as in the previous example,
As you assign the CLR, INS, DEL, and ENTER functions to the sixth letter of the different buttons,
You can also assign the function of making it visible or not.
Alternatively, it can be assigned with a combination induction button.
And if you have a touchpad, you can create and use a page change button on the touchpad.)
And every page. The input method may be the same or different.
For example, whatever special page is currently displayed, all the special characters displayed on the display screen can be entered using the third group character input method.
1 page is input by the 3rd group character input method,
Page 2 is input by the fourth group character input method.
The third page may be input by the fifth group character input method.
(I think it's better to make the input method the same on each page.
And, in general text mode including Korean mode, English uppercase letter mode, lowercase English letter mode, hiragana mode, and katakana mode, 'direction button danta' moves the cursor. .)
And, the function described above,
Display screen Let's show some character assignment table for entering special characters, Invisible Toggle The function and each special character group page change function can be combined with a single button.
For example, conventionally
In text input mode
If you press the call button that did not respond once
Display screen
The character assignment table for inputting special characters is shown, which is one page of each special character group page, and if you press the call button one more time, it becomes two pages of each special character group page. Will be. The last page is
Display screen
Let's assume some of them don't have a letter assignment table for entering special characters.
Display screen
It is recommended to use a screen without special character tables as usual.
In any case, by assigning a special character to a part of the display screen, the special character can be directly input in the normal character mode without changing the character mode from the normal character mode to the special character mode.
Conventionally
When changing from normal text mode to special text mode, you had to press the text mode change button several times.
Even when returning from the special character mode to the normal character mode, it is cumbersome to press the character mode change button several times, and there are many cases in which the process is cumbersome even when the special character is entered, and the process is left alone.
And conventionally
Since only one special character is supported per button, special characters are entered using a special character assignment table on a large number of pages. Therefore, it was troublesome to change a large number of pages in order to display the desired special characters on the display screen.
Now, as there are several special characters per button as shown in <Figure 16>, you can display a large number of special characters with a small number of special character pages, and use a small number of times to display the desired special characters on the display screen. You may change the page.
(After that, there are several kinds of combination induction buttons, so you can easily enter the special characters you want.)
However, if you feel that the number of special characters is not enough to show part of the display screen for entering special characters (although it will rarely be), now you have a thin tape-like board that can be pulled out of the phone case or inside the phone. The only option is to carry a special character assignment table on a separate sheet of paper. Or you could use a hologram.
In any letter system, you can expand the group by assigning additional letters to the display screen and other parts, as in the current English description.
In non-English speaking countries,
In the past, the English alphabet was basically written on the button.
Now, in order to make room for assigning a lot of special characters to buttons, you can assign English alphabet to the display screen as shown in <Figure 15>, but it is not recommended much.
Anyway, it was very difficult to input even if there are 3-4 fewer characters assigned to each button, but there are too many characters that can be easily input by twins, so how to express the characters so that the user can recognize them. It makes me think about whether I can.
In addition, it is possible to display the button notation electronically, rather than paint including individual organic light emitting diodes, so if the user changes the special character assignment of the button, it will be good to reflect the change in the button. In the non-English-speaking countries, the English alphabet is rarely needed in the letter mode of the national language, so that the alphabet is not displayed. Thus, you can assign additional special characters in place. And in all countries, including English-speaking countries, the number is rarely needed in the normal character mode, so that the number is not displayed, and the special number may be additionally assigned to the place where the conventional number is displayed. Even if you sometimes press and hold a number, most users are already memorizing, so you don't have to display it. You can also assign special characters to the newly created free space by displaying small numbers. (If you mark the buttons electronically, rather than painting them with individual organic light-emitting diodes, you can embed several types of text input methods with different default character markings, even if you enter the same language. In this state, various types of Hangul can be expressed in various forms, such as a form additionally assigned to the Hangul complete type characters, a form additionally assigned to a punctuation mark, and an additional form to a picture emoticon. See 36.65.
Or, instead of an organic light-emitting diode, you can use the display screen in the form of Figure 16.3 and its explanation.)
I do not write it to a button electronically including an organic light-emitting diode button,
Even with a normal button that prints on the button with paint,
In non-English speaking countries
As the English alphabet was assigned and printed in standard order in the past,
Now, printing only one or two English alphabets per button does not interfere with recognizing the order of unphoned phonemes, so you can print only one or two English alphabets per button to maximize the space you want to display your native characters or special characters. have.
Then, if the third group input method is used only as indicated on the button, the one on the display screen may be input by the fourth group letter input method, and the other items may be input by the fifth group letter input method.
At this time, it is possible to say, 'What is on the display screen can be input using the touch pad?', As shown in <Figure 14.6>, it may be possible if only one special character is assigned per button on the display screen. Since the thumb is thick because it is assigned to a dog, it will be difficult to input exactly one of several special characters.
The keypad itself is touch pad
It is not in the form of a QWERTY keyboard like Samsung's Haptic 2 released in the second half of 2008.
Small keypad type with large button size
Even if it is touchpad,
It is very hard to input by touching the button itself without any errors yet, there are many false recognition errors, and the touch is not as good as the actual physical buttons.
In Korea and abroad, users have been complaining about the discomfort of the touchpad type (in the haptic 2 testimonials on the Internet, there are no people like chopsticks, so the haptic 2 has developed a lot compared to the haptic 1, but still It is also difficult to input text with your finger while watching the touchpad keyboard of the Hap-Tek 2. And because the touch is not good compared to the physical buttons, typing letters without looking at the keypad will make typos. Of course, it is also inconvenient to enter a character, but of course, it is also applicable to mobile phones, which are touch pads and small keypads, so that characters can be entered more quickly and easily than conventional touch small keypads.),
The mobile phone of full touch screen type appeared for a long time, but the top panel is a touch screen, but it is being released to take the conventional physical button type only for text input. This is the case with Samsung's Soul Phone (No SCH-W590) or LG's Disco Phone (SH-650 in Figure 11 above).
In addition, even if only one special character is assigned to each display screen button, there will be a problem because it is smaller than the small keypad type touch button of the full touch screen, which has a problem of large buttons in the past.
Meanwhile,
In the past, there was only one character input mode change button.
Normal button '*' or the top right button among the function buttons was used as the text input mode change button.
The text input mode usually has a number of text input modes including local language mode, English lowercase mode, English uppercase mode, special character mode, and numeric mode.
The character mode change button was pressed to select and enter any one of a plurality of character input modes.
And in the following description
The general character mode refers to a mode for inputting characters representing everyday languages such as a native language mode, an English lowercase mode, and an English uppercase mode except for a special character mode.
The selected general text mode refers to the general text mode currently selected among the general text modes. In most cases this will be the native language mode.
As you type text, the most common text mode and special text mode are selected.
To change from the selected general text mode to the special text mode, it is necessary to press the text mode change button several times.
In order to change from the special text mode to the selected text mode, it is necessary to press the text mode change button several times.
There were inconveniences of pressing the button for changing the text input mode several times to switch between the special text mode and the selected general text mode.
So, now,
Special character mode and selected general character mode come in only two character modes and suggest setting up a special character mode change button.
Thus, by pressing the dedicated character mode change button, it is possible to switch between the special character mode and the selected general character mode by one stroke.
New character mode and selected general character mode come in only two character modes, and a new character mode change button to go to
You can add the actual physical buttons compared to the number of conventional buttons,
Call buttons, volume control buttons, Internet connection buttons, camera buttons, etc., which do not respond in the conventional text mode, that is, no special functions are assigned in the text mode, may be used as a dedicated text mode change button.
Then, only the selected general text mode and special text mode come in two text modes, and the special text mode which can be selected by the exclusive text mode change button to let go,
It may be the same as a conventional general special character mode or a special character mode among a plurality of character modes (for example, a national language mode, an English lowercase mode, an English uppercase mode, a special character mode, a numeric mode) on the same device,
It may be different from the conventional general special character mode, including the special character mode that collects only special characters that are frequently used.
anyway,
Display screen using the call button, volume control button, internet connection button, camera button, etc., which are not responded in the conventional text mode, that is, no special function is assigned in the text mode (mostly as a toggle key) The letters in the table that are shown by devoted part of
1. Given that it is shown in the selected normal text mode,
The letters in the table of characters displayed by dedicating part of the display screen are directly input in the selected general character mode, and the function key (or toggle key) at this time is whether or not to display them. You can think of it as a function key (or toggle key), or you can enter those characters even when those characters are not shown.
That is, by devoting part of the display screen
Character table (= special character list)
Not seen
Even if you don't have
To be shown
Able
Character tables
You can also have characters on any one or more of the pages entered,
The letters
If you don't memorize, those letters
As shown
Function key (or not)
Toggle key
In a nutshell
Cheat sheet
Make it visible
Invisible
Pressing the function keys) delimits those parts of the display screen.
As shown
You can then type those letters while looking at them with your own eyes.
2. Considered to be seen in the special character mode,
Characters in the character table shown by allocating part of the display screen may be input in the special character mode.
At this time Special characters
Conventionally existing Special character mode Can be replaced,
Conventionally existing Special character mode Other used in parallel Special Character Mode have.
Special characters Mode and Conventionally existing Special character mode One other point to mention is that
Conventionally existing In special character mode While only one special character is assigned to one button,
Here In special character mode It is a format that has several special characters assigned to one button. Like normal In text mode It is the same as the format that several normal characters are assigned to one button.
So, of the present In special character mode , A special character assigned to a specific sequence of a particular button As specific order Continuous Multi-tap method Or conventional Shift button It is also possible to input the method used or the twin method.
For example, In special character mode , Button 5 The third special character assigned to it Button 5 number 3 Continuous Multi-tap method Or conventional Shift button It is also possible to input the method used or the twin method.
A function key (or toggle key) when there may be another special character mode used in parallel with a conventionally existing special character mode is a dedicated character that allows only the selected general character mode and the two special character modes to come and go. It can also be considered as a mode change button (or function key or toggle key).
When the characters shown in Table devote a portion of the display screen shows, the current character input mode is a typical character as a special character mode will work in most cases can not be entered, including the multi-tap method It is also possible to input a special character of the character table shown by dedicating a part of the display screen in a twin method including a character input method or a group character input method, such as a conventional character input method or group character input method. Because the character mode is different.
And,
Whether it's a touchpad button or an organic light-emitting diode button, Laser pad For buttons that are not buttons or paints
Above
Dedicate part of the display screen As shown In a letter table The letters
remind Like number one Selected general In text mode As shown Would Considered Case and
remind Like number two special In text mode As shown Would Considered In any case, including anyways ,
I was trying to show part of the display screen
In a letter table
The same characters can be displayed on the same button (I think it will be more useful in case 1 above). For example, the form of <Figure 05> or <Figure 16.5> is different from the page. May continue to appear
There is
.
By taking part of the display screen, the character table (= special character table) Although not shown, letters on any one or more pages of the letter tables that can be shown by delimiting part of the display screen may be input.
<Figure 15>: Samsung 920SC for Japan: Picture showing Cheonji Factor on the display screen
<Figure 16>: Example of special character display on display screen
Even while maintaining the conventional button notation,
A portion of the display screen may be devoted to assign additional punctuation marks, other special characters or picture emoticons, and additional Hangul complete phonemes.
Perhaps this would be the form most conventional users would be willing to accept.
(In conventional buttons, few punctuation marks are indicated. Therefore, it is recommended to assign at least one punctuation mark for each display screen button, as shown in <Figure 16.1>.
In addition, if the conventional Korean input method is applied to the childish language as it is, it is better to allocate the Hangul complete phonemes added as shown in <Figure 16.2>.
<Figure 16.3> is an example of how to standardize Korean input method even if it is not uniformly displayed on the button.)
As described above, as shown in Figures 16 to 16.2, the special character mode is practically unnecessary, and special characters can be input in the normal character mode without changing the character mode from the normal character mode to the special character mode.
What is on the display screen will probably be typed in a different way of entering the letters on the button (eg, the second group of letters).
Alternatively, the characters on the display screen may be input in a group character input method such as a method of inputting a character displayed on a button. In this case, the letters on the display screen are assigned to the buttons in the order of the letters written on the buttons, and they can be entered in the same group character input method, but they may be recognized as not being displayed due to the limitation of the button space. It is.
(Anyway, that is, any one of several twin input methods including the first to fifth group character input methods may be selected and input.)
In <Figure 16>, only the first group (page) of the special character group (page) is shown. To display another group (page), use the volume control button or the like. If you look at only one page, you can already enter 36 special characters without changing the mode.
If you feel rejected, you have to memorize special character assignments or carry them with you. (Of course, newly assigned letters may be different letter groups.)
<Figure 16.1> Assigning Punctuation Marks to Display Screens
Set <Figure 16.1> as the first page of the display screen.
You can also use Figure 16 as the second page of the display screen.
(The figures in Figures 16-16.1 are duplicated, but assuming they are not.)
<Figure 16.2> Allocating Hangul Complete Phonemes to the Display Screen
Since the assignment of <Figure 16.2> is a random display of Korean phonemes that are not assigned to completion in the conventional Korean input method, the displayed Korean phonemes are displayed differently according to the type of the conventional Korean input method.
(When conventional character input system and twins are parallel,
The method of inputting the letter assigned to the actual button and the method of inputting some or all of the letters of each button on the display screen of <Figure 16.2> may be the same.
For example, Korean phonemes and punctuation marks of letters displayed on actual buttons and letters displayed on buttons on a display screen can be input by the first group of text input methods.).
Set <Figure 16.2> as the first page of the display screen.
Set <Figure 16.1> as the second page of the display screen.
You can also use Figure 16 as the third page of the display screen.
(The figures in Figures 16 and 16.2 show duplicates of the motifs, but they are not.)
<Figure 16.3> Assigning Standard Hangul Phonemes to Display Screens
Due to disagreement with mobile phone manufacturers and telecommunication companies, the standardization of Hangul input method was not made.
The information displayed on the button is expressed differently for each manufacturer as before,
New Korean input method mode
Standard character assignments can be displayed on the display screen.
This level of standardization is possible at any time because no consultation is required.
Of course, the input method is recommended to use the multi-tap and twin, or twin only mode.
In this case, since the phoneme assignment of the conventional method indicated on the physical button is different from the standardized phoneme assignment indicated on the electronic button of the display screen,
The phonemes input by the single shot will be different,
In principle, the method of inputting the phoneme assignment on the display screen without changing the character input mode cannot be combined with the conventional Hangul input method that inputs what is displayed on the physical button.
(In parallel, the first letter of each electronic button of the standard phoneme assignment on the display screen should also be entered as twins, and the twin letters (first group character input method) would not be parallel to the conventional Korean input method indicated on the physical button. Only when the standard phonemes on the display screen can be entered in twins (first group character input method).)
(The assignment in <Figure 16.3> is the same as the Korean phonetic assignment (see <Figure 23 ~ 26.7>) of the Pantech series, so in this case, it can be parallel to the input method of the Pantech series.)
Set <Figure 16.3> as the first page of the display screen.
Set <Figure 16.2> as the second page of the display screen.
Set <Figure 16.1> to the third page of the display screen.
You can also use Figure 16 as the fourth page of the display screen.
(The figures in Figures 16-16.3 show duplicates of the motifs, but they are not.)
or
In addition to the standard letter assignments as above,
Even in the absence of standardization,
Built-in several Hangul input methods in the phone,
By setting several Hangul input method modes,
If you select a specific Hangul input method mode,
Improved selected Hangul input method , so that the phoneme assignment table appears on the display screen,
It is also possible to input in the conventional method of the selected Hangul input method and the twin (or twin only mode) in parallel.
'Improvement of the selected Hangul input method' means
The form in the case of improving the celestial way means to display as shown in <Figure 22.8>.
In the case of improving the Pantech Sky or Curitel method, the form is as shown in <Figure 26.8>.
When the LG EZ system is improved, the form is represented as shown in <Figure 32.8>.
The improved form of the Motorola approach is shown in Figure 36.66.
This way, even if a manufacturer buys another mobile phone, he can use his favorite text input method, but he can use the twins to input more quickly.
Of course, it is recommended that the input method be parallel to the selected conventional method or the twin exclusive mode method.
(You can change the input page only to the desired input method among the improved forms of Korean input method displayed on multiple pages without changing the character mode.
Again, just as with the standard letter assignments mentioned above,
Since the phoneme assignment of the conventional method written on the physical button is different from that of the electronic button on the display screen,
The phonemes input by the single shot will be different,
In principle, the method of inputting the phoneme assignment on the display screen without changing the character input mode cannot be combined with the conventional Hangul input method that inputs what is displayed on the physical button.
(In parallel, the first letter of each electronic button of phoneme assignment on the display screen should also be entered as twins, and it is only when the twin (first group character input method) is not parallel to the conventional Korean input method indicated on the physical button. , Can be input by the phoneme twin of the display screen (first group character input method).)
<Figure 16.5>: English: Improvement: Two-line Margin
The button has fewer special characters or picture emoticons than <Figure05> or <Figure06>.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Picture 16.6>: English: Improvement: No 2-line emoticon
The buttons are assigned only special characters as compared to <Figure 03> and do not have a picture emoticon.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
If you want to make sure that you can enter only English words that consist only of the English alphabet, you can see how to enter English words in the section 'Word Writing Practice'.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Now let's learn about Japanese input method.
<Figure 17>: Japanese Keyboard: Conventional
To understand the Japanese input method below, you need to know a little about the Japanese writing system.
Japanese is expressed using Kanji, Hiragana, and Katakana.
Hiragana and Katakana have the same pronunciation as the upper and lower case letters of English, but the letters are different. Unlike English, they are used differently, and Katakana is said to use only about 10 percent of the combined kanji and hiragana.
The use of Hiragana and Katakana is described above.
Hiragana and Katakana have about 50 letters each.
As shown in Figure 17, the small keypad contains the letters in column 1 of the entire hiragana list below.
1 (あ a), 2 (か ka), 3 (さ sa), 4 (た ta), 5 (な na), 6 (は ha), 7 (ま ma), 8 (や ya), 9 (ら ra) and 0 (わ wa) are written as representative letters.
The conventional assignment situation up to hidden characters other than the representative characters is as follows.
First, the hiragana conventional assignment in hiragana mode is as follows.
Button 1 has あ (a) い (i) う (u) え (e) お (o)
Button 2 has か (ka) き (ki) く (ku) け (ke) こ (ko)
Button 3 has さ (sa) し (si) す (su) せ (se) そ (so)
Button 4 has た (ta) ち (ti) つ (tu) て (te) と (to)
Button 5 has な (na) に (ni) ぬ (nu) ね (ne) の (no)
In button 6, は (ha) ひ (hi) ふ (hu) へ (he) ほ (ho)
Button 7 has ま (ma) み (mi) む (mu) め (me) も (mo)
Button 8 has や (ya) ゆ (yu) よ (yo)
Button 9 has ら (ra) り (ri) る (ru) れ (re) ろ (ro)
In button 0, わ (wa) を (wo) ん (ng)
In addition, the conventional assignment of Katakana in Katakana mode is as follows (pronounced sound is the same as above).
Button 1 has a イ ウ エ オ
On the button 2, キ キ キ ケ コ
Button 3 is サ シ ス セ セ ソ
Button 4 on the タ チ ツ テ ト
Button 5 is ナ ニ ニ ヌ ネ ノ
Button 6 has ハ ヒ フ ヘ ホ
The button 7 is マ ミ ム メ モ
Button 8 contains the ヤ ユ ヨ
Button 9 on the ラ リ ル レ ロ
In button 0, ワ ヲ ン
After all, about 5 Japanese characters are assigned to each button. You only need to know this.
So conventionally
In the case of inputting in a multi-tap method, each time a button is pressed, 5 letters are cycled through.
If the user chooses to activate the PREDICTION mode, a Japanese word or a Chinese character containing the characters entered so far is presented as a candidate word, and the user may take the form of selecting a desired word among the candidate words. .
If you take an example with Korean words
Typing `haking` is a candidate word
Student, bachelor cap, school corps, department, academic, semester, academic, abuse, grade, academic, academic, learning, academic, school, school district, school, academic, academic, academic, parent, parent, academic, academic, academic, academic, Candidates such as school windows are presented in hiragana and kanji, and the user selects a desired word.However, in order to input Japanese, a large number of strokes are required because the cursor needs to be moved several times. It is very tricky and inconvenient, because there are many cases that do not exist in the DB until many surveys can be input by multi-tap, and it may need to be converted to kanji separately. I'm trying to use commercial phrases, but still uncomfortable.
In Korean input, such PREDICTION function is rarely needed.
If twins are also applied to Japanese characters (Hiragana, Katakana) input, without such a function, English can be input faster than conventional Korean characters, and special characters can also be freely inputted, as English is improved by twins. (In addition, it may be possible to improve the Chinese character conversion speed by adding a function to help convert Japanese characters to Chinese characters, including the ability to speed up the area selection for Chinese character conversion to the assigned letters.)
And on button 1 . @ /: Special characters are assigned, but in Japanese mode, you cannot input them.
While keeping the conventional button notation as it is,
Newly assign punctuation marks or other special characters or picture emoticons
You can use it by memorizing it, dedicate some display screens, or use it with your assignments. (Of course, newly assigned letters can be different letter groups.)
<Figure 18>: Japanese Keyboard: Improvement: 2 lines per button
I will explain only the buttons 0 ~ 9 of Figure 18 above.
As mentioned earlier.
Among the special characters' colors, including letters and punctuation
Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,
Red is the letters (eg sentence and symbols) added by the inventor.
(Graphic emoticons are also added by the inventor.)
Assume that the current text mode is Hiragana mode.
Each button in <Figure 18> has two lines of Japanese characters, punctuation marks, picture emoticons, and English alphabets.
In the first line (= top line), there is one hiragana, one punctuation mark, and one picture emoji.
Why are you so assigned?
Each button has 5 hiragana assigned to it, with one Hiragana already marked and 4 Hiragana hidden.
Enter 5 hiragana letters and 1 punctuation mark and input a total of 6 letters in the first group letter input method.
It is intended to input a total of six Katakana and one picture emoji as the second group character input method.
So you can enter Katakana without changing the mode in Hiragana mode.
In this way, hiragana can be entered in Katakana mode without changing the mode.
Button * and Button #
In the first line, there are 5 punctuation marks and 1 picture emoji. They are input by the first group letter input method.
The second line contains four picture emoticons, which can be entered using the second group of characters.
Conventionally, it is inconvenient to input only hiragana in hiragana mode, but if twins are applied, it is possible to easily input katakana, special characters, and emoticons without changing the mode. Too great a gift.
Some people prefer to apply the combination induction table as shown in <Figure 07.65>. This is because it is easy to memorize because the combination induction buttons that let you enter the first to fifth letters are arranged in straight lines in the first and third columns.
(However, in very fine view, copper lines are a big disadvantage for people who type a lot of text.)
<Figure 07.65>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
The concept of using the call button and the end button as a combination induction button for entering the first letter.
In fact, the combination induction button that lets you enter the first letter is rarely used,
When I press the call button in the text input mode, the phone does not respond,
If there is even one letter on the character input screen, pressing the end button, a screen appears asking if you want to stop entering the character, so if you press the cancel button at this time to restore the original, there is no fear of typos.
Like above, if you don't want to see the screen you ask,
The function of the end button in the text mode is different from the conventional method, including the function of the conventional end button by combining the call button and the end button at the same time. Doing so can help you avoid unpleasant situations. (And in the text input mode, if you press the end button for a long time, the power will be turned off, but such an accident can be prevented.)
In particular, <Figure 11>: LG Electronics sh-650 5 rows (call button, 1,4,7, *) slide type and below Figure 18.5 LG Electronics L705ix slide type slide type that slides 5 rows like a mobile phone It seems to be easy to apply to mobile phones or most clamshell phones. This is because most of the folder types are shown in <Figure 18.6> Sharp Electronics: W61SH Folder Type, and the rows with Button 1 and the lines with Call buttons are attached as shown in <Figure 18.6>.
<Figure 18.5>: LG L705ix 5-Line Slide Cell Phone
<Figure 18.6>: Sharp Electronics: W61SH Clamshell
<Figure 19>: Japanese keyboard: Improvement: 3 lines per button
In each button of <Figure 19>,
The first line contains five hiragana and other (sentence or
In this case,
Enter 6 letters (5 hiragana, 1 other) on the first line by the first group character input method,
A total of six letters (= picture emoji) in the 2nd and 3rd lines may be input by the second group character input method.
or
Enter the six characters in the first line by the first group character input method.
The three letters (= picture emoji) in the second line are input by the second group letter input method.
The three letters in the third line (= picture emoji) can also be entered using the third group letter input method.
or
Enter the six characters in the first line by the first group character input method.
Remove 2 of the 3 emoticons in the second line and leave only 1, but in Hiragana mode enter 5 katanagawa characters and 1 character (= picture emoji) as the second group character input method without changing the mode.
The three letters in the third line (= picture emoji) can also be entered using the third group letter input method. (The picture emoticons in the second and third lines of button * and button # can be divided into a second group and a third group, and can be grouped into either a second group or a third group.)
Of course, the conventional method and twins can be performed in parallel without changing the character mode.
Hiragana is entered as a group input method.
In the case of parallel tap with twin,
For those who prefer the conventional multi-tap method, the multi-tap method may be limited to allow input while circulating Hiragana Bay. Then, the punctuation marks and the sixth letters DEL, INS, ENTER, and CLR can only be entered as twins.
If it is necessary to input the English alphabet once, the English alphabet may be input in the third group or fourth group character input method. This is applicable to all non-English speaking countries.
Also, it is recommended for twin beginners to have the combination induction buttons arranged in straight lines as shown in Fig. 07.65 and Fig. 07.66.
<Figure 19.5>: Japanese Keyboard: Improvement: No Emoticons
Only special characters are added to the buttons, and the picture emoticons are not marked.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Now let's look at the improvement of Hangul input method.
<Figure 20>: Cheonjiin: Conventional
While keeping the conventional button notation as it is,
Newly assigned complete phonemes, punctuation or other special characters or picture emoticons
You can use it by memorizing it, dedicate some of the display screen, or even carry it with you. (Of course, newly assigned letters may be different letter groups.)
<Figure 21>: Cheonjiin: Conventional + Hidden
As mentioned earlier,
Among the special characters' colors, including letters and punctuation
Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,
Green is not written on a conventional keyboard, but is a character that can be input by pressing multiple times in a multi-tap method.
To introduce the conventional heaven and earth input method
The vowel is entered by combining Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ),
Consonants are entered on a multi-tap.
The input method of 40 Korean phonemes is shown in <Figure 21.5>.
(In the input sequence, the number means to press the button to which the number is assigned.)
<Figure 21.5>
2 strokes: 12
3 strokes: 13
Four strokes: four
5 strokes: 2
(Total 40)
steersman
<Figure 22>: Cheonjiin: Improvement: 2 lines per button
As mentioned earlier.
Among the special characters' colors, including letters and punctuation
Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,
Green is a character that was not written on a conventional keyboard but could be entered by tapping multiple times in a multi-tap method.
Red is the letters added randomly by the inventor (eg sentence code, symbols, Korean phonemes).
(Graphic emoticons are also added by the inventor.)
English is needed only in English mode, so it is not necessary to write it when describing in Korean input method. However, in most conventional devices which do not adopt a button such as an organic light emitting diode, it should be displayed on a button anyway.
However, if it is necessary to input the English alphabet once, the English alphabet may be defined as an extra group including the third group or the fourth group, and may be input by the group letter input method.
Each button in <Figure 22> has two lines of text.
The first line is mainly assigned 4 Hangul phonemes,
The second line is usually assigned four punctuation marks and four emoticons.
Since there are 8 in total, more than 6 cannot be grouped into 1 group.
The first line letter is input by the first group letter input method.
The second line character may be input by the second group character input method.
or
Enter 4 of the first line letter and 2 of the 2nd line letters, and enter 6 as the first group letter input method.
The second group of letters that are not tied to the first group may be input by the second group of text input methods.
Either way, Hangul phonemes are entered in the first group of text input methods.
The following restrictions may be added for those who prefer the conventional method.
In vowel input, characters other than Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ) should not be input by multi-tap and only twins can be entered (ex: when pressing button 2 twice in <Figure 22>, only two `.` Should be entered. Based on the combination induction button table in <Figure 07>, the second letter of button 2, `조합`, is the combination induction button that causes the second letter to be entered. It should only be entered as 4 + 2 or 6 + 2 using.)
In consonant input, red letters may not be input by multi-tap, but may be input by twins only. (For example, if you press button 4 in <Figure 22> several times, you should only cycle `ㄱ ㅋ ㄲ`. `ㅑ` should only be entered as 8 + 4 or 2 + 4 using button 8 or button 2, which is a combination-inducing button that causes the fourth character to be entered)
In this way, the conventional method may be input as it is, or twins may be input without changing the character mode, so that all 40 phonemes below may be input as one or two strokes. (Or can also be entered in twin only mode.)
40 phonemes in Korean
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2.5 consonants: ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
3. 10 basic collections: ㅏ, ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
4.11 vowels: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
(에서도, 키보드, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, 완성, ㅢ is not assigned to completion on the computer keyboard.
If twins are applied, it is possible to input two beats and one beat concept on the small keypad. And if you want faster speeds, you can also assign double consonants, such as ㄵ ㄵ ㄶ ㄺ ㄼ ㄽ ㄾ ㄿ ㄿ, which are used only as finality, and enter them as twins. This also applies to other Hangul input methods except Cheonjiin.)
Also, special characters including punctuation marks and picture emoticons can be easily entered without changing the text mode.
In addition, even those who are uncomfortable assigning additional punctuation marks or emojis are already memorizing green letter assignments, so they only memorize only the red letter assignments. You can enter.
That way, if you memorize only the phonemes that were added to the phone, which is exactly the same as the conventional letter assignment <Figure 20>, you can easily enter them in parallel with the twins. The same applies to LG EZ, Pantech SKY, Curitel, and Motorola.
Korean characters can memorize as much as 2 minutes in the first line of each button in <Figure 22>.
Since button 1 has an additional ㅏ,, button 4 in the same row 1 has ㅑ and button 7 with ㅕ,
Since 3 TT was additionally assigned to button 3, 6 was assigned to button 6 and ㅠ was added to button 9 in the same row.
Since button ㅣ and button 3 were previously assigned to ㅡ, 합 was added to Button 2,
The button * is assigned an additional ㅚ and its stroke letters ㅘ ,,
Button # has been assigned an additional ㅟ and its stroke letters ㅝ ,,
Button 5 has an additional ㅐ 같은 with the same pronunciation.
Button 8 is additionally assigned, the stroke letter of ,,
Button 0 is easy to memorize if you think that an additional letter of 획 is assigned.
Also, if it is annoying to assign another vowel to buttons 1, 2, and 3 assigned to Cheonjiin (ㅣ. You can either swap emoticons, or delete the emoticon.
(Also, if you're only used to the input method, it can be very frustrating because phonemes are assigned to Button * and Button #.
Recall that LG EZ method, Pantech series Sky or Curitel method, Motorola method and the like have been conventionally assigned to a phone * or button #, or used as a Korean phoneme button such as a double consonant button or a stroke add button. Otherwise, move the added phoneme of button * or button # to button 4 ~ 0.)
<Figure 22.3>
In the Hangul input methods,
Conventionally
Enter 4 or more letters per button to enter multi-tap,
Allocate three letters per button to combine or modify the default phonemes to enter the remaining unassigned phonemes.
It's almost the same with many strokes,
In particular, in the case of vowels, it was not significant to assign all 21 phonemes to vowels.
After the twins have been developed, all 21 vowels can be assigned complete, allowing them to be entered within two strokes.
<Figure 22.4>: Cheonjiin: Improvement: 3 lines per button
The above table will be explained.
12 buttons are assigned to each button
You can group them in groups of six and enter them into the first and second groups.
Enter the first line by the first group letter input method.
Enter the second line by the second group letter input method.
The third line can also be entered using a third group character input method.
For other details, please refer to <Figure 21>.
<Figure 22.5>: Cheonjiin: Improvement: 2 lines of space per button
Buttons have a small number of additional phonemes, special characters, or picture emoticons.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 22.6>: Cheonjiin: Improvement: No two emoticons per button
Buttons are assigned complete phonemes and special characters only and do not include picture emoticons.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 22.7>: Cheonjiin: Improvement: Allocate only Korean complete phonemes
Of the 40 Korean phonemes, only the ones that are not assigned to completion in the conventional way are added to the completion type. (If you want to input twins in the same way as the conventional way, you can enter additional red phonemes in the multi-tap method. No, only twins can be entered.)
I don't need explanation
<Figure 22.8> All Korean Phoneme Completion Based on Cheonjiin Method on Display Screen
If there is a sense of rejection in the phoneme assignment form of <Figure 22.7>,
While leaving the notation to the conventional button as it is,
As shown in <Figure 16.2> or <Figure 22.8>, all Hangul phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen.
In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or the twin-only mode may be input.
(As shown in Figure 16.2, the phoneme which is not assigned to completion type in the conventional character input method is displayed randomly according to the type of conventional character input method.)
<Figure 23>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Conventional
While keeping the conventional button notation as it is,
Newly assigned complete phonemes, punctuation or other special characters or picture emoticons
You can use it by memorizing it, dedicate some display screens, or use it with your assignments. (Of course, newly assigned letters can be different letter groups.)
<Figure 24>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Conventional + Hidden
To introduce the conventional input method
In vowel input,
단 ㅜㅠ ㅡ ㅣ short vowels are entered in a multi-tap method button assigned a short vowel,
Double vowels are entered as a combination of short vowels.
Consonants are entered in the multi-tap method.
The input method of 40 Hangul phonemes is shown in <Figure 24.5>.
<Figure 24.5>
Sky, curitel
Way
2 strokes: 18
3 strokes: 10
4 strokes: 0
5 strokes: 0
(Total 40)
steersman
<Figure 25>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 2 lines per button
It is easier to apply twins than heaven and earth.
For the explanation of the above table, please refer to the explanation of Cheonjiin input method.
Anyway, the basic concept is the same as the improvement of the celestial method, while using the conventional Sky and Curitel methods as they are, without the mode change.
It is possible to enter 40 Korean phonemes as 1 or 2 strokes and to easily input special characters including punctuation marks and picture emoticons without changing the text mode.
(Or can also be entered in twin only mode.)
<Figure 26>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 3 lines per button
See the description of the input method.
<Figure 26.5>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 2 lines of space per button
Buttons have a small number of additional phonemes, special characters, or picture emoticons.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 26.6>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 2 lines of emoticons per button
Buttons are assigned complete phonemes and special characters only and do not include picture emoticons.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 26.7>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: Additional Hangul Complete Phonemes
Of the 40 Korean phonemes, only the ones that are not assigned to completion in the conventional way are added to the completion type. (If you want to input twins in the same way as the conventional way, you can enter additional red phonemes in the multi-tap method. No, only twins can be entered.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 26.8> All Hangul Phoneme based on Pantech Series Assigned to Display Screen
If there is a sense of rejection in the phoneme assignment form of <Figure 26.7>,
While leaving the notation to the conventional button as it is,
As shown in <Figure 16.2> or <Figure 26.8>, all Hangul phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen.
In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or the twin-only mode may be input.
(As shown in Figure 16.2, the phoneme which is not assigned to completion type in the conventional character input method is displayed randomly according to the type of conventional character input method.)
<Figure 27>: LG EZ: Conventional
While keeping the conventional button notation as it is,
Newly assigned complete phonemes, punctuation or other special characters or picture emoticons
You can use it by memorizing it, dedicate some display screens, or use it with your assignments. (Of course, newly assigned letters can be different letter groups.)
<Figure 28>: LG EZ: Conventional + Hidden
To introduce the conventional input method
The button to add strokes is a button *,
The button to double-consonant is Button #.
In vowel input,
Enter the multi-tap method using single tap or double tap.
E.g
입력 inputs by pressing button 3,
Enter by pressing button 3 twice.
입력 ㅠ input,
Enter ㅑ after pressing ㅏ and then press Add Stroke (button *).
Enter ㅕ after pressing ㅓ and then press Add Stroke (button *).
Enter ㅛ after pressing ㅗ and then press Add Stroke (button *).
Enter ㅠ by pressing the Add Stroke button after popping up TT.
Guitar vowels are entered as a combination of ㅏㅑㅓㅕ ㅗㅛ ㅜㅠ ㅡ ㅣ.
Consonant input method
The basic consonant of a a b b d
The rest of the consonants are inputted by adding a basic consonant or by double consonant.
The button to add strokes is a button *,
The button to double-consonant is Button #.
E.g
If you want to enter ㅆ
Press button7 to display ㅅ, press double consonant (button #),
If you want to enter
Press button 7 to display ㅅ, press Add Stroke (button *),
If you want to enter ㅉ
Press button 7 to display ㅅ, then press Stroke (button *) to display ㅈ,
In this state, press the consonant (button #).
The input method of 40 Korean phonemes is shown in <Figure 28.5>.
<Figure 28.5>
EZ
Way
2 strokes: 15
3 strokes: 13
4 strokes: 2
5 strokes: 0
(Total 40)
steersman
<Figure 29>: LG EZ: Improvement: 2 lines per button
For the explanation of the above table, please refer to the explanation of Cheonjiin input method.
Anyway, the basic concept is the same as the improvement of the celestial way, while using the existing LG EZ method as it is, with the twins without changing modes,
It is possible to enter 40 Korean phonemes as 1 or 2 strokes and to easily input special characters including punctuation marks and picture emoticons without changing the text mode.
(Or can also be entered in twin only mode.)
Among the special characters' colors, including letters and punctuation
Black is originally written on a conventional keyboard,
Blue is a character that can be entered by operating the character button and the character transformation button (e.g. stroke addition button or double consonant button), although it is not written on the conventional keyboard.
Red is the letters added randomly by the inventor (eg sentence code, symbols, Korean phonemes).
(Grim emoticons have been added by the inventor.)
Suggest special conditions for people who prefer to use the traditional EZ method
Conventionally, consonants have not been input with a multi-tap, so even in the improved method, consonants cannot be input with a multi-tap.
Since ㅏ 된 assigned to button 3 and 6 TT assigned to button 6 of the vowel can be input by multi-tap conventionally, ㅏ ㅓ ㅗ TT can also be input by multi-tap method.
The rest of the vowels weren't entered with a multi-tap, so you might not be able to enter them with the improved method.
When applying twins to LG EZ
Letters of all groups, such as English or Cheonjiin, Sky or Curitel, can be entered using the combination induction button assignment table of <Figure 07 ~ Figure 07.8>.
The advantages of doing so are:
You can also enter all phonemes within two strokes.
When the user presses the consonant button or the stroke adding button, which is the most chronic problem of the conventional LG EZ method, the copper wire is too large to improve the inconvenience.
Conventionally
Even though both hands should cover 1 to 4 rows,
Add Stroke button (button *) or Double consonant button (button #) To press,
Since the other characters except for `ㅡ` of button 0 are in lines 1 to 3, from line 2, which is an approximation of the vertical average position of the letter button, to line 4 with a stroke addition button (button *) or a double consonant button (button #) , That is, two rows must have moved,
The average longitudinal copper line is a fairly large two rows
If you use the combination induction button table as shown in <Figure 07> and the twins using the letter assignment table as shown in <Figure 29> ,
1 to 3 rows (average) except when inputting ㅡ ㅢ assigned to button 0 (된 된 에 assigned to button *, ㅟ ㅞ ㅞ assigned to button # may be entered in combination of short vowels). position is input both in the second line), enabling, in a second-line character is an average position an approximation of the assigned link, the average vertical copper wire to the two lines mean position combination induced button assigned is zero rows.
In the past
In order to use both hands alternately, both hands must be in charge of one or three rows, i.e. the average two-handed horizontal position is two rows each.
To press the Stroke button (button *), button * is in row 1, so either thumb of both hands must always move to row 1,
In order to press the double consonant button (button #), button * is in the third row, so one of the thumb of both hands had to always move to the third row.
The average horizontal copper line of one hand becomes one row
I had a big horizontal line,
Applying twins
The left hand is in charge of the first row,
Right hand is in charge of row three,
In the situation that the second column is left hand or right hand in conformity with the situation,
In other words, the average horizontal position of both hands is 1.33 in the left hand and 2.67 in the right hand.
The stroke addition combination induction button or the double consonant combination induction button, both in the first row and the third row, are two, so you can select anything close to you so that the horizontal line is also smaller. Is 2.67 rows, so the average horizontal copper line needs to move from 1.33 to 1 column with the left hand and 3.67 to 3 rows with the right hand, so the average horizontal copper line with one hand is 0.33 . It's only 33% of the total, and the two-handed thumb's horizontal average position is 1.5 rows for the left hand and 2.5 columns for the right hand, so the left hand is in charge and the right hand is in the third row. The second hand is in the left hand and right hand alternately, so the left hand's horizontal average position is 1.33, which is a little closer to the first column, not the 1.5 column that is halfway between the first and second columns. , Right hand horizontal average position is 2.67, which is a little closer to 3rd column, not the middle of 2nd and 3rd column.)
However
Characters of the second group or more use a combination induction button assignment table as shown in <Fig. 07 ~ 07.8>, and a combination induction button assignment table as shown in Figure 30 below can be used to enter the first group letters. The reason for doing this is to reduce the traffic, reduce the thumb interference, and improve the stability of holding the device while taking a similar method as the conventional method.
However, it is not recommended to use the combination induction button assignment table of <Figure 07 ~ Figure 07.8>, since it will increase the number of strokes rather than inputting letters of all groups. And by using the combination induction button assignment table of <Fig.07 ~ Fig.07.8>, it is possible to reduce the moving line, reduce the interference of thumb, and improve the stability of holding the device even when entering the letters of all groups.
However, for those who prefer the conventional EZ method.
<Figure 30>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
(Don't mind the numbers in parentheses at this stage)
Since the stroke addition button or the double consonant button has been operated after the letter button in the related art, the stroke addition combination induction button or the double consonant combination induction button is trailed by the letter button even in the improved method.
Let's give some examples (in the example below, the rules for entering using a combination induction button can vary).
Conventionally, to input `ㅆ`, only input with 7, # (Turn on button 7 that has `ㅅ` assigned on and off and then turn on button # which functions as a double consonant).
While the improved method can be implemented as it is,
Using the combination induction button table shown in <Figure 30>, press and hold the button 7 or the two consonant combination induction button, while pressing the button 7 with 7 + 1 or 7 + 3 (`ㅅ` assigned. In this state, press button 3, the combination conduction button. We recommend 7 + 3 rather than 7 + 1. If you use 7 + 1 with both hands, both hands will be in the first row, causing interference between fingers and less stable holding the device.
Conventional strokes are the same, but vertical copper lines are reduced.
The reason for the vertical copper line is reduced,
To do a double consonant
In the past, you should always have moved to button # 4 in row,
Now, when twins are applied in this way, the average moving distance in the vertical direction is only one row since the two rows, which are the average positions, need to be moved only to the first row with the button 1 or the button 3, which are the consonant combination induction buttons. The reason for the position is 2 lines, because if you apply the twins in this way, you can move up to 4 lines only if you type `ㅡ ㅢ`, and all the remaining characters can be entered within 1 ~ 3 lines.)
To add strokes
In the past, I should always have moved up to four rows of buttons *
Now, if you apply the twins this way, you only need to move from the average row of two rows to the second row of button 4 or button 6, which is the combination combination induction button, so that the average distance traveled vertically is only 0 rows. If you apply it like this, you can move up to 4 lines only if you type `ㅡ ㅢ`, and the rest of the characters can be entered within 1 ~ 3 lines, so the average position of the vertical becomes almost 2 lines.)
In the past
To press the Stroke button (button *), button * is in row 1, so either thumb of both hands must always move to row 1,
In order to press the double consonant button (button #), button * is in the third row, so one of the thumb of both hands had to always move to the third row.
The average copper line of both hands is two lines, and the average copper line of one hand is one line.
The line was big,
Applying twins
The stroke addition combination induction button or the double consonant combination induction button, both in the first row and the third row, are two, so you can select anything close to you so that the horizontal line is also smaller. Is 2.67 rows, so the average copper line needs to move from 1.33 to 1 row for the left hand and 2.67 to 3 rows for the right hand, so the average copper for one hand is 0.33 rows.)
Conventionally, in order to input `ㅉ` 7, *, # (Turn on button 7 assigned `` `, turn on button * which adds stroke function to make` ㅈ `, and then use the double consonant function. ON button #), but
While the improved method can be implemented as it is,
Using the combination induction button table in Figure 30, we already know that the second double consonant of button 7 is `ㅉ`, so press 7 + 1 + 1 or 7 + 3 + 3 ( If you press the button 1, the double consonant combination induction button two times, or press the button 3, the double consonant combination induction button two times while pressing the button 7). Because the rules are just defined like this. In the conventional method, it is possible to change the rule by inputting 7, #, # instead of 7, as 7, *, #.
The stroke is the same as the conventional one, but the copper wire is reduced and the stability of holding the device is improved.
Because the reduced line
Traditionally, you have to manipulate * and #, so you have to move from column 1 with button * or button # to column 3,
Since we had to manipulate 7 and *, we had to move from row 3 to row 4, but in the improved way there was no such movement, and conventionally we had to move to row 4 all the time to press the add button.
What does it mean to improve the stability of holding the device? If you operate 7, * using both hands in the past, both hands will be in the first row, so the interference between fingers will occur and the stability of holding the device will be reduced. 7 + 3 + 3 can also be used, so it is stable because the left hand presses the button 7 in the first row and the right hand presses the button 3 in the third row.
Conventionally, to input `ㅑ`, only 3, * (press the button * to add strokes after turning button 3 assigned `ㅏ` on and off),
While the improved method can be implemented as it is,
Using the Combination Induction Button Table in <Figure 30>, press and hold the 3 + 4 or 3 + 6 (button 3 button with `ㅏ` assigned) In the state, press Stroke addition button (6). 3 + 4 is recommended rather than 3 + 6. If you use 3 + 6 with both hands, both hands will be in the third row, so the interference between fingers will occur and the stability of holding the device will be reduced. The stroke is the same as before, but the copper line is reduced.
Conventionally, to input `ㅕ`, you only input 3,3, * (press the button 3 to which `ㅏ` is assigned twice to make `ㅓ` and then press the button * that adds strokes).
While the improved method can be implemented as it is,
Using the Combination Induction Button Table in Figure 30, we know that the second stroke addition of Button 3 is `ㅕ`, so we can use 3 + 4 + 4 or 3 + 6 + 6 ( Press and hold button 4 twice, the stroke addition combination induction button, or press button 6, the stroke addition combination induction button twice, while pressing the button 3). The stroke is the same as the conventional one, but the copper wire is reduced and the stability of holding the device is improved.
And a more advanced form, as shown in Figure 31 below.
Divide the consonant combination induction button into one consonant and two consonant combination induction buttons,
The stroke addition combination induction button can also be divided into 1 stroke addition and 2 stroke addition combination induction buttons.
<Figure 31>: Combination Guidance Button Assignment Table
(Don't worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)
If you use the combination induction button assignment table in Figure 31
To enter `ㅉ`
Conventionally, in order to input `ㅉ` 7, *, # (Turn on button 7 assigned `` `, turn on button * which adds stroke function to make` ㅈ `, and then use the double consonant function. ON button #), but
While the conventional method can be implemented as it is,
Using the combination induction button table in Figure 31, we already know that the second double consonant of button 7 is `ㅉ`, so hold down the button 7 with 7 + * or 7 + # (`ㅅ` assigned. Press button *, which is a two-pair consonant combination induction button, or press button #, which is the second pair of consonant combination induction button, while pressing button 7). One stroke less than before, the copper wire is reduced and the stability of holding the device is improved.
To enter `ㅕ`
Conventionally, to input `ㅕ`, you only input 3,3, * (press the button 3 to which `ㅏ` is assigned twice to make `ㅓ` and then press the button * that adds strokes).
While the traditional method can be implemented as it is
Using the Combination Induction Button Table in Figure 31, we know that the second phoneme for the third stroke of button 3 is `ㅕ`, so press and hold 3 + 7 or 3 + 9 ( Press the button 7 which is the second stroke addition combination induction button or press the button 9 which is the second stroke addition combination induction button while pressing the button 3). One stroke less than before, the copper wire is reduced and the stability of holding the device is improved.
At this time, the first stroke addition, the first consonant combination induction button may also function as the stroke addition and double consonant combination induction button shown in Figure 30.
Anyway, as shown in Fig. 30 or Fig. 31, adding a stroke to the combination induction button, adding the function of the double consonant button
The copper line is reduced. Previously, to press the Add Stroke button (button *) or the Double Consonant button (button #), you should always have moved up to four rows. This is because the method of using the combination derivation button table is mainly to move up to three lines (up to four lines only when typing ㅊ, ㅉ, ㅕ, ㅠ).
If you do not want to move up to 4 rows at all, you can assign the combination induction button as shown in <Figure 31.5>.
<Figure 31.5>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
(Don't worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)
In addition, the interference between fingers is reduced, and the stability of holding the device is increased. This is because you can avoid the situation where both hands are in one or three rows. This is described in detail above.
Using the combination induction button table in <Figure 31> or <Figure 31.5>,
In the past, only three inputs were possible, but two inputs ㅌ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅃ, ㅉ, ㅉ, ㅕ, ㅠ can be entered.
It is possible to input ㅖ to three, which was conventionally possible to input only four.
Eventually, among the 40 Korean phonemes listed below, you can enter 1 ~ 2 strokes except for ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ. At the same time, it also provides considerable convenience in terms of copper wire, interference, and stability.
40 phonemes in Korean
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2.5 consonants: ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
3. 10 basic collections: ㅏ, ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
4.11 vowels: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
However, it is better to use the combination induction button assignment table of <Fig.07 ~ Fig.07.8>, which can input all the phonemes as 1 ~ 2 strokes.
And in the method using the combination induction button table of Fig. 30 or Fig. 31,
The conventional method is that the stroke addition button or the consonant button is followed by the letter button, and thus the improved method is described as the stroke addition combination induction button or the twin consonant combination induction button is followed by the letter button. Although a person may have confusion at first, the preceding method is better because the preceding method has more advantages.
The preceding method is also recommended when using the combination induction button assignment table of <Fig. 07 ~ Fig.07.8>.
Because if you want to type `hyo`
Using Figure 30 or Figure 31, in the following method, create a 'ㅎ `by pressing the button 6, which is the combination addition button, while pressing the button 8 assigned with 8 + 6,6 + 4 ( While holding down the button 6 to which `ㅗ` is assigned, press the button 4, which is a combination induction button, to create `ㅛ`).
Using Figure 30 or Figure 31, in the 'Leading' method, press the buttons 4 and 8 (with the left hand pressed while holding down the button 4, which is the combination adding button for adding strokes, with the right hand. This is because it is possible to input button 3, which is assigned as a stroke additional letter, sequentially, or 3 strokes.
Even in the method of using the combination induction button assignment table of <Fig. 07 ~ Fig.07.8>, the advantages mentioned in the preceding method are much more generated.
If you want to type `part`
Using Figure 30 or Figure 31, in the `Leading 'method, press the button 4, 5, 6, or 6 (with the left hand pressed the button 4, which is the combination addition button, with the left hand). After pressing, press the button 6 to which `ㅗ` is assigned twice to make `TT`).
In the method of 'leading' while using the combination induction button assignment table of <Figure 07>, press button 4 and button with your right hand while pressing button 4, which is the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter. Press 6 sequentially, because the second letter of button 5 is `ㅂ` and the second letter of button 6 is `TT`).
And in the combination induction button table shown in Fig. 30 and Fig. 31, the induction button of Motorola's stroke addition function (button #), Handol code's character finish button, and shift button function are combined. The same effect as the improvements in LG EZ can be achieved.
The disadvantages of LG EZ method are many overlap with the disadvantages of `* &# method`, so you can see the feelings of other LG EZ system and the problem that twins solve the disadvantages by seeing '* &#details' section. I hope.
<Figure 32>: LG EZ: Improvement: 3 Lines per Button
No explanation is needed. See Figure 29
<Figure 32.5>: LG EZ: Improvement: 2 lines of space per button
Buttons have a small number of additional phonemes, special characters, or picture emoticons.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 32.6>: LG EZ: Improvement: 2 lines of emoticons per button
Buttons are assigned complete phonemes and special characters only and do not include picture emoticons.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 32.7>: LG EZ: Improvement: Allocated Hangul complete phoneme
Of the 40 Korean phonemes, only those that are not assigned to completion in the conventional way are additionally assigned to completion.
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 32.8> All Hangul Phoneme based on LG EZ Type Assigned to Display Screen
If there is a sense of rejection in Korean phoneme assignment form as shown in <Figure 32.7>,
While leaving the notation to the conventional button as it is,
As shown in <Figure 16.2> or <Figure 32.8>, all Hangul phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen.
In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or the twin exclusive mode may be input.
(As shown in Figure 16.2, the phoneme which is not assigned to completion type in the conventional character input method is displayed randomly according to the type of conventional character input method.)
<Figure 33>: Motorola: Conventional
While keeping the conventional button notation as it is,
Newly assigned complete phonemes, punctuation or other special characters or picture emoticons
You can use it by memorizing it, dedicate some display screens, or use it with your assignments. (Of course, newly assigned letters can be different letter groups.)
<Figure 34>: Motorola: Conventional + Hidden
To introduce the conventional input method
Button # works much like the function of the Stroke button in the LG EZ method.
In vowel input,
Enter ㅏㅓ ㅗㅜ ㅡ ㅣ by multi-tap method using single tap or 2 pushes
E.g
입력 inputs by pressing button 3,
Enter by pressing button 3 twice.
입력 ㅠ input,
Enter ㅑ after adding 추가 by pressing Add Stroke (Button #).
Enter ㅕ after adding 추가 by pressing Add Stroke (Button #).
Enter ㅛ after adding 추가 by pressing Add Stroke (Button #).
ㅠ will be entered by pressing the Add Stroke (Button #) after TT.
Guitar vowels are entered as a combination of ㅏㅑㅓㅕ ㅗㅛ ㅜㅠ ㅡ ㅣ.
In consonant input
The basic consonant of ㄱㄴㄷ ㄹㅂ ㅅㅈㅇ is inputted by pressing the button to which each letter is assigned.
Double consonants are entered by pressing the button that has been assigned two basic consonants,
Enter the second letter of each consonant button by pressing Add Stroke (Button #) after each basic consonant.
E.g
If you want to enter ㄲ, press button 1 twice.
If you want to enter ㅋ, press button 1 to display a, and then press add button stroke (button #) to enter.
The input method of 40 Korean phonemes is shown in <Figure 34.5>.
<Figure 34.5>
Way
2 strokes: 19
3 strokes: 7
4 strokes: 2
5 strokes: 0
(Total 40)
steersman
<Figure 35>: Motorola: Improvement: 2 Lines
Anyway, the basic concept is the same as the improvement of the celestial way, while using the existing Motorola way as it is, without the mode change in parallel twins,
It is possible to enter 40 Korean phonemes as 1 or 2 strokes, and to input special characters including punctuation marks and picture emoticons without changing the text mode.
(Or can also be entered in twin only mode.)
I will not explain Motorola. This is because the description of LG EZ is applicable.
However, when applying the tree using LG EZ's <Figure 30> and <Figure 31> to Motorola,
In the conventional method of Motorola, button # is considered to function as a stroke add button of LG EZ, and can be applied.
If you look at how to use Button # in the Motorola method
For the consonant button, turn on / off the consonant button and press the button # to enter the second letter, which is black.
The bar button is the same as the Stroke button in LG EZ.
Figure 36: Motorola: Improvements: 3 lines per button
No explanation is needed. Please refer to Figure 35.
<Figure 36.5>: Motorola: Improvement: 2 lines of space per button
Buttons have a small number of additional phonemes, special characters, or picture emoticons.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 36.6>: Motorola: Improvement: 2 lines of space per button
Buttons are assigned complete phonemes and special characters only and do not have a picture emoticon.
(More than that may be displayed by dedicating part of the display screen.)
I don't need explanation.
<Figure 36.65>: Motorola: Improvements: Additional Hangul Complete Phonemes
Of the 40 Korean phonemes, only the ones that are not assigned to completion in the conventional way are added to the completion type. (If you want to input twins in the same way as the conventional way, you can enter additional red phonemes in the multi-tap method. No, only twins can be entered.)
I don't need explanation.
<Picture 36.66> All Hangul Phoneme based on Motorola Method is Assigned to Display Screen
If there is a sense of rejection in Korean phoneme assignment form of <Figure 36.65>,
While leaving the notation to the conventional button as it is,
As shown in <Figure 16.2> or <Figure 36.66>, all Korean phonemes are additionally assigned to the display screen.
In the conventional character input mode, the conventional method and the twin may be input in parallel, or the twin-only mode may be input.
(As shown in Figure 16.2, the phoneme which is not assigned to completion type in the conventional character input method is displayed randomly according to the type of conventional character input method.)
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
In order to improve the Hangul input method, all 40 Korean phonemes are assigned as complete, so there will be four buttons assigned to the phone, which will be very strange at first.
English is the lowest phonetic alphabet in the Greek family, but four letters are assigned to buttons 7,9.
Most Greek and Roman alphabets have more than 30 phonemes. There are 33 phonemes in Russian, 46 in Hindi, 44 in Myanmar, 50 in Japanese, and 76 in Thai, so there are four to six phonemes per button.
It is not surprising that four phonemes are assigned to one button in Korean.
If you still feel rejected by the new assignment of Hangul phonemes, you can memorize only the assignments of several completed phonemes newly assigned to the character mania while keeping the conventional button notation. It's nothing to textmaniacs.
(Or you can dedicate the display screen as shown in Figure 16.2 or Figure 16.3.)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Without considering special characters,
If you want to confirm that you can input only general Hangul words consisting of Hangul phonemes only by using various types of Hangul input methods very quickly and conveniently, you can enter English words in the 'Word Writing Practice' section. Let's look at an example of inputting a Korean word of.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
When you want to run twins with a conventional mobile phone
In order to apply twins to conventional mobile phones, it is recommended to replace the buttons with more lettered buttons, and to download the twin operation program so that the twins can be driven.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Until now,
Showing 40 of 40 Korean phonemes
In the conventional Hangul input methods,
I only looked at the form of allocating additional phonemes that are not assigned to completion.
Only some of them may be allocated.
You can only assign additional phonemes that take at least three strokes.
You can only assign additional phonemes that take at least four strokes.
Only additional phonemes that require more than five strokes may be allocated.
Looking at <Figure 36.9>,
Of the phonemes that take three or more strokes,
In the case of reviewing the allocation of only phonemes that are not assigned to completion in the conventional method (even if more than three strokes are required, the phoneme that has already been assigned to the completion type and can be input in three taps in the multi-tap method is not added).
In Samsung's natural world,
Of the 19 phonemes that take more than three strokes, the conventional buttons are not marked, but they are already assigned to completion, except for five consonants (가능한 ㄸ ㅃ ㅆ ㅉ) that can be input by the multi-tap method.
ㅞ ㅕ ㅛ ㅠ ㅐ ㅒ ㅖ ㅚ ㅘ ㅙ ㅙ ㅟ ㅝ ㅞ 14
Additional assignments are possible.
In the Pantech series of Sky and Curitel
Of the 10 phonemes that take more than three strokes, they are not marked on the conventional button, except for the five consonants (ㄲ ㄸ ㅃ ㅆ ㅉ) that are already assigned to the completed type and can be input by the multi-tap method.
ㅞ ㅒ ㅖ ㅙ ㅞ 5 phonemes,
Additional assignments are possible.
In LG EZ
15 phonemes that take at least three strokes
ㅞ ㅞ, ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ ㅞ 15 phonemes,
Additional assignments are possible.
In the Motorola way
9 phonemes that take at least 3 strokes
음 ㅠ ㅔ ㅒ ㅖ ㅙ ㅟ ㅝ ㅞ ㅞ 9 phonemes,
Additional assignments are possible.
In addition,
Of the phonemes that take four or more strokes,
In consideration of assigning additional phonemes that are not assigned to completion in the conventional way
In Samsung's natural world,
6 phonemes that take at least 4 strokes
ㅖ ㅘ ㅙ ㅝ ㅞ,
Additional assignments are possible.
In the Pantech series of Sky and Curitel
There are no phonemes that take more than four strokes, so there is no additional allocation.
In LG EZ
2 phonemes that require at least 4 strokes
ㅖ ㅞ,
Additional assignments are possible.
In the Motorola way
2 phonemes that require at least 4 strokes
ㅖ ㅞ,
Additional assignments are possible.
However, in the conventional method, a phoneme which can be input as two inputs by combining phonemes of different buttons is also assigned to the completed type, and the advantages of inputting two inputs as twins are as follows.
In the LG EZ method, ㅘ can be input as 2 strokes by combining ㅗ button and ㅏ button.
1. Once the position on the keyboard is memorized, it is psychologically comfortable to press the combination induction button, which is the twin method, and the button that is assigned to the completion type.
2. If you have a habit of entering three or more letters as twins, you may feel comfortable typing the second letter as twins. (And no matter what language you type in, double-clicking on it will make you feel more comfortable if you type it with twins. While there are many advantages of twins, you can easily use two hands to type two strokes with one hand. I feel comfortable typing in twins just by being there.)
3. If you input the phonemes that can be entered by double-clicking them as twins, you can add various advantages of the twins, including the following points 5 and 6, which are mentioned in the previous section. There is a number.
-When entering FOLLOW or CIRCLE as described later, if there is a sequence of letters in the same sequence for each button, the combination-inducing button pressed in the front can be used as it is, so the number of strokes is greatly reduced. Eventually, the copper line will be reduced.
-Because the letter button is combined induction button
Fig. 42 As when entering 'WING`
With the copper line at 0, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the combination induction button for entering the next letter.
In the state that the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous character becomes the character button of the latter character,
Minimization of copper wire occurs.
If the movement is 0, there is an effect of increasing the speed by which 1 stroke is reduced.
You can type letters just like a relay game.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
With the traditional Hangul input methods
Comparison of the method of applying twins to the method without all twins assigned to all 40 Korean phonemes
(In conventional methods, only a few basic phonemes are written on the keyboard, and there are no double consonants or double consonants.
Even if phoneme assignments are not in standard order to easily memorize buttons with double consonants or double vowels,
Even beginners who haven't been touched a few times can quickly get used to it, but they can't reduce the number of strokes, so they can't succeed in satisfying even those who want to enter letters quickly by reducing the number of strokes. no.)
In the Hangul input method,
Conventionally
Enter 4 or more letters per button to enter multi-tap,
Allocate only three letters per button to enter or combine basic phonemes.
It's almost the same with many strokes,
In particular, in the case of vowels, it was not meaningful to assign all 21 vowels to completion.
After the twins have been developed, all 21 vowels can be assigned complete, allowing them to be entered within two strokes.
To be more accurate, as shown in <Figure 36.7>, all 40 Korean phonemes are assigned
Typing in a combination of multi-tap and basic phone
Rather than typing in the traditional way, including LG EZ
It can be seen that the strokes are low.
(However, it is recommended to enter the completed form in parallel with the conventional method, but not in parallel with the conventional method as shown in <Figure 36.7>, but it may be so.)
That is, in the conventional methods, only a small number of basic phonemes are written on the keyboard, and even when the phoneme assignment is not a standard sequence to easily memorize a button to which a double consonant or a double vowel is assigned, even if a double consonant or a double vowel is not indicated, Even beginners who haven't been touched a few times can quickly get used to it, but they haven't been able to reduce the number of strokes, and haven't succeeded in satisfying even those who want to enter letters quickly by reducing the number of strokes.
[(Although conventional methods tried to assign the same buttons to the same phonemes for easy memorization, except for LG EZ, it was 100% to try to assign all the consonants to the same buttons between the same phones. I could not complete it.
However, as shown in <Figure 36.7>, all of them can be assigned to the final type, but they can also be assigned to related phonemes of the conventional degree, so the probability is not inferior, and the memorization difficulty of 19 consonants and 10 basic vowels is almost the same. Assigning consonants in standard order makes it easier to memorize.
Figure 20 The Way
Button 2 has been assigned to b 2, button 0 has been assigned to o
Figure 23 The Pantech family of Sky and Curitel
Button 5 has been assigned to button 5, button 7 has been assigned to
Figure 33 The Motorola approach
Button 2 is assigned.
Phonemes with different systems are assigned to the same button, which makes it difficult for beginners to memorize.
For reference, the Hangul consonants are as follows (as in LG EZ Assignment Table).
ㄱ-ㅋ-ㄲ
B- ㄷ-ㅌ-ㄸ
ㅁ-ㅂ-ㄷ-ㅃ
D
ㅅ-ㅈ-ㅊ-ㅆ-ㅉ
ㅇ-ㅎ)]
First, let's look at the number of strokes when inputting a combination of multi-tap and basic phone by assigning all 40 Korean phonemes to the completed form as shown in <Figure 36.7> below.
You can also enter the following 방식 ㅢ ㅔ ㅚ ㅘ ㅝ in the multi-tap method.
ㅢ is the two tales of ㅡ and ㅣ
ㅐ is the two tarot of ㅏ and ㅣ,
ㅔ is the two tarot of ㅓ and ㅣ,
ㅚ is the two tarot of ㅗ and ㅣ,
로 is two tales of ㅜ and ㅣ
ㅘ is two tales of ㅗ and ㅏ
ㅝ is two tales of ㅗ and ㅏ
It can be input by reducing the number of strokes, so it is usually inputted by a combination of basic phonemes.
<Figure 36.7>
As shown in <Figure 36.7>, if you enter all 40 Korean phonemes by using a combination of multi-tap and basic phone numbers when the keyboard is assigned, you can see the following (even though you can enter the same phone in two or more ways, Most of the double vowels are a combination of short vowels, but ㅙ is assigned as the second letter of button 5, so it may be entered by pressing button 5 twice using the multi-tap method like ㅙ.
<Figure 36.8>
Completed
Assignment
(Cheongjiin and Pantech's Sky and Curitel have all consonants already assigned as inputs.
LG EZ and Motorola are already assigned to the first phone to complete the consonant that is not assigned to the final button. It can be said to be the same.
For example, if you want to enter 에서 in the LG EZ method and select of button 1, you can never enter 절대. Starting with button 7, you should add strokes and double consonants.
Therefore, even if all the phonemes are additionally allocated to the conventional keyboard such as Cheonjiin, it is only difficult to memorize the keyboard because it only allocates about 10 more vowels.
All 40 Korean phonemes are assigned to the completed form as shown above, and let's compare the number of strokes with the conventional Hangul input method when inputting a combination of multi-tap and basic phone.
(Even if the twins are not applied, all 40 are assigned to completion type, which shows that the number of strokes is smaller than the conventional method.)
<Figure 36.9>
Completed
Enter after assignment
Heaven and earth
Way
Sky, curitel
Way
EZ
Way
Way
2 strokes: 19
3 strokes: 9
4 strokes: 0
5 strokes: 0
(Total 40)
2 strokes: 12
3 strokes: 13
Four strokes: four
5 strokes: 2
(Total 40)
2 strokes: 18
3 strokes: 10
4 strokes: 0
5 strokes: 0
(Total 40)
2 strokes: 15
3 strokes: 13
4 strokes: 2
5 strokes: 0
(Total 40)
2 strokes: 19
3 strokes: 7
4 strokes: 2
5 strokes: 0
(Total 40)
steersman
(Even if the average number per phone is small, like the Pantech system, the same button problem occurs in the multi-tap method. If you enter>, the same button problem does not occur at all, and if you use multi-tap and twins together, the same button problem occurs only when you enter the first letter continuously.)
Even if the first method in the above table, `` Enter after all phoneme completion assignments '' has the lowest average number per phone, it is a little difficult for beginners to memorize the keyboard (although it is not difficult),
As explained in Figures 22 to 36.5, additional assignments to the conventional method are completed and inputted in the conventional method, and the twins are also applied, so that all phonemes can be quickly inputted within 2 strokes, and other advantages of the twins can be expressed. Typing can satisfy both beginners and experienced users. If you are a seasoned master, typing in twin-only mode is the fastest.
If the twin-tap method and twins
The first letter is danta
The second letter is double click or twin
The third letter is triple click or twin
4th letter is 4 consecutive presses or twins
The fifth letter can be entered five times in quick succession or as a twin.
(It is recommended to enter the second letter or more as twins, except those who prefer the multi-tap method.)
Twin-only mode means the following.
The first letter is only dantaro
The second letter is only twins,
The third letter is only twins,
The fourth letter is only twins.
Enter the fifth letter only with twins.)
After all of the assignments are completed, you can enter them using the combination of multi-tap method and basic phoneme.
The reason why the Pantech series of Sky and Curitel methods are similar
This is because 30 of 40 Hangul phonemes are assigned to the Pantech series, and only the double vowels are combined and input.
Then, in the improved method of <Figure 22 ~ 36.65>, do not assign ㅢ ㅐ ㅔ ㅚ ㅟ ㅘ 완성 as the completed form, but enter it as a combination of basic vowels.
If you prefer to use multi-tap, you can also enter it with multi-tap.
<Figure 22 ~ 36.65>, which is an example of applying twins to Korean input, was applied to the conventional letter assignment. However, the conventional Korean phoneme assignment is not the same as <Figure 36.7>, so all of the ㅢ ㅐ ㅔ ㅚ ㅟ ㅘ ㅝ > As described above, you can't input two phonemes by combining basic phonemes.
Even if you can input two phonemes by combining basic phonemes
In particular, if two basic vowels are combined in the same row, such as when you try to enter ㅘ ,, attempting to press them with both hands will cause interference between the thumbs of both hands. It's less stable to grab the device by pointing to it, but when you assign it as a complete type and enter it as a twin, you get other benefits, including addressing that shortcoming.
In addition, when you want to add ㅣ to 하려고 ㅓ ㅓ ㅗ TT, when you need to operate the buttons in the second row because `ㅣ` is assigned to the second row like the Pantech series, it is often used as a combination induction button in the twin method. This is because it is inconvenient to operate the buttons in the first and third row. This is because the movement of the thumb increases. However, some vowels, such as assigning `ㅣ` to the first column, are placed in the third column, where the vowels are mainly assigned, resulting in poor appearance and difficulty in memorizing.
And because it's assigned to completion and entered as twins, there's more to it.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
So far, we've learned how to assign and enter various colorful color emoticons.
At present, the color picture emoticons embedded in conventional mobile phones tend not to be compatible with 80-byte short messages unless they are mobile phones of the same manufacturer. It works well with any service that works with the Internet.
Forms delivered over the Internet are several times more expensive than text messages.
It seems that the carriers are ignoring the compatibility with only services that work with the Internet to increase profits.
I hope to develop and standardize it so that it can be compatible with short messages in the future and to exchange sensitive text messages containing a lot of color picture emoticons at a low price.
The black and white punctuation marks, symbols, shapes, and emoticons below are still well compatible, so for short message emoticons, you can substitute the black and white emoticons shown below and assign them to buttons for the time being.
Black and White Special Characters and Emoticons (More Than Below)
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Why you should be able to enter special characters on your phone quickly
There are about 200 special characters including punctuation marks, patterns, and picture emoticons in the mobile phone special character mode, and I want to enter them in a sentence, but it is often cumbersome to type, so I leave it alone.
In the conventional mobile phone, the special characters can be input only in the special character mode.
So, in normal text mode, if you want to apply special characters such as punctuation marks, picture emoticons, etc.
To change the text mode to special text mode, you have to press the text mode change button several times.
To find the special character mode you need, you need to use many strokes.
After entering a special character and then returning to the normal character mode, the process is cumbersome, such as pressing another character mode change button to go through other character modes.
Even if you want to use the built-in to use, there are many cases where you give up using it because it is cumbersome to use. It is not necessary to deliver the content, but gave up, but it is a shame.
Special characters, such as punctuation and emoticons, play the role of facial expressions and intonation in real conversations that face each other.
Therefore, in the mobile phone text message conversation using only a lot of such special characters, meaning transmission is more accurate, more emotional and interesting conversation can proceed.
Here's an example of a text message conversation on a cell phone.
If you do not have special characters or pictures
(I do not know exactly the emotional state and intention of the man and woman, and the conversation is dry.)
Man: Baby, what are you doing now?
Woman: Just stay home
Man: not taking a bath
Woman: You're crazy
Man: Congratulations on your birthday.
Woman: Thank you. But you are the only one
Man: Give me a birthday present. Watch a movie together
Woman: Yeah, let's watch a movie, eat rice, have a cocktail, and have a beer.
Man: Great, even karaoke
Woman: See you later
Man: OK
If you have special characters or pictures
Like this, as the importance of emoticons is released these days
Various handset emoticons are built into special character modes for each mobile phone manufacturer, and telcos are also offering emoticons exclusively (eg, KTF's message cone service).
Emoticons are a combination of EMOTION and ICON, which are gaining popularity as a new means of communication for the new generation.
In addition, in the special character input, it is possible to input more quickly and conveniently in a small keypad applied with twins than in a conventional computer keyboard.
Of course, it is superior to QWERTY phones.
Note that,
Just by entering the non-special characters that represent the language,
KTF's built-in phone, which can download and use more than 130 kinds of fonts, is gaining popularity. Six kinds of font text phones, including LG Electronics' KH6500 and KH6400, were able to play a role in attracting more than 100,000 subscribers despite the decline in mobile phone sales in October 2008. The importance is increasing day by day, you can read up to the back of this manual, you will feel that the twins are desperately needed to input non-special characters.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
About text life of youth and text messages in general
Statistics Korea released text message shipment statistics for Korean youth,
In 2007, 60.1 text messages were sent to adolescents (15 to 19 years old) and 30.9 to 20 to 24 years old.
If you open your eyes in the morning, check the letters first. Texting continues on the subway and bus. At school, she shoots texts from friends who are next to her. When texts don't come, I'm depressed. It's the worst that characters get chewed. I hear hallucinations that seem to ring all day.
Nearly 100% of teens can text messages without looking at the keyboard.
(During class, eyes put text on the desk while watching teacher)
Compared to a simple voice call, text messages are more addictive than a rally game.
A sharp thumb is racing on a cell phone keypad
If so, to see why there are so many text messages,
Let's look at the advantages of text messages.
1) Enables conversations that are burdensome to talk in person or through voice calls (like, love, sorry, etc.)
For example, you can avoid anxiety if you meet face-to-face when you ask them to get acquainted with each other.
2) hide and convey emotions, or to express emotions more accurately.
3) Intimacy can be expressed through emoticons. (^^ ;; indicators, etc., it provides relatively important information, which can provide an expression or visual effect that voice calls cannot provide, and at the same time provide an objective expression that video calls cannot provide. Objective expressions are defined as the unconscious that a sign of ^^ will convey the feelings that I want others to feel better than I smile.)
4) low price
5) Privately available (In case of voice call or other communication, you will be exposed to other people unless you are in your own space.) However, in the case of text, what meaning does your communication have? I don't know if it's there, which means that I can encrypt my actions)
6) Possible to deliver to an unspecified number of people (group message, meeting contact, etc.)
The very beginning of cell phone text messaging is, strictly speaking, a pager texting service. Before mobile phones appeared, the dominant means of communication was wireless pagers, and text messaging services maximized the functions of pagers.
The text service seemed to be rejected due to the shift of technology center to mobile phones, but the advantages of wireless pagers and communication carriers in the previous stages were secured to secure poor communication quality when mobile phones first appeared. They started a text messaging service that takes advantage of their technology.
The text service was born in a poor situation where voice calls were inconvenient, and when the service was first started, no one predicted that the text service would be a product that would produce golden eggs as it became a long-lived service that succeeded for such a long time.
The text service became a culture through unexpected success, and it became a big mountain range of mobile phone functions with the voice call service.
In recent years, the mobile communication terminal has been gradually developed into a portable information device by adding various additional functions from a simple telephone, and is now able to surf the web using the terminal. Therefore, in addition to improving the call quality, the terminal manufacturer has also become an important research subject to make it easy to input characters in order to increase user convenience.
The twins can be applied regardless of the shape of the buttons, whether they are touch pads or physical buttons, so they can be applied to mobile phones that are both touch pads and small keypads.
For reference, the touchpad has a poor touch feeling, and it is difficult to know whether a desired button has been touched. In particular, it is very difficult to write a text without looking at the keypad, including sending texts during class. Touch pad type is still a typo even when looking at the touch pad.
For users who want to enter text quickly, physical buttons are still better.
A button-type mobile phone with a small keypad is the most comfortable to type without looking at the keypad.
(Even if the keypad is a touch pad, if you do not see the touch pad when you press it, you will not know if you have pressed the desired button correctly. You cannot enter text even if you do not memorize the keyboard assignment.) This is because the tilted texture, the touch when the button touches the button, and so on, indicate which button is currently pressed.)
So the keypad itself is touch pad
Even if it is not a QWERTY keyboard but a small keypad type touchpad,
It's still very hard to type without touching the button itself,
In Korea and abroad, users can express enormous inconveniences in the touch pad format (of course, twins can be applied to mobile phones, which are touch pads and small keypads, so that letters can be entered more quickly and easily than conventional touch small keypads). .),
Full touch screen mobile phones appeared for a long time,
Even though the top panel is a touch screen, only a text input takes a conventional button type. This is the case with Samsung's Soul Phone (no SCH-W590 photo) or LG's Disco Phone (SH-650 in Figure 11).
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
About space input
(Also recommended for mobile phones with QWT)
The space button function also has a big advantage when combined induction button is used.
On a computer keyboard, the space button is the most used button when entering a sentence, so the button size is the largest.
(In order to solve the same button problem that occurs when entering characters in multi-tap method on the small keypad, characters representing any language need to move the cursor to the space function, but the space function is necessary.)
However, the English small keypad uses button * or button 0 or button # as a space-only button, but in Korean or non-English countries with a large number of phonemes, the buttons *, 0, # are often used as character buttons. In many cases, the left button does not have a button and functions as a space button.
If you use the right arrow to space, the line is too large. In addition, in the multi-tap method, the same button problem will always occur, but if you press the right button every time to move the cursor, the movement of the copper wire will be too large at that time.
In Hangul, the average number of strokes for entering the phonemes separately is smaller than that of LG EZ. Many people prefer the EZ method, which doesn't cause any problems.
(The Samsung Cheonjiin method also has the advantage that beginners can easily enter vowels, but the consonants are entered in the multi-tap method, which causes the same button problems and the average number of phonemes per phone. There are many people.)
In the English keyboard assignment, even if the button * or the button 0 or the button # has a space-only button, the characters are mainly assigned to lines 1 to 3, but the movement is large because the space button must be moved up to 4 lines to press the space button.
The space button on the computer's keyboard is always in a position where the thumb is easily caught without moving the hand, but in the case of a mobile phone, the thumb must be consciously moved to the space dedicated button. Mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards all press the thumb only, so you have to consciously move your thumb to the space-only button anyway.
In any case, the conventional mobile phone is insufficient in consideration of the space (?) Is the most frequent letters (?).
So here are some ways to make space easier on your phone.
1. Set the specific sequence letter of the first group as space.
Like <Figure 06>
On the 6th letter of 1 group of button 1
On the 6th letter of 1 group of button 2
On the 6th letter of 1 group of button 3
On the 6th letter of 1 group of button 5
The more spaces you assign, the more specific sequence numbers, the easier it is to enter spaces.
In the form of using the right button as a space function button without the space dedicated button as in the conventional Korean input method, when the space is input by the first method, the number of strokes increases by one stroke, but the average copper line decreases, so the speed is slightly reduced. You'll get faster and feel more convenient. By assigning only two spaces as the sixth letters of Button 4 and Button 6, and assigning Button 5 and Button 0 as the combination induction button that allows you to enter the sixth letter,
Just entering the space in the convenient two-hand thumb position, either 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, will be quite convenient. Because row 2 is the average vertical position of both hands, if you combine buttons 4, 5, and 6 on both rows and enter 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, there will be very few lines, and the next line will have a space only button. It is smaller than pressing the in button #, and there are greater benefits if the twin's many benefits are manifested.
Because in English, even if button # is designated as a space-only button, the vertical and horizontal average copper lines for pressing button # are larger than 5 + 4 or 5 + 6.
(The average position of the two-handed thumb is 2 rows 1.33 in the left hand and 2 rows 2.67 in the right hand.
Average copper to button #
From the left hand row 2 row 1.33 column to the button # position 4 row 3 column
The right hand movement of 2 lines 2.67 columns plus the 4 lines 3 columns, the location of the button #, divided by 2, that is, [root ((4-2) ^ 2 + (3-1.33) ^ 2) + Root ((4-2) ^ 2 + (3-2.67) ^ 2)] = 2.31
The average copper to 5 + 4 or 5 + 6 is
The movement to 5 + 4
Left hand from 2 rows 1.33 to 2 rows 1 column, button 4 position, right hand from 2 rows 2.67 to 2 rows 2 column, button 5 position, i.e. [root ((2-2) ^ 2 + (1-1.33) ) ^ 2) + root ((2-2) ^ 2 + (2-2.67) ^ 2)] = 1
The movement to 5 + 6
Left hand from 2 rows 1.33 to 2 rows 2 columns of button 5, right hand 2 rows from 2.67 to 2 rows 3 columns of button 6, ie [root ((2-2) ^ 2 + (2-1.33 ) ^ 2) + root ((2-2) ^ 2 + (3-2.67) ^ 2)] = 1
This
The difference in copper is 2.31: 1, and twins are 2.31 times less. Less copper wire can reduce the speed difference by more than one stroke (described later). ),
If you type in 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, the movement to the next letter is of course smaller than pressing the button #, and there are many advantages of the twins.
Entering 5 + 4 or 5 + 6 may be advantageous in terms of input speed or convenience. (The same applies to the use of button * or button0 as the space button. Also, if the button * is the space button, the user tends to press it with his left hand only. When trying to enter the most frequently used space, the two-handed load is not equalized well.)
In addition, when the button # is pressed in the fourth row of the button #, the bending angle of the last segment of the thumb is also increased, which is inconvenient.
It would be more convenient to add the space to the other buttons so that you can enter the space not only in 5 + 4 or 5 + 6, but also in other combinations, including 2 + 1 and 2 + 3.
Method 2 below, which is more convenient than method 1, is, of course, more convenient than entering space with a conventional right button or button #. Method 3 or 4 will be more convenient.
2. Create a space combination induction button and press any button while holding the button to enter a space.
(The more space combination induction buttons, the easier it is to enter a space.)
For example, you can assign a combination induction button function as shown in the table below.
<Figure 37>
<Figure 38>
<Figure 38.5>
<Figure 38.6>
Figure 38.6 is useful when the number of characters assigned per button does not exceed four.
3. If a character input method is a method that does not function by the button combination in which both buttons are pressed simultaneously,
When two or more buttons are pressed simultaneously, a space is entered. Just close your eyes and press 2 or more of them.
4. In the current letter input method, if there are some functions (or many) that use a combination of buttons in which two buttons are pressed at the same time, such as twin or 'adjacent key input method'.
If any 3 ~ 4 buttons are pressed at the same time, space is inputted. Two-hand thumb presses one or two buttons. You can press the button between the button and the center of the thumb, but you can see it is easy if you do it yourself. This can be done easily by moving the pressing area slightly toward the center of the thumb's fingerprint.
You can think of it as pressing 0.2 to 0.5 seconds between 3 and 4 buttons.
(Note that mobile phones with button borders like <Figure 09> have three to four buttons pressed at the same time, but if you do not have a button border, you can do so more easily. If the button is pushed out so that only about 0.5 ~ 1mm, which is about the size of a home cordless phone, is pressed, the length of the press is large.
3 and 4
Wherever you are with your thumb, just press it on the spot or move to the button position you need to enter the next letter, so you only need to press the space. Has a speed increasing effect.
Although pressing two or more buttons is much faster than pressing a conventional right button, it is on average faster and more comfortable than pressing a four-space-only button. So 3 and 4 are the best.
Of course, it can be parallel to pressing a conventional right button or pressing a space dedicated button of four rows.
You can also use the 1,2,3,4 method.
Note that,
Throughout this commentary
Some function buttons, including the INS, DEL, CLR, and ENTER buttons on the computer keyboard, have been added in the form of letters in a specific order (usually the first group). Just as you can convert a transform function button into a combination induction button, any function button, including the INS, DEL, CLR, and ENTER buttons, can be combined into a combination induction button.
(Although you can use the new Space Button feature from step 1 to step 4).
However, the space button function takes precedence over any other function buttons, including the INS, DEL, CLR, and ENTER buttons. Phone-specific buttons, including stroke addition or double consonant buttons, can also be combined-induced buttons rather than letters. )
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Hangul Input Method Dilemma and Solution through Twins
For foreign language characters other than Korean
Phoneme assignment on small keypads is standardized.
There are only several types of input methods. There are several methods including multi-tap method, T9 method, `* &# method`,` adjacent key input method`, and 2-TOUCH method.
If you switch from a small keypad phone to a small keypad phone, you don't have to worry about what text input is. (99% of the time, the multi-tap method and the T9 method are built in by default, other methods are not built in.)
By the way, in the case of Hangul
Phoneme assignments vary depending on the text input method.
Hangul can change the basic phonemes to make different phonemes, so the phoneme assignment depends on how you choose the default phonemes. The notation on the button also changes.
So, if you switch from a small keypad mobile phone to a small keypad mobile phone, you should think about whether the text input method is your preferred type.
In the case of Samsung Electronics
The basic phoneme (?) Of the vowel is Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ)
Consonants are multitaped with all consonants assigned to completion.
LG Electronics' EZ Method
The basic phoneme of the vowel is ㅏ ㅓ ㅗ ㅜ ㅡ ㅣ
The basic phoneme of the consonant is a b b d.
In the case of the Pantech Sky and Curitel method
The basic phoneme of the vowel is ㅏ ㅑ ㅗ ㅕ ㅗ ㅛ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ
Consonants are multitaped with all consonants assigned to completion.
For Motorola
The basic phoneme of the vowel is ㅏ ㅓ ㅗ ㅜ ㅡ ㅣ (same as LG Electronics).
As the basic phoneme of the consonant is Cheonjiin, the consonant is assigned to the consonant as a complete type and input by the multi-tap method and stroke addition.
There are many other ways and will continue to be born.
If you think Korean a little bit, you can come up with a new character input method.
However, there is a dilemma in the Hangul input method.
If you have fewer basic phonemes (= less complete phonemes), it's easier to memorize keyboard assignments, which makes it easier for beginners.
When entering double consonants and vowels (especially double vowels), the number of strokes increases and the thumb becomes very uncomfortable.
This is especially the case with the vowel input method, for example.
The Cheonjiin method is the preferred method for those in their 30s and over who type fewer characters.
If you have a lot of basic phonemes (= a lot of finished phonemes), it's difficult to memorize keyboard assignments, which makes it difficult for beginners.
Thumb type is satisfied because there are few strokes when inputting double consonants and vowels (especially double vowels).
For example, the consonant and vowel input method of LG EZ method.
Motorola's method is the same.
This is the preferred method for teenagers and teenagers with a lot of text input.
And each character input method has its own advantages and at the same time has its own disadvantages. That is, there is no method with only advantages and no method with only disadvantages.
From 2001 to 2007, various government agencies, including the Korea Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute (ETRI) and the Information and Communication Technology Committee (TTA), consulted with cell phone manufacturers several times to unify their keyboard assignments. The wind was always ruined. But it's also because there are many people who prefer each approach rather than being selfish.
However, as mentioned above, there are advantages and disadvantages for each character input, and each method is preferred by the user. As described above, in addition to the conventional method, the phoneme that is not assigned to the completed form in the conventional method is further completed. By assigning twins in parallel, 40 Korean phonemes can be input as 1 or 2 strokes regardless of the conventional input method.
Even beginners who prefer the conventional input method can be satisfied, and the thumb craving for faster input can also be satisfied with twins.
This is because the twins can conveniently input the input mode without changing the text mode, regardless of the conventional method.
In 2008, with the expansion of the domestic entry of foreign terminals such as Taiwan's HTC company and the adoption of different Hangul input methods for each overseas terminal companies, the inconvenience of consumers increased, and at the time when the problem of standardization of mobile phone Hangul input again emerged above the water level,
In the future, if there is a need for unification, it will be necessary to unify it in a way that includes twins.
Even if it is not complete unification, the unification of <Figure 16.3> can be done at any time without the agreement of mobile phone manufacturers and related companies, including telecommunication companies. It seems.
And, in fact, the twins can be used as a new world standard after the multi-tap method and the T9 method. (Not as a new input method, but as a text accelerator to help with other methods.)
Recall that complex phonemes among Korean phonemes break the stereotype that they try to input only through transformation and combination of basic phonemes, and may enter the phone faster than before, as well as a method of assigning many phonemes to completion.
Even if you try to unify the phoneme assignment, it is difficult to agree between the companies. However, the efforts to unify the phoneme assignment can be seen as a hindering the development and change of Hangul. .
Because there are twins!
(Or as mentioned above, an organic light emitting diode or a display screen in the form of Fig. 16.3 and its explanation may be used for standardization.)
When applying twins, there is no risk in applying twins to a product because the input method can be input as it is.
In addition, the phonemes that have been additionally assigned in the past are not written, and the user may be able to apply the twins by memorizing them (especially the thumb group) so that a quick input can be made.
Even if you are not a Korean, you can memorize one minute if you are Korean.
In addition, the same handset can be sold in two forms, one marked with a button and the other assigned.
From above
`There are many other ways and will continue to be born.
If you think Korean a little bit, you can come up with a new character input method.
Hangul is based on what you want to put as a base letter, and transform or combine the default letters will generate a number of input methods.
E.g
The basic steps for selecting vowels are as follows:
1 Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ): ex)
2 ㅏ ㅓ ㅗ ㅜ ㅡ ㅣ Add stroke: ex) LGEZ, Motorola
3 ㅏ ㅑ ㅓ ㅕ ㅗ ㅠ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ: Ex) Pantech (Sky, Curitel), Motorola
4 ㅏ ㅑ ㅓ ㅕ ㅠ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ ㅣ ㅔ ㅖ 예: ex) Computer keyboard
5 All 21 collections will be assigned as complete forms.
6 others
The basic steps for selecting basic letters in consonants are as follows.
(1 ~ 4 is just thinking alone.)
One.
ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (the phoneme finish button, double consonant button may be added)
How to input consonants by combining the above circle, horizontal line, vertical line and two diagonal lines. Just press the handwriting stroke order.
The specific input order rules are up to you. (The same is true for methods 2 and 4.)
E.g
To enter a, press ㅡ and ㅣ to enter
To input ㄹ, press ㅡ and ㅣ and ㅡ and Ⅰ and ㅡ to enter
To enter ㅅ, press / and ＼ to enter
To enter, press ㅡ and / and ＼ to enter
To enter down, press ㅡ and ㅡ and / and ＼ to enter
To input ㅎ, press ㅡ and ㅡ and ㅇ to enter.
ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / 글자 No other letters are assigned, so there is nothing to memorize.
However, when entering two consonants consecutively, which is the case of entering the final letter of the first letter and the first letter of the back letter, in particular, it may consist of only several line segments. You may need a phoneme finish button because the device may be difficult to recognize.
The figure below and the user manual of LG Electronics' KF600 model keyboard exported to <Figure 38.7> also suggest that there is a way to input Chinese characters by entering strokes in Chinese Chinese characters input method (buttons 1, 2, 3, Kanji strokes are written above the letters 4 and 5.)
In this way, it is much easier to input Korean consonants rather than Hanja. If you can type Chinese characters completely and easily this way, it would be great for the Chinese, but it doesn't.
Nevertheless, it is not recommended to apply method 1 to Hangul input because it has many strokes. The following methods 2, 3 and 4 are also not recommended.
However, if you prefer to use vowel input, you should give it a try. (About 4 times seems to be enough to try.)
<Figure 38.7>
2.
ㄱ ㄴ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (You may have additional phoneme finishing buttons and double consonant buttons.)
(To enter ㄹ, press a, ㅡ, and b to enter faster than method 1,
To enter ㅁ, press b and a to enter faster than method 1,
To enter ㄷ, press ㅡ and b to enter faster than step 1,
To input ㅌ, press ㅡ 2 and b to enter faster than method 1.)
3.
ㅅ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (You may have additional phoneme finishing button and double consonant button.)
(See explanation 4)
4.
ㄱ ㄴ ㅅ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ (You may have additional phoneme finishing buttons and double consonant buttons.)
(To enter, press ㅡ and ㅅ to enter faster than method 2,
If you want to type ㅡ, press 2 and ㅅ to enter faster than method 2.)
5.
ㄱ ㄴ ㄹ ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ Double consonant button, stroke add button: ex) LG EZ type
6.
14 consonants excluding the consonants ㅋ ㅁ ㅌ ㅁ
7.
All 19 consonants are assigned to be completed: ex) Samsung Cheonjiin, Pantech-Sky
8.
Miscellaneous: Some methods have a symbol ㅗ to quickly enter the head of the letter or. There is also a way that the = sign to enter the upper couple of ㅋ or 능 faster.
For the elderly who have a lot of memorization, it may be easiest to input vowels and consonants ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (or 2-4 consonants).
How about the next generation of filial piety phones for the elderly?
(This method can be very awkward because it's not familiar yet, like Hangul Phoneme Completion.)
Conventionally, in the Cheonjiin method and the Pantech system, consonants have already been habitually assigned to be completed, so in the future, only vowels should be assigned to complete.)
The vowels are cheonjiin, consonants ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (or the method 2 ~ 4 consonants), how to input all the phonemes in addition to the final form may be a good way to put the twins together. If you enter vowels as cheonjiin, the consonants are consonants that are more than 19 conventional consonants and seem to be better suited to ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (or consonants 2-4).
However, this method is not highly recommended, and any Korean can think of methods similar to the above methods, so Hangul input methods can be born in the future, but they are unlikely to satisfy both beginners and practitioners at the same time. There are few, so we can add additional phonemes that are not assigned to such a method to complete, to satisfy both the novice and the experienced in parallel with the twins.
In English alphabet, in fact,
ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ ⊂ ⊃ J O U S You can complete all the letters in the combination,
In order to reduce the number of strokes, all of them are assigned to completion type.
anyway,
Even beginner is satisfied while being able to use conventional method,
All of the Korean phonemes will be assigned to the complete form, so they can be entered quickly to satisfy even the expert. (Cheongjiin and Pantech's Sky and Curitel have all consonants already assigned as inputs.
The first phone required to complete a phone that is not assigned to LG EZ or Motorola is already assigned to a specific button.
If you don't memorize it, you won't be able to enter the phone you want, so it can be said that the method is already assigned to completion.
For example, if you want to enter 에서 in the LG EZ method and select of button 1, you can never enter 절대. Starting with button 7, you should add strokes and double consonants.
Therefore, even if all the phonemes are additionally allocated to the conventional keyboard such as Cheonjiin, it is only difficult to memorize the keyboard because it only allocates about 10 more vowels.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
to the next
Let's look at the major disadvantages of the various Hangul character input methods in the related art, and the twins can solve the disadvantages.
<Figure 39>
Input method
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Word writing practice
As far as I explained, I could certainly feel that I could easily enter special characters or emoticons, but I could not be sure that the convenience of inputting characters expressing languages was not so great. I want to type in.
Let's type in English words and feel the convenience.
Convenience in the case of English also appears in the input of non-English characters. The advantages of twins are almost the same for all languages.
It is not minded to assign such additional characters to conveniently enter punctuation marks or emoticons, and it may be felt that characters can be easily, quickly and conveniently inputted even in the form of a conventional keyboard.
If the twin-tap method and twins
The first letter is danta
The second letter is double click or twin
The third letter is triple click or twin
The fourth letter can be entered four times in quick succession or as a twin.
(It is recommended to input the second or more letters mainly as twins. And the same button problem occurs only when the first letter of the same button is entered continuously. The auto cursor time setting can be shortened so that it can be solved automatically. have.)
If the multi-tap method and twins are not parallel (= twin mode)
The first letter is danta
The second letter is twins
The third letter is twin
The fourth letter is entered as twin.
(In twin-only mode, letters in languages other than English should be entered as twins.)
In this case, the same button problem such as consonant collision does not occur.
And more of the twin's advantages.
Even in multi-tap mode and twin mode
Suppose a user tries to input the letters of each button in the twin exclusive mode as shown below.
The first letter is danta
The second letter is twins
The third letter is twin
4th letter is entered as twin
In this situation, if you try to enter the first letter of the same button several times in succession, and you press a letter button several times in succession, the device does not recognize you as entering the first letter of each button multiple times, and the second to fourth letters. Since it is recognized as entering a letter other than the first letter, including the same button problem occurs when you try to enter the first letter multiple times.
(The second or more letters are definitely entered as twins, so the same button problem does not occur.)
For example, if you pressed Button 2 two times in a row to enter 'AA', the device recognizes that you want to enter the second letter of Button 2, and only enters `B`.
However, when the second or more letters are inputted as twins, the same button problem does not occur as in the conventional multi-tap method.
For example, when you try to input 'AABBCC', when you enter BB and CC, you do not enter the multi-tap, but instead of the same button does not occur.
In the conventional multi-tap method, since A, B, and C are assigned to the same button, the same button problem occurs for each spelling. Therefore, the cursor must be moved manually for each spelling.
If the multi-tap method and the twins in the same form as above, move the cursor in the conventional manner only after the first A, or only when the second A is entered, the combination induction button for entering the first letter even though A is the first character ( Definite input into twins using button 1 or button 3) does not cause the same button problem. Alternatively, you can shorten the autocursor time setting to make it nearly automatic.
Even if the same button problem does not occur, even if a single combination of inputs that can be input by a single stroke, that is, even when input by two inputs, an unnecessary one stroke increases as if the cursor is artificially moved as in the prior art, but the conventional right direction The copper line is significantly reduced than using the button to move the cursor artificially, and the copper line is reduced when viewed more closely than moving the cursor to a button * or a space-only button called Button 0 or Button # in the fourth row. Because the combination induction button for entering the first letter exists in one row, only one row is moved vertically from row 2, which is the average position of the letter button, and the combination induction button for entering the first letter is in columns 1 and 3. It is located on both sides, so there are fewer copper lines in the first and third rows according to the situation, and there are fewer horizontal lines because you can choose the comfortable combination guide button.
In order to operate the space-only button, two rows must be moved vertically since the average position of the letter button must always move from a row to four specific columns. Like the twins, you can't choose the first or the third row as close as you can.
In addition, by adjusting the time setting of the auto cursor, when the same button problem occurs when the first letter is continuously input, it may be automatically solved without using the artificial method as described above.
LG Electronics' Japanese export model allows the L705ix to set the time of the auto cursor.
Auto-cursor time setting is when the character is input by the multi-tap method,
When the characters in the same button are continuously input, when the set time elapses, the cursor automatically moves to the next space so that the same button problem does not occur.
Mobile phones assigned Japanese characters have five letters assigned per button, so the same button problem occurs more frequently than Korean or English, so it seems that auto cursor time setting is necessary.
In the conventional multi-tap method, if the cursor is not artificially moved, the character is determined by the character displayed in the current cursor after 2 seconds, and the cursor moves to the next space. Since 2 seconds is felt too long, the cursor is usually pressed by pressing the space button or the right button. Rule was artificially moved.
When setting the auto-cursor time, a person who has a fast text entry speed can make the time setting as short as possible.
If you set a short time for the slow character input speed, you have to press the same button several times until the desired character is displayed.If the speed is slower than the set time, the cursor moves to the next space. Unwanted characters are entered.
So, there are 4 setting times as below.
1. OFF: The cursor should be moved artificially using the right arrow button.
2. SLOW: After 2 seconds, the character of the current cursor is confirmed and the cursor moves to the next space. (Most mobile phones in Korea are set to 2 seconds and cannot be changed.)
3. NORMAL: After 1.5 seconds, the letter of the current cursor is confirmed and the cursor moves to the next column.
4. FAST: After 1 second, the current cursor character is confirmed and the cursor moves to the next column.
In my opinion, in the multi-tap method, when you press the same button, you can usually press about 5 times a second, so it is better to use a new setting time of 0.2 to 0.5 seconds.
(The shorter the setting time is, the better, but it is too short and shorter than the interval of continuous pressing speed.Therefore, there is a problem that the user cannot input by the multi-tap method. More recommended.)
Then, even if you enter the first letter of each button consecutively, you do not need to move the cursor manually, but you only need to press the buttons for 0.2 ~ 0.5 seconds intervals. You may feel like you don't.
If you want to type 'AA', just press button 2 and then press button 2 again after 0.2 ~ 0.5 seconds without needing to move the cursor manually.
This way, when you combine the conventional multi-tap method with twins,
You can enter the first letter of the character with little discomfort.
If you type more than the third number of twins, the number of strokes is reduced,
If you enter the second letter as twins as well, you can show various advantages of the twins. Even if the number of strokes is the same, the effect of reducing the copper wire and other advantages are exhibited.
As above
The same button problem only occurs when you try to enter the first letter of each button consecutively.
Even if it occurs, even if it is solved by inputting with twins in the multi-tap method or by auto cursor time setting, even if it is more convenient than the conventional method of solving by pressing the space button or the right button additionally,
If you do not want the same button problem to occur at all, you can enter it in twin-only mode.
In the explanation for entering a specific word below, since there are very few words that include the first letter consecutively, whether the twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method or the twin-only mode that is not in parallel, the same button problem rarely occurs. Has little difference.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
English word input
Now let's learn how to type specific English words.
Keyboard assignments are based on Figure 03 mentioned above.
The combination induction button assignment table uses the one shown in Figure 07 as mentioned above (but the combination induction button that allows the user to enter the first to fourth letters as shown in the combination induction button assignment diagram in Figures 07.3 through 07.5). 7 * Buttons 3, 6, 9, and # are all lined up, so if you prefer, you can do so, especially for Hangul input methods.)
<Figure 03>: Conventional Type A English Keyboard (= Standard Keyboard)
<Figure 07>: Combination Induction Button Assignment Table
In the following explanation of entering words with twins, when comparing with the multi-tap method, only the number of strokes was compared.
The multi-tap method uses one hand every time a character is entered, so one hand is very busy and the other hand is not working.
<Example: To enter F, press button 3 three times with only one hand in a row, either right hand or left hand; do not press button 3 alternately between right hand and left hand>,
Since twins use both hands almost every time they enter a letter, the two-handed load equalization tends to be strong, resulting in nearly twice the speed of the same strokes as the multi-tap method.For example, to enter F, F is the third letter on button 3. Press and hold button 3 while pressing the combination induction button allowing the third letter to be entered. That is, there is an increase in speed due to the equalization of the two-handed loads by using two hands almost every two strokes. >
(The multi-tap method is a two-to-three-foot unilateral run and a shape that goes to the target point in a sequence of changing feet, and the twins walk to (or jump to) the goal point normally with two feet.)
Therefore, it is recommended to enter the twins that can be double clicked.
When the twin and multi-tap methods are combined, the habit of inputting the third or more letters as twins makes it easier to input the second letters that can be input by double-clicking as twins. (And no matter what language you type in, double-click input makes you feel more comfortable if you type it with twins. You can feel free to type in twins just by using 2 strokes in one hand.
Therefore, in the case of FOLLOW and CIRCLE below, the difference in the input speed of the multi-tap method and the twin is almost caused by the difference in strokes, but the difference in the input speed in other cases is due to the difference in strokes and the equalization of the two-handed loads in every two strokes. It should be borne in mind that even.
And keep in mind that there are speed differences due to the different advantages of twins.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Try typing FOLLOW
If you input using the conventional multi-tap method, you will need the following (total 17 strokes).
3, 3, 3, 6, 6, 6, 5, 5, 5, #, 5, 5, 5, 6, 6, 6, 9
F O L L O W
(`#` Means the same button problem occurs, and the cursor is moved artificially to the right button or the space-only button.)
Applying the twin method is as follows. (7 shots in total)
7 + 3 + 6 + 5 + 5 + 6, 9
FOLLOW
The right hand and left hand are shown in the table below.
<Figure 40>: FOLLOW
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
In the table above, the process also refers to the number of strokes.
The absence of an alphabet below the button number means that the button acts as a combination induction button.
(I'll explain below.)
Since the button 7 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
While holding down the button 7 with your left hand, press the buttons 3, 6, 5, 5, and 6 sequentially to enter FOLLO.
Enter button W by pressing button 9 with your right hand.
The continued numbering of the buttons with `+` does not mean that all the buttons are kept pressed, but rather means that the other buttons are turned on and off sequentially with the other hand while the first button is pressed.
If you want to type! @ # $% ^ & * () On your computer keyboard
It is the same as pressing the buttons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 sequentially with the right hand while pressing the shift button with the left hand.
Since button 9 is a combination-induced button that allows you to enter a third letter, you can use it instead of button 7, but if you press button 3 or button 6 while pressing button 9, both hands will be biased in the third row, and both hands will cause interference. In addition, it is recommended to use button 7 because the stability of holding the device is not good.
Twins are assigned a combination of two or more combination induction button of the same function, there is an advantage that can choose the optimal combination induction button according to the situation.
So, as with FOLLOW, when there is a sequence of letters in the same order for each button, it can be seen that the combination induction button pressed in the front can be used as it is when entering the next letter.
However, this advantage is not only achieved when the sequence of letters of each button is the same sequence, but even when there are spelling inputs that are assigned to other buttons in the middle. (Of course, all of these phenomena appear when you input letters with twins, including Korean and Japanese characters.)
E.g
Of NAKED
When you enter NAKE, N, K, and E are the second letters of buttons 6, 5, and 3 respectively.
Even if the first letter A of button 2 is inserted in the middle ( L below the button number means left hand and R means right hand press).
Like 4 + 6, 2, 4 + 5 + 3
L R R L R R
NAKE
Button 4, which is the combination induction button used when entering K and E, can be used as it is, with the copper wire being 0, button 4, which is the combination induction button used when entering N.
If the movement is 0, there is an effect of increasing the speed by which 1 stroke is reduced.
Of REMEMBER
When entering EMEMBE, E, E, B, and E are the second letters of buttons 3, 3, 2, and 3, respectively.
Even if the first letter M of button 6 is stuck in the middle
Like 4 + 3, 6, 4 + 3, 6, 4 + 2 + 3
L R R L R R L R R
EMEMBE
Button 4, which is the combination induction button used to enter E, B, and E at the back, can use the button 4, which is the combination induction button, used when the first E is entered, with the same copper line at 0.
When entering LADY, L and Y are the 3rd letters of buttons 5 and 9 respectively.
Even if the first letters A and D of buttons 2 and 3 are stuck in the middle
Like 7 + 5, 2, 3, 7 + 9
L R R R L R
LADY
The button 7 which is a combination induction button used when inputting Y can use the button 7 which is a combination induction button used when inputting L, as it is with the copper line being 0.
Of COTTON
When entering COTTO, C, O and O are the third letters of buttons 2, 6 and 6.
Even if the first letter of button 8 is inserted T, T
Like 7 + 2 + 6, 8, 8, 7 + 6
L R R R R L R
COTTO
The button 7, which is the combination induction button used to input the last O, can be used as the button 7, which is the combination induction button used when the previous CO is input, with the copper line being 0.
For more examples, see what you have checked as you type the 1000 most frequently used words in English, and feel as you type.
Let's enter CIRCLE
If you input using the conventional multi-tap method, you will need the following (total 17 strokes).
2, 2, 2, 4, 4, 4, 7, 7, 7, 2, 2, 2, 5, 5, 5, 3, 3
CIRCLE
Applying the twin method is as follows. (8 shots in total)
9 + 2 + 4 + 7 + 2 + 5, 4 + 3
CIRCLE
<Figure 41>: CIRCLE
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Since the button 9 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
While pressing button 9 with your right hand, press buttons 2, 4, 7, 2, 5 sequentially with your left hand to enter CIRCL.
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
While pressing button 4 with your left hand, press button 3 with your right hand to enter E.
In step 1, button 7 is a combination-induced button that allows you to enter a third letter, but you can use it instead of button 9.However, if button 4 is pressed while button 7 is pressed, both hands will be biased in the first row. In addition, it is recommended to use button 9 because it is less stable to hold the device. In addition, you can't press Button 7 again while holding Button 7, so you'll have to switch to Button 9, which will increase your number of strokes.
Therefore, it is recommended to use button 9 because it is a combination induction button that allows the third character to be entered.
With this in mind, selecting a combination induction button is a mastery of a few inputs, and even if the wrong number is increased by more than the optimal state, the number of strokes is much smaller than the conventional multi-tap method.
The basics of choosing a combination induction button
When entering characters in one column, select the combination induction button in three columns.
When entering three columns of characters, select the combination induction button in the first column.
When entering the second column of characters, you can select the combination induction column of the first or third column.
Even if the other buttons like FOLLOW, when the letters of the 2nd and 3rd row buttons are in the same order, select the 1st row combination induction button,
Even with other buttons, such as CIRCLE, selecting the combination-induced button in the third column when entering the same sequence of characters in the first and second row buttons can be entered with the minimum number of strokes.
In the future, I will not mention why any button is selected as a combination induction button.
If you think about it, there are some personal preferences.
In particular, when a character assigned to the second row of buttons is entered, it is convenient for some people to select a combination induction button in one row, and some people may be comfortable in selecting a combination induction button in three rows.
In addition, when inputting with twins is repeated, when a certain word is inputted, when a certain spelling is input, two of the combination-inducing buttons having the same function may be more advantageous.
For example, the LOV of LOVE is the third letter of buttons 5, 6, and 8.
The combination induction button for entering the third letter includes button 7 and button 9.
Remember that it's easier to use Button 7 than Button 9.
When using button 9, pressing button 6 with the left hand while pressing button 9 with the right hand, both hands are biased in the third row, and buttons 9 and 6 are attached so that both fingers cause interference. (However, if you make the button much larger than a normal phone like 'Wine phone' in Figure 12 ~ 14, it is slight if you only see the finger interference.)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Let's type WING
When input by the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (7 shots in total)
9, 4, 4, 4, 6, 6, 4
WING
Applying the twin method is as follows. . (6 shots in total)
9, 9 + 4, 4 + 6, 4
WING
<Figure 42>: WING
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Type W with the right hand
With the right hand already on button 9,
Since the button 9 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
While pressing button 9 with your right hand, press button 4 with your left hand to enter I,
(Since there was already a right hand on button 9, the copper wire to press the combination induction button is 0)
With the left hand already on button 4,
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
While holding down Button 4 with your left hand, press Button 6 with your right hand to enter N,
(Since there was already a left hand on button 4, the copper wire to press the combination induction button is 0)
Also, with the left hand already on button 4
Enter G by pressing button 4 with your left hand.
(Because the left hand was already on the button 4, the copper wire to press the letter button is 0)
As above twins make letter button combination induction button,
As in the process 1 ~ 2 or 3 ~ 4, with the copper line being 0, the previous letter button became the combination induction button for entering the next letter.
As in steps 4 and 6, a very good phenomenon occurs, with the copper wire being 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes the letter button for the later letter.
If the movement is 0, there is an effect of increasing the speed by which 1 stroke is reduced.
Due to the above phenomenon, one of the advantages of twins is very little copper.
Therefore, we strongly recommend that you enter the second letter of each button as twins rather than double-clicking (even below).
From twins
Even if the letter button becomes a combination induction button and the combination induction button does not become a character button,
Combination induction button is always in 1 to 3 lines, letter buttons are also in 1 to 3 lines,
In the second row, the average vertical position of the character buttons
There are 0 rows of vertical copper wires for pressing the combination induction button with the average position of 2 rows, and there are very few vertical copper wires, and there are 2 combination induction buttons that perform the same function, 1 each in 1 column and 3 columns.
You can choose a combination induction button with fewer copper wires according to the situation,
In column 1.33 or 2.67, which is the average horizontal position of the letter buttons, you can move to the nearest one or column with combination induction buttons, so press the combination induction button from column 1.33 to column 1 or column 2.67 to column 3. As there are 0.33 rows of horizontally moving copper wires, the copper wires are very small.
However
Combination induction button that allows the button * to enter the second letter,
Button # is used as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a third letter.
`* &# How`
The combination induction button *, # is always on line 4,
The letter buttons are in lines 1 to 3,
In the second row, the average vertical position of the character buttons
Vertically moving copper wires to press the combination induction buttons, * and # in the fourth row, become larger as two rows, and the larger copper wires return to the average position.
In the average horizontal position of character buttons, in column 1.33 or column 2.67
In order to enter the second letter, the button * should always be used as a combination induction button, so the copper wire is always made in one column.
To enter the third letter, you should always use button # as a combination induction button.
The roadway to the street is also big. The copper line also gets bigger to return to the average position.
And, as in the case of inputting the I of the WI of WING, if the character button for inputting the previous character becomes the combination induction button for inputting the later character with the copper line being 0,
This advantage is not only achieved when the two spells causing such a case are contiguous, but even when there is a single input that is assigned to another button in the middle. (Of course, all of these phenomena appear when you input letters with twins, including Korean and Japanese characters.)
E.g,
When entering SMALL ( L below the button number means left hand, R means right hand press)
Like 8 + 7, 6, 2, 7 + 5 + 5
R L R R L R R
SMALL
Even if the first letters M and A of buttons 6 and 2 are stuck in the middle,
Button 7, which is a combination induction button used to input the last LL, can use the button 7, which is the letter button used when entering the previous S, with the same line as 0.
When entering GAME
Like 4, 2, 6, 4 + 3
L R R L R
GAME
Even if the first letters A and M of buttons 2 and 6 are stuck in the middle
Button 4, which is the combination induction button used to input the last E, can be used as the button 4, which is the letter button when the previous G is entered, with the copper line being 0.
Of STORE
When entering STO
Like 8 + 7, 8, 7 + 6
R L R L R
STO
Even if the first letter of button 8 is inserted in the middle
Button 7, which is a combination induction button used to input O, can be used as the button 7, which is the letter button when the previous S is input, with the copper line being 0.
Of CONSIDER
When entering the IDE
Like 9 + 4, 3, 4 + 3
R L R L R
IDE
Even if the first letter of button 3 is inserted in the middle,
Button 4, which is a combination induction button used to input E, can be used as the button 4, which is the letter button when the previous I is input, with the copper line being 0.
For more examples, see what you have checked as you type the 1000 most frequently used words in English, and feel as you type.
And
If the combined induction button for inputting the previous character becomes the character button for inputting the later character, as in the case of inputting the G of the NG of the WING, the two buttons causing such a case This advantage is not only achieved when the spells are continuous, but also when there is a spell that can be entered in the middle of another button. (Of course, all of these phenomena appear when you input letters with twins, including Korean and Japanese characters.)
E.g,
When entering CAMP
Like 7 + 2, 2, 6, 7
L R R R L
CAMP
Even if the first letters A and M of buttons 2 and 6 are stuck in the middle
Button 7, which is a letter button used to input P, can be used as the button 7, which is a combination induction button for inputting C, as it is, with a copper line of 0.
When entering FAR
Like 7 + 3, 2, 9 + 7
L R R R L
FAR
Even if the first letter of button 2 is inserted in the middle,
The button 7, which is a letter button used to input R, can be used as the button 7, which is a combination induction button for inputting the previous F, with a copper line of 0.
For more examples, see what you have checked as you type the 1000 most frequently used words in English, and feel as you type.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Let's enter COPY
When input by the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (10 shots in total)
2, 2, 2, 6, 6, 6, 7, 9, 9, 9
COPY
Applying the twin method is as follows. (6 shots in total)
7 + 2 + 6, 7, 7 + 9
COPY
<Figure 43>: COPY
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Since the button 7 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
While pressing button 7 with your left hand, press buttons 2 and 6 in sequence with your right hand to input CO.
With the left hand already on button 7.
Enter P by pressing button 7 with your left hand.
In addition, with the left hand already on the button 7,
Since the button 7 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
Press and hold button 7 with your left hand and press button 9 with your right hand to enter Y.
In steps 1 and 4, with the copper line being 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes the letter button for the later letter,
In steps 4 to 5, with the copper wire being 0, the previous letter button became a combination induction button for inputting later letters.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Enter TAXI
When input by the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (7 shots in total)
8, 2, 9, 9, 4, 4, 4
TAXI
Applying the twin method is as follows. (6 shots in total)
8, 2, 4 + 9, 9 + 4
TAXI
<Figure 44>: TAXI
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Enter T by pressing button 8 with your left hand.
Enter button A by pressing button 2 with your right hand.
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
While holding down Button 4 with your left hand, press Button 9 with your right hand to enter X,
With the right hand already on button 9, with the copper wire at 0,
Since the button 9 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
While pressing button 9 with your right hand, press button 4, which already has a left hand, to enter I.
To enter `X I`
In steps 3 and 6, with the copper line being 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes the letter button for the later letter,
In processes 4 to 5, the copper wire is reduced in a double state, in which the copper wire is 0, and the previous letter button becomes a combination induction button for inputting later letters.
If you press 4 + 9 or 9 + 4, you only have a copper wire for X and no copper wire for I.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
This time, let's enter the fourth letter (S).
Try typing STYLE
When input by the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (13 shots in total)
7, 7, 7, 7, 8, 9, 9, 9, 5, 5, 5, 3, 3
STYLE
Applying the twin method is as follows. (8 shots in total)
8 + 7, 8, 7 + 9 + 5, 4 + 3
STYLE
<Figure 45>: STYLE
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Since the button 8 is a combination induction button to enter the fourth letter
While holding button 8 with your right hand, press button 7 with your left hand to enter S
With the right hand already on button 8
Press button 8 with your right hand to enter T,
With the left hand already on button 7, with the copper wire at 0,
Since the button 7 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
While holding button 7 with your left hand, press buttons 9 and 5 with your right hand to enter YL.
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
While pressing button 4 with your left hand, press button 3 with your right hand to enter E.
In steps 1 and 3, with the copper line being 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous letter becomes the letter button for the later letter,
(In English, many words contain ST.)
In the process 2 and 4, with the copper line being 0, the previous letter button became a combination induction button for inputting later letters.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Try typing SUSPEND
When input by the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (17 shots in total)
7, 7, 7, 7, 8, 8, 7, 7, 7, 7, #, 7, 3, 3, 6, 6, 3
SUSPEND
Applying the twin method is as follows.
8 + 7, 4 + 8, 8 + 7, 7, 4 + 3 + 6, 3. (11 shots are required)
SUSPEND
<Figure 46>: SUSPEND
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Since the button 8 is a combination induction button to enter the fourth letter
While holding button 8 with your right hand, press button 7 with your left hand to enter S
With the right hand already on button 8, with the copper wire at 0,
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
Hold down button 4 with your left hand and press button 8 with your right hand to enter U.
With the right hand already on button 8, with the copper wire being 0,
Since the button 8 is a combination induction button to enter the fourth letter
While holding button 8 with your right hand, press button 7 with your left hand to enter S
Enter P by pressing button 7 with your left hand.
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
While pressing button 4 with your left hand, press buttons 3 and 6 sequentially with your right hand to enter EN.
Enter button D by pressing button 3 with your right hand.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Let's enter FEED
When input by the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (11 shots in total)
3, 3, 3, #, 3, 3, #, 3, 3, #, 3
FEED
Applying the twin method is as follows. . (6 shots in total)
7 + 3, 4 + 3 + 3, 3
FEED
<Figure 47>: FEED
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Since the button 7 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
While holding button 7 with your left hand, press button 3 with your right hand to enter F,
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
While holding down Button 4 with your left hand, press Button 3 twice in succession with your right hand to enter EE,
Enter button 3 by pressing button 3 with your left hand.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Let's enter MONO
When input by the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (12 shots in total)
6, #, 6, 6, 6, #, 6, 6, #, 6, 6, 6
M O N O
(`#` Means the same button problem occurs, and the cursor is moved artificially to the right button or the space-only button.)
Applying the twin method is as follows. (7 shots in total)
6, 7 + 6, 4 + 6, 7 + 6
MONO
<Figure 48>: MONO
Thumb (L)
number
Confirmation
Thumb (R)
number
Confirmation
Enter M by pressing button 6 with your right hand.
Since the button 7 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
Hold down button 7 with your left hand and press button 6 with your right hand to enter O,
Since the button 4 is a combination induction button to enter the second letter
While holding down Button 4 with your left hand, press Button 6 with your right hand to enter N,
Since the button 7 is a combination induction button to enter the third letter
Hold down button 7 with your left hand and press button 6 with your right hand to enter O.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Let's practice a few more words.
SIX
8 + 7, 9 + 4, 4 + 9
R L R L L R
SIX
HAPPY
6 + 4, 2, 7, 3 + 7, 7 + 9
R L R L R L L R
H A P P Y
The reason why I entered 3 + 7 when I entered the second P
Since the first letter P of the button 7 is continuously inputted, and the twins have the same button problem when the multi-tap method is used in parallel, in order to solve the same button problem, the combination-inducing button for inputting the first letter is Button 3 was used.
In the case of the first letter continuous as described above, it may be more psychologically convenient to enter PP as 3 + 7 + 7 using button 3, which is a combination-inducing button that allows the first letter from the first P to be entered. have. (After all, when there is a sequence of identical characters, it is easier to think that you can use a combination-induced button unconditionally if the same character is a sequence of the same letter.)
And if you shorten the auto cursor time setting, you don't need the combination induction button when entering PP, but just press button 7 twice.
(In twin-only mode, the same button problem does not occur, so you do not need to use button 3, which is a combination-inducing button that prompts you to enter the first letter when you enter PP. Just press button 7 twice.)
ADD
2, 3, 1 + 3
L R L R
A D D
When I typed the second D, I entered 1 + 3 because
Since the first letter of button 3, D, is entered continuously, the same button problem occurs when twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method. Button 1 was used.
And if the first letter is continuous as described above, it is more psychologically convenient to enter DD as 1 + 3 + 3 using button 1, which is a combination-inducing button that allows you to enter the first letter from the first D. have.
And if you shorten the auto cursor time setting, you only need to press button 3 twice to enter DD.
(In twin-only mode, the same button problem does not occur, so you do not need to use button 1, which is a combination-induced button that allows you to enter the first letter when entering DD. Just press button 3 twice.)
EGG
4 + 3, 3 + 4 + 4
L R R L L
E G G
When inputting GG which is the first letter of button 4, G, the same button problem occurs when twins are connected to the multi-tap method. Therefore, to solve the same button problem, the first letter from the first G is selected. By using the button 3, which is a combination induction button, to enter, I tried to input GG as 3 + 4 + 4.
And if you shorten the auto cursor time setting, you only need to press button 4 twice to enter GG.
(In twin-only mode, the same button problem does not occur, so you do not need to use button 3, which is a combination-inducing button that allows you to enter the first letter when entering GG.
MOON
6, 7 + 6 + 6, 4 + 6
R L R R L R
MOON
HIGH
6 + 4, 9 + 4, 4, 6 + 4
R L R L L R L
HIGH
POKE
7, 7 + 6, 4 + 5 + 3
L L R L R R
POKE
YIELD
7 + 9, 9 + 4, 4 + 3, 9 + 5, 3
L R R L L R R L R
YIELD
SEXY
8 + 7, 4 + 3 + 9, 7 + 9
R L L R R L R
SEXY
STRIKE
8 + 7, 8, 9 + 7 + 4, 4 + 5 + 3
R L R R L L L R R
STRIKE
POST
7, 7 + 6, 8 + 7, 8
L L R R L R
POST
POPCORN
7, 7 + 6, 7, 7 + 2 + 6, 9 + 7, 4 + 6
LLRLLRRRLLRPOPCORN
POPOFF
7, 7 + 6, 7, 7 + 6 + 3 + 3
L L R L L R R R
POPOFF
ING (currently progressive)
9 + 4, 4 + 6, 4
R L L R L
ING
IN
9 + 4, 4 + 6
R L L R
IN
IS
9 + 4, 8 + 7
R L R L
IS
ED (Past)
4 + 3, 3
L R R
ED
OF
7 + 6 + 3
L R R
OF
OFF
7 + 6 + 3 + 3
L R R R
OFF
BE
4 + 2 + 3
L R R
BE
ON
7 + 6, 4 + 6
L R L R
ON
YOU
7 + 9 + 6, 4 + 8
L R R L R
YOU
I
9 + 4
R L
I
SS in words
8 + 7 + 7
R L L
SS
ZZZ
8 + 9 + 9 + 9
L R R R
ZZZ
LOVE
7 + 5 + 6 + 8, 4 + 3
L R R R L R
LOVE
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
In lowercase mode
If you want to enter Hi, I am Susy in uppercase and lowercase,
To enter H, I, S in uppercase
In the conventional multi-tap method
I had to change the text mode to uppercase mode,
If you type in twins,
In lowercase mode, without changing the character mode
As the second group letter input method
You can type capital letters as shown below.
6 + 4 ~, 9 + 4 ~, 8 + 7 ~
HIS
While holding down Button 6 with your right hand, press Button 4 with your left hand for at least 0.5 seconds to enter the capital letter H,
While holding down Button 9 with your right hand, press Button 4 with your left hand for at least 0.5 seconds to enter an uppercase I,
Hold down Button 8 with your right hand and press Button 7 with your left hand for at least 0.5 seconds to enter an uppercase S.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Let's type A ~ Z
Entering the conventional multi-tap method is as follows. (Total 74 strokes required)
2, #, 2, 2, #, 2, 2, 2, 3, #, 3, 3, #, 3, 3, 3,
ABCDEF
4, #, 4, 4, #, 4, 4, 4, 5, #, 5, 5, #, 5, 5, 5,
GHIJKL
6, #, 6, 6, #, 6, 6, 6,
MNO
7, #, 7, 7, #, 7, 7, 7, #, 7, 7, 7, 7,
PQRS
8, #, 8, 8, #, 8, 8, 8,
TUV
9, #, 9, 9, #, 9, 9, 9, #, 9, 9, 9, 9,
WXYZ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (44 shots required)
L below the button number just below the left hand, R means the right hand (depending on the personal taste of the twins).
2, 4 + 2, 7 + 2, 3, 4 + 3, 7 + 3, 4, 6 + 4, 9 + 4,
R L R L R R L R L R L R L R L
ABCDEFGHI
5, 4 + 5, 7 + 5, 6, 4 + 6, 7 + 6, 7, 6 + 7, 9 + 7, 8 + 7,
R L R L R R L R L R L R L R L R L
JKLMNOPQRS
8, 4 + 8, 7 + 8, 9, 4 + 9, 7 + 9, 8 + 9
R L R L R R L R L R L R
TUVWXYZ
Typing in twins takes fewer strokes than typing in the multi-tap method, and with the many advantages of twins at the beginning of this manual, A-Z is the quickest and most convenient way to type.
(When you enter the second letter and the third letter consecutively, you only need to move one line between 2 and 3 lines to press each combination induction button. It can also be rotated (rolled?), So if you use other methods like that, you can easily enter it with almost no copper wire.)
I use lowercase letters a ~ z
It takes 13 seconds to write by hand,
Entering twins takes 11 seconds.
And when you enter a word, it can be faster because it brings more advantages of the twins (usually 5 ~ 7), including when entering FOLLOW and WING.
So there is no inconvenience to write a novel on a mobile phone.
Let's enter it with the `* &# method`.
The button * acts as a shift button that lets you enter the second letter of each button,
Let's assume that Button # acts as a shift button that lets you enter the third letter of each button.
2, * + 2, # + 2, 3, * + 3, # + 3, 4, * + 4, # + 4,
ABCDEFGHI
5, * + 5, # + 5, 6, * + 6, # + 6,
JKLMNO
7, * + 7, # + 7, 7, 7, 7, 7,
PQRS
8, * + 8, # + 8, 9, * + 9, # + 9, 9, 9, 9, 9
TUVWXYZ
Twins and at bats are almost the same
Compared to twins, the movement is much bigger
When you enter H and Q, your hands are biased in one column.
When you type F, O, or Y, both hands are in three rows,
You can see that both fingers interfere and the stability of holding the device is also inferior.
Especially
Press button 7 and button * almost simultaneously,
It gets worse when you press Button 9 and Button # almost simultaneously.
And since there is no shift butt to enter the fourth letter
To input S, press button 7 four times in multi-tap method.
To enter Z, press the button 9 four times using the multi-tap method.
And for alternating uppercase and lowercase letters like AaBbCcDeFfGgHhIiJjKkLlMmNnOoPpQqRrSsTtUuVvWwXxYyZz,
In twins,
In lowercase mode,
Lowercase letters are entered by the twin first group letters input method,
Capital letters can be easily entered by entering the second group letters input method without changing the character mode.
The other way is quite cumbersome.
And the more frequently typed English words that are attached to the 1000 words that are attached, the more you will see the twins will feel more convenient.
Japanese has five characters per button,
Like when you enter FOLLOW or CIRCLE,
When there is a sequence of letters of the same order of each button, the number of cases that the combination induction button which is pressed in the front can be used as it is from the back
It may be thought that 3-4 characters per button would be much less than the assigned English, but Japanese reduces the number of situations that would be less because there is no spacing, so the advantages of such twins are almost the same as English. Can be expressed. On this principle,
Since the letter button is a combination induction button
Fig. 42 As when entering 'WING`
With the copper line at 0, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the combination induction button for entering the next letter.
In the state that the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous character becomes the character button of the latter character,
Other twins' merits, including minimizing copper wire, can be expressed at a frequency similar to that of English.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Let's also try typing the Hangul words by applying the twins and see that the advantages of applying the twins in English are implemented in the letters of all languages, including Hangul.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
<Figure 22>: Cheonjiin: Improvement: 2 lines per button Let's take an example of applying twins to Samsung Cheonjiin method.
When there is a sequence of letters in the same order, such as when entering FOLLOW or CIRCLE, the combination-inducing button pressed in the front can be used as it is in the back, so the number of strokes is drastically reduced and the movement line is reduced in the end.
(It does not only occur between the beginning, middle, and final syllables of the same syllable, but also occurs in some or all of the ranges of the beginning, middle, and last syllables, and the whole, middle, and final syllables of the syllables. Of course, this is also true of other ways of improving the Korean input method, which can be easily understood by assuming that the phoneme is only input sideways in a row without any support like English.
Later in the example, you can type in the upcoming `speaking` example.
Let's type `tol`.
If you input in the conventional way, you can see the following.
6, 6, 2, 3, 5, 5,
ㅌ. ㅡ ㄹ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (4 shots required)
4 + 6 + 3 + 5
ㅌ ㅗ ㄹ
ㅌ is the second letter of button 6, ㅗ is the second letter of button 3, and ㄹ is the second letter of button 5.
Press button 6,3,5 with your right hand in turn while pressing button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter.
Let's type `뺐`.
If you input in the conventional way, you'll see the following: (Total 9 strokes required)
7, 7, 7, 1, 2, 1, 8, 8, 8
ㅃ ㅣ. ㅣ ㅆ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (4 shots required)
9 + 7 + 5 + 8
ㅃ ㅐ ㅆ
ㅃ is the third letter of button 7, ㅐ is the third letter of button 5, and ㅆ is the third letter of button 8.
While pressing the button 9, the combination induction button for entering the third letter, with the right hand, press the buttons 7, 5, 8 with the right hand in order.
Let's type `say`.
If you input in the conventional way, you'll see: (12 shots in total)
8, 8, 1, 2, 5, 5, 0, 0, 1, 2, 5, 5
ㅎ ㅣ. ㄹ ㅁ ㅣ. D
Applying the twin method is as follows. (7 shots required)
6 + 8 + 1 + 5 + 0 + 1 + 5
ㅎ ㅏ ㄹ ㅁ ㅏ ㄹ
`ㅎ, ㅏ, ㄹ, ㅁ, ㅏ, ㄹ` is the second letter of buttons 8,1,5,0,1,5,
While holding down the button 6, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the buttons 8, 1, 5, 0, 1, 5 sequentially with your left hand, and press the buttons ㅎ, ㅏ, ㄹ, ㅁ, ㅏ, Type r
(The same combination induction button can be used even if the syllable is different.)
Since the letter button is a combination induction button
Fig. 42 As when entering 'WING`
The case of minimizing copper wires in which the previous character button becomes a combination induction button for inputting later characters while the copper wire is 0.
(It does not only occur between the first syllables, the neutral syllables and the final syllables of the same syllable, but also occurs between the first, middle, and last syllables of the first syllable, and the first, middle, and last syllables of the syllables. Of course, this is also true for the improved method.
Let's type in a wedge.
If you input in the conventional way, you'll see: (Total 8 strokes required)
8, 8, 8, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1
ㅆ. ㅡ ㅣ. ㅣ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (4 shots required)
7 + 8, 8 + *
ㅆ ㅙ
(It's much faster because there's a lot of difference in stroke and fewer lines)
ㅆ Since this is the 3rd letter of button 8
While holding down the button 7, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, press the button 8 with your right hand to enter 손,
ㅙ is the fourth letter of the button *
With the right hand already at button 8, with the copper wire at 0
While holding down button 8, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the fourth letter, press the button * with your left hand and type ㅙ.
[(If ㅙ is the third letter of a button *,
You can also enter 3 strokes with 9 + 8 + *
ㅆ ㅙ
(I'll explain later as an example. In the Pantech series, we've assigned ㅆ and 에 to the same sequence of buttons, so we can enter three wedges.)
In this case,
ㅆ is the third letter of button 8, and ㅙ is the third letter of button *.
Hold down button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, with your left hand and press buttons 8 and * in order.)]
Even typing on a computer keyboard requires a total of four strokes.
To enter ㅆ, hold down the shift button and press the s button, which is assigned the second letter ㅆ.
To enter ㅙ, you must enter ㅗ and ㅐ in combination.
On computer keyboard
In order to input Hangul twin consonants, you need to press the button assigned with the double consonants while holding down the shift key.
If you enter 복 ㅒ ㅚ ㅙ ㅟ ㅝ ㅞ 인 모두 for all the vowels except 항상 항상, you always need 2 strokes.
because,
ㅖ ㅒ should be entered by holding down the shift key and pressing the button assigned ㅖ,.
This is because ㅚ ㅘ ㅙ ㅟ ㅝ ㅞ 입력 should be entered as a combination of component short vowels.
So even on a computer keyboard
Two consonants
All compound vowels except ㅐ ㅔ ㅒ ㅖ
When typing a combined letter, you always need four strokes.
However, even if you assign all phonemes to the miniature keypad and input them as twins,
All double consonants can be entered within 2 strokes,
All double vowels can be entered within 2 strokes.
If the double consonants and the double consonants to be input are assigned in the same order of the other buttons, the three consonants can be entered.
In other words, typing these characters is faster than a computer keyboard.
Since the letter button is a combination induction button
Fig. 42 As when entering 'WING`
With the copper line at 0, the previous letter button becomes a combination induction button for entering the next letter.
With the copper wire being 0, the combination induction button for entering the previous letter becomes the letter button for the last letter,
Both cases occur to minimize copper wire
(Only one out of two cases occurs.)
Let's type `must '.
If you input in the conventional way, you can see the following (6 shots are required).
4, 4, 4, 2, 3, 4
ㄲ. ㅡ ㄱ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (5 shots in total)
9 + 4, 4 + 3, 4
ㄲ ㅗ ㄱ
(The difference in strokes is not much, but it's much faster because it uses both hands evenly and there are very few wires.)
ㄲ Since this is the third letter of button 4
While holding down the button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, press the button 4 with your left hand to enter ㄲ,
With the left hand already at button 4, with the copper wire at 0
Is the second letter of button 3
While holding down the button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 3 with your right hand and enter ㅗ.
With the left hand already at button 4, with the copper wire at 0
Since a is the first letter of button 4
Enter button a by pressing button 4 with your left hand.
As for the Pantech family, LG EZ, the Motorola method other than celestial person,
If you are in parallel with the twins or enter the twin exclusive mode
While you can enter all phonemes within 2 strokes,
If you double-click a phoneme as a twin,
If there is a sequence of letters in the same sequence, such as when entering English FOLLOW or CIRCLE, you can use the combination induction button pressed in the back as it is, so that the number of strokes will be greatly reduced,
Since the letter button is a combination induction button
Fig. 42 As when entering 'WING`
With the copper line at 0, the previous letter button becomes a combination induction button for entering the next letter.
In the state that the copper line is 0, the combination induction button for inputting the previous character becomes the character button of the latter character,
Minimization of copper wires occurs, so words can be entered very quickly.
Please try it yourself.
Still, how many more words do you apply to twins in ways other than heaven and earth?
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
<Figure 25>: Pantech Series: Sky Curitel: Improvement: 2 lines per button
Let's type in a wedge.
Entering the conventional sky method is as follows. (Total 6 strokes are required.)
7, 7, 7, 9, 3, 2
ㅆ ㅗ ㅏ ㅣ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (3 shots are required)
9 + 7 + 5
ㅆ ㅙ
ㅆ is the third letter of button 7, and ㅙ is the third letter of button 5.
While holding down the button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, press the buttons 7, 5 with your left hand in order.
Let's type `set`.
Entering the conventional sky method is as follows. (Total 6 strokes are required.)
7, 7, 6, 2, 7, 7
ㅅ ㅓ ㅣ ㅅ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (6 shots required)
6 + 7, 7 + 6, 6 + 7
ㅅ ㅔ ㅅ
(The difference in strokes is not much, but it's much faster because it uses both hands evenly and there are very few wires.)
ㅅ This is the second letter of button7.
While holding down the button 6, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 7 with your left hand to enter ㅅ,
With the left hand already at button 7, with the copper wire at 0
Is the third letter of button6
While holding down the button 7, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, press the button 6 with your right hand to enter ㅔ,
With the left hand already at button 7, with the copper wire at 0
ㅅ This is the second letter of button7.
While holding down the button 6, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 7 with your left hand and enter ㅅ.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
<Figure 29>: LG EZ: Improvement: 2 lines per button
Let's type in a wedge.
If you enter the conventional LG EZ method, it is as follows. (Total 5 strokes are required.)
7, #, 6, 3, 9
ㅆ ㅗ ㅏ ㅣ
(To input ㅆ, press button 7 to bring up ㅅ and press button # to double consonant)
Applying the twin method is as follows. (3 shots are required)
8 + 7 + *
ㅆ ㅙ
ㅆ is the fourth letter of button 7, and ㅙ is the fourth letter of button *.
While pressing the button 8, which is the combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter, with the right hand, press buttons 7, * with the left hand in order.
Let's enter just Baechul's
If you enter the conventional LG EZ method, it is as follows. (Total 10 strokes are required.)
5, *, 3, 9, 7, *, *, 3, 3, 4
ㅏ ㅣ ㅓ ㄹ
(Big copper line up to four lines is necessary to push button *,
If you try to enter the letter with both hands, button 7 and button * are in row 1, so if both hands are in the row, finger interference will occur, and the device may tilt to one side, resulting in less stability.
Applying the twin method is as follows. (8 shots in total)
4 + 5 + 9, 9 + 7, 4 + 3, 4
ㅂ ㅐ ㅓ ㅓ ㄹ
(There is a difference in strokes, but it uses both hands equally, and there is no copper line up to four lines, and there are the following copper line reduction effects.
ㅂ is the second letter of button 5, and ㅐ is the second letter of button 9.
While holding down the button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the buttons 5, 9 with your right hand in order to enter `fold`.
With the right hand already at button 9, with the copper wire at zero
Since this is the third letter of button 7,
Hold down button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, with your left hand
(Not the same syllable, but the final syllable and the initial letter of the first letter can also be entered with zero copper. The same is true for other input methods other than English and Cheonjiin.)
ㅓ is the second letter of button 3
While holding down the button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 3 with your right hand to enter ㅓ.
With the left hand already at button 4, with the copper wire at 0
This is the first letter of button 4
Press button 4 with your left hand to enter r.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Figure 35: Motorola: Improvements: 2 lines per button
Let's type pretty.
Entering the conventional Motorola method, the following is required (total of 5 strokes required)
7, 7, 6, 3, 9
ㄲ ㅗ ㅏ ㅣ
Applying the twin method is as follows. (3 shots are required)
9 + 1 + 0
ㄲ ㅙ
ㄲ is the third letter of button 1, and ㅙ is the third letter of button 0.
While holding down button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, press buttons 1,0 with your left hand in order.
Let's type `table`.
Entering the conventional Motorola method, the following is required (total 4 strokes required).
7, #, 6, #
ㅛ ㅛ
(When button # is pressed, a large copper line in four rows is required,
If both hands are used, Button # and Button6 are assigned to the same row of three rows, so both hands are biased in the third row, resulting in finger interference, and the device may tilt to one side.
Applying the twin method is as follows. (4 shots required)
6 + 7, 7 + 6
ㅛ ㅛ
(The strokes are the same as before, but the above-mentioned problems are solved, the wires are very small, and the two-handed load is evenly distributed, so it is possible to input more quickly and comfortably. This effect occurs when it occurs.
Only button 6 and button 7 can be input.)
ッ is the second letter of button7
While holding down the button 6, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 7 with your left hand
With the left hand already at button 7, with the copper wire at 0
Is the third letter of button6
Press and hold button 6, the left button for the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, and press 6 with the right hand to enter ㅛ.
Let's type `scalp`.
Entering the conventional Motorola method, the following is required (total of six strokes required).
4, 6, 6, 7, #, 9
ㄷ ㅜ ㅣ ㅣ
(When button # is pressed, a large copper line in four rows is required,
When using both hands, Button # and Button9 are assigned to the same row of three rows, so both hands are biased in the third row, resulting in finger interference, and the device can tilt to one side, resulting in poor stability of holding the device.)
Applying the twin method is as follows. (6 shots required)
4, 4 + 6, 6 + 7, 9
ㄷ ㅜ ㅣ ㅣ
(The stroke is the same as the conventional one, but the above-mentioned problems are solved, the copper wire is very small, and the two-handed load is evenly distributed, so it is possible to input more quickly and conveniently. The same thing happens when this effect occurs.)
Since this is the first letter of button 4
Press button 4 with your left hand to enter 'ㄷ'.
With the left hand already at button 4, with the copper wire at 0
Since TT is the second letter of button 6
Hold down button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, with the left hand and press button 6 with your right hand to enter TT,
With the right hand already at button 6, with the copper wire at 0
Since this is the second letter of button 7,
While holding down the button 6, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 7 with your left hand
ㅣ is the first letter of button 9
Press button 9 once with your right hand to enter `ㅣ`.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Entering English and Korean characters on a compact keypad consisting of 4 to 8 buttons
(Applicable to other writing systems.
Rather than claiming that the following is good for practicality, the following suggests that using twins is also possible. Figure 55 is quite fun.
Of course, even in this case, the combination induction button may precede or follow the letter button. )
Twins make it easy to enter characters on a compact keypad.
If you ever type text on your MP3 or watch, or if you're producing a mobile phone with fewer buttons to keep up with the trend of miniaturization,
Even if only the first group character input method is applied
You can also type characters with fewer buttons.
sure
If you use the second to fifth group letters input method, you can reduce the number of buttons further.
In most cases, you can enter the multi-tap method and twins in parallel, or you can enter only twins.
And you can change the assignment of letters to each button as much as you like.
To make it easier, I'll draw a long button
first,
In English
As shown in Figure 49 below.
All eight phonemes can be entered within two strokes by assigning English to the eight buttons.
Four letters are assigned per button.
Use button 3 or button 4 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a second letter,
Use button 5 or button 6 as a combination induction button to enter the third letter,
Use button 7 or button 8 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the fourth letter.
(It is not necessary to make a combination induction button to button 1 or button 2.
if not
You can also use Button 1 or Button 2 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the first letter.)
Of each button
Enter the first letter as a single stroke, or press and hold the button 1 or button 2 and press the letter button to which the target letter is assigned.
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4.
Enter the third letter by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 5 or button 6.
The fourth letter can be entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 7 or button 8.
As above, you can only input by twins, or you can type in parallel with multi-tap method.
If you want to input up to the number in normal character mode, assign one or two numbers per button and input them in other group character input method (eg, second or third group character input method). The same is true in the following descriptions.
And if you have a lot of button space, including the example below,
You don't have to print all the phonemes, just the first phone for each button. In particular, since English is assigned in standard enumeration order, there is no difficulty in calculating the order of unprinted phonemes.
Or as shown in the two tables in <Figure 50> and <Figure 51> below.
We assign letters to the six buttons
Characters per button can be divided into two groups and typed in the first to second group letters input method.
The character in the first line of each character button is defined as the first group character,
The letter in the second line of each letter button is defined as the second group letter,
Use button 3 or button 4 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a second letter,
By using Button 5 or Button 6 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a third letter,
(It is not necessary to make a combination induction button to button 1 or button 2.
if not
You can also use Button 1 or Button 2 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the first letter.)
Of the first group of letters of each button
Enter the first letter as a single stroke, or press and hold the button 1 or button 2 while pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned.
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4.
Enter the third letter by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 5 or button 6.
Of the second group of letters on each button
Enter the first letter as a long hit, or press and hold the button 1 or button 2 while pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned.
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4.
The third letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 5 or button 6.
Or as shown in the table below.
We assign letters to the four buttons,
Characters per button may be divided into three groups and may be input by the first to third group character input methods.
The character in the first line of each character button is defined as the first group character,
The letter in the second line of each letter button is defined as the second group letter,
The letter in the third line of each letter button is defined as the third group letter,
Use Button 1 or Button 2 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a second letter,
By using Button 3 or Button 4 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter,
Of the first group of letters of each button
Enter the first letter as a single stroke,
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing the button 1 or the button 2.
Enter the third letter by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4,
Of the second group of letters on each button
Enter the first letter long,
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 1 or button 2.
Enter the third letter by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4.
Of the third group of letters on each button
The first letter is blank on the dial, so no input
Enter the second letter by double-clicking button 1 or button 2, and keep pressing your finger on button 1 or button 2 without pressing the button 1 or button 2.
The third letter is entered by double-clicking button 3 or button 4 and pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing the finger without releasing it from button 3 or button 4.
In the case of letters of other languages or Korean
If you use a method other than the first group character input method including the second to fifth group character input method as the method of inputting the English mentioned above
You can easily type with fewer buttons, as shown above.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Now let's talk about typing Korean phonemes on a compact keypad.
As shown in the table below
All 40 Korean phonemes are assigned to the eight buttons.
You can also enter all phonemes within two strokes.
5 characters are assigned per button.
Use Button 1 or Button 2 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a second letter,
Use button 3 or button 4 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a third letter,
Use Button 5 or Button 6 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the fourth letter.
By using button 7 or button 8 as a combination induction button for entering the fifth letter,
Of each button
Enter the first letter as a single stroke,
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 1 or button 2.
Enter the third letter by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4.
The fourth letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 5 or button 6.
The fifth letter can be entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 7 or button 8.
As above, you can only input by twins, or you can type in parallel with multi-tap method.
And as shown in the table below
6 buttons
A vowel assigns Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ) like Cheonjiin,
Consonants are all 19 consonants,
The vowel is input according to the conventional Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ),
Consonants can also be entered within two strokes using twins.
(In conventional Cheonjiin, the double consonant input required three strokes.)
The first letter of button 1 is a
The second letter of button 1 is b
The third letter of button 1 is
The fourth letter of button 1 is ㄹ,
The first letter of button 2 is ㅁ
The second letter of button 2 is ㅂ
The third letter of button 2 is ㅅ
The fourth letter of button 2 is ㅇ,
The first letter of button 3 is
The second letter of button 3 is
The third letter of button 3 is ㅋ
The fourth letter of button 3 is ㅌ,
The first letter of button 4 is cloth (ㅣ)
The second letter of button 4 is
The third letter of button 4 is ㅎ
The fourth letter of button 4 is ㄲ,
The first letter of button 5 is paper (.)
The second letter of button 5 is ㄸ
The third letter of button 5 is ㅃ
The fourth letter of button 5 is ㅆ,
The first letter of button 6 is in (ㅡ)
The second letter of button 6 is ㅉ
The third letter of button 6 is?
The fourth letter of button 6 is! to be.
Use Button 1 or Button 2 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a second letter,
Use button 3 or button 4 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a third letter,
By using Button 5 or Button 6 as a combination induction button for entering the fourth letter,
Of each button
Enter the first letter as a single stroke,
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 1 or button 2.
Enter the third letter by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4.
The fourth letter can be entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 5 or button 6.
As above, you can only input by twins, or you can type in parallel with multi-tap method.
However, even when entering the multi-tap method and twins in parallel,
In the buttons 4, 5, and 6 assigned to Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ), it is recommended that only letters with the second sequence number be entered as twin.
This is to allow the vowels to be entered as they are.
In addition
As shown in the table below, <Figure 55>.
4 buttons
The vowel assigns Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ),
The consonant is like LG EZ.
You can also enter the assignment as shown in the table below.
Vowel input speed is the same as the conventional Cheonjiin,
Consonant input speed is about 1.5 times that of conventional LG EZ method.
The first letter of button 1 is cloth (ㅣ)
The second letter of button 1 adds stroke
The third letter of button 1 is? ego
The first letter of button 2 is paper (.)
The second letter of button 2 is double consonant function,
The third letter of button 2 is a
The first letter of button 3 is b
The second letter of button 3 is ㄹ
The third letter of button 3 is ㅁ
The first letter of button 4 is in (ㅡ)
The second letter of button 4 is ㅅ
The third letter of button 4 is ㅇ.
Use Button 1 or Button 2 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter a second letter,
By using Button 3 or Button 4 as a combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter,
Of each button
Enter the first letter as a single stroke,
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 1 or button 2.
The third letter can be entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing button 3 or button 4.
The use of Cheonjiin, a vowel, is the same as the traditional Cheonjiin.
In consonants
In the conventional LG EZ method, all of the ㄱ ㄴ ㄹ ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ could be entered as a single stroke.
Now, only b can be entered as dan, a a d ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ as a twin only,
(This is to enter the collection as it is in the conventional way.)
In the consonant, stroke addition function
Previously, the buttons * and # were put as dedicated buttons.
Now, the stroke addition function, which is a consonant function, is inputted as twins (= function) like a letter.
If you want to enter
You can make a stroke by adding stroke to ㅅ, and create stroke by adding stroke to. It is as A or B below to display the button number. (It's up to the rules, but I recommend B.)
A. Enter 1 + 4, 2 + 1, 2 + 1
ㅅ ㅈ
B. Change it to 1 + 4, 2 + 1 + 1 and enter it.
ㅅ ㅈ
A method first
Since this is the second letter of button 4,
Press and hold button 1 to enter the second letter, press button 4 to display ㅅ on the screen,
Since the stroke add function is the second letter of button 1,
While pressing and holding down the button 2 that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 1 to activate the stroke addition function, make ㅅ
Since the stroke add function is the second letter of button 1,
Press and hold button 2 to enter the second letter, and press button 1 to perform stroke addition function to make.
To explain the B method
Since this is the second letter of button 4,
Press and hold button 1 to enter the second letter, press button 4 to display ㅅ on the screen,
Since the stroke add function is the second letter of button 1,
Press and hold button 2 to enter the second letter, and press button 1 twice to activate the stroke addition function twice, making ㅅ and.
,
If you want to enter ㅉ
A. Change it to 1 + 4, 2 + 1, 1 + 2 and enter it.
ㅅ ㅈ ㅉ
B. Enter 1 + 4, 1 + 2 + 2.
ㅅ ㅈ ㅉ
A way to explain
Since this is the second letter of button 4,
Press and hold button 1 to enter the second letter, press button 4 to display ㅅ on the screen,
This is the second letter of button 1, so
While pressing and holding down the button 2 that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 1 to activate the stroke addition function, make ㅅ
Since the consonant function is the second letter of button 2,
Press and hold the button 1 to enter the second letter, and press the button 2 to perform the stroke addition function to make the letter c.
To explain the B method
Since this is the second letter of button 4,
Press and hold button 1 to enter the second letter, press button 4 to display ㅅ on the screen,
As shown in Figure 28, in the conventional LG EZ system, ㅉ is the second consonant of button 7 to which ㅅ is assigned.
Since the consonant function is the second letter of button 2 in <Figure 55>,
Press and hold button 1 to enter the second letter, and press button 2 twice to activate the double consonant function twice.
(This should be done with conventional methods in mind.)
If you use either A method or B method,
The basic character input speed of ㄱ ㄹ ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ excluding ㄴ requires twice as many strokes as the conventional LG EZ method.
When you add stroke or double consonant function, you need 2 strokes, so you need double strokes.
When you input ㅆ or ㅉ, the B method increases only one stroke more than the number of strokes when you enter the first double consonant or the first stroke when entering the second double consonant or the second stroke. No difference from
Since there are 4 buttons and there are very few wires,
It is calculated that the consonant input speed will be about 1.5 times that of the conventional LG EZ method.
Vowel input speed is the same as Samsung Cheonjiin.
So, in the end, the consonants and vowels are calculated to be only 1.2 ~ 1.3 times that of the combined EZ method.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
T9 Details
Let's look at what the T9 method is, how the twins work in parallel with the T9 mode, and how the T9 input method works.
The T9 method is
Application identification numbers 88-90 are defined as terms below.
T9, etc .: Present the user with one or more words that can be formed by the combination of spellings assigned to the pressed buttons even if the spelling is entered in an undefined state using the word DB, and the user selects a desired word from among them. By speaking through the conventional way to say.
For example, in the case of entering letters, if one letter is assigned to one button even though several letters are assigned, the spelling can be made by inputting the spelling. When the device presents the user with one or more possible words, the user selects a word having the spelling desired by the user. Samsung's T9 mode, Motorola's iTAP mode, and Nokia's PREDICTIVE TEXT INPUT mode are all different. For example, in the case of the T9 method, if you press the button '4663', `GHI` is assigned to` 4`, `MNO` is assigned to` 6`, and `DEF` is assigned to` 3`. The device searches the dictionary database and displays `GONE`,` HOME`, `HOOD`,` HOOF`, `HONE`, and` GOOF` in order of frequency of use. This is the format.
(The PREDICTION method of Japanese input method is also a form of 'T9, etc.'. It is a general multi-tap method, which inputs only the definite letters, not the candidate letters, and presents the word including the definite letters entered so far. Some of the matters related to `T9` may be applied to the PREDICTION method.)
The disadvantages of the T9 method are as follows.
If the word is not in the DB, change to the multi-tap mode, enter the desired word, register it in the DB, return to the T9 mode, and enter other words in the T9 method.
so
The lexical dictionary DB configuration must be configured in the system (the DB price is increased because it requires more DB memory than twins. The twin database is not required.)
Increasing use of new vocabulary and abbreviations has the disadvantage of continuously registering new items in the vocabulary dictionary. In particular, it is practically impossible to register in advance all vocabulary required in an information and communication environment such as a person's name, an Internet address, and a homepage address. In addition, if the vocabulary is not actually registered in advance, the multi-tap method must be used inevitably. Therefore, the rule of one key per character has a limitation, and there are limitations on the number of characters combined and the number of characters combined. Another disadvantage is that the load on the system, such as dictionary search, is high.
(The price goes up because you have to use a higher-performance chip than you do with twins. You don't need a chip to do this with twins.)
In addition, since Korean and Japanese do not have a fixed fixed part of the mother part and vary in the rear part in various forms, there is a problem in that the number of many cases cannot be accommodated, so that the mother language cannot be adapted to such a mother language.
(English also seems to have problems using T9 because of ~ ed in the past, current ~ ing, and plural ~ s, but I don't know how.
Anyway, even though the T9 system is embedded in a mobile phone with a small keypad, it is inconvenient to input text. Until now, people who use a lot of text input outside of Korea have purchased QWERTY keyboards.)
And when a lot of candidate words are presented, it is quite cumbersome to have many strokes to select by moving the cursor several times to the desired word.
And the more characters are assigned per button, the more likely candidate words are to increase.
(So, in the form where 5 characters per button are assigned like Japanese, rather than 3 (or 4) characters per button like English, use the PREDICTION method, which is a variation of T9, which inputs only definite characters.
Therefore, many patent applications for the text input method have criticized the T9 method as described above.
The advantages of applying twins in T9 mode are as follows.
In T9 mode, you can enter all phonemes in two strokes.
The definitive method is to enter the phonemes in any order including the first letter as twins.
Enter the first letter by pressing the combination induction button that allows you to enter the first letter, and then press the letter button to which the target letter is assigned.
The second letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing the combination induction button for inputting the second letter.
The third letter is entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing the combination induction button for entering the third letter.
The fourth letter can be entered by pressing the letter button to which the target letter is assigned while pressing the combination induction button for entering the fourth letter.
That is, a single input is a candidate character input (that is, a conventional T9 method can be input as it is).
What is entered as twins is entered as definite characters (ie twins can be combined without changing the character mode).
therefore .
-Words that are not in the DB can be entered in 2 strokes in T9 mode without any change to the multi-tap mode.
-Even if only some spelling is entered and inputted, the number of candidate words suggested by the device will be drastically reduced so that the user can enter the words quickly.
When entering a search word, even if there is only one definite character, the candidate word can be reduced significantly. Of course, the more definite characters you have in your search term, the fewer candidate words you have.
In addition
If you use twins, the special characters * or? It is easy to type in, so you can search for words and phone numbers using any letter (* or?) Like on your computer.
(From a computer query
* Means any number of alphabets,
? The meaning of one means alphabet.
However, in the contents of the application below
In the application,% is used to mean * of any letter on the computer.
Any letter on the computer? Not used in the application, meaning
In the application, * is used as a candidate for all the letters assigned to a button.
Be confused with the general idea, so be careful when reviewing that part of the application.)
In T9 mode, the special characters and emoticons on each button
It is recommended not to recognize a single character entered as a single stroke and to input only as a twin.
In the conventional T9 mode, there are various advantages of using twins in parallel. Details are described in application identification numbers 406-473. It looks like this:
If the spelling mode of the present invention is applied to a letter writing mode such as T9, the spelling of some or all of the spellings is determined, and thus the number of candidate words presented by the device is reduced, so that the user can quickly enter a word.
For example, in the case of the T9 method, when the user wants to input the HOOD, conventionally, when the user presses the button '4663', `GHI` is assigned to` 4`, `MNO` is assigned to` 6`, and ` Since `DEF` is assigned to 3`, the combinations are searched by the device in the dictionary database, and` GONE`, `HOME`,` HOOD`, `HOOF`,` HONE`, and `GOOF` are installed in order of frequency of use. If the user suggests that the user moves the cursor to `HOOD` and selects the` D` of `HOOD` by applying the method of the present invention, the device displays only one word` HOOD` because the device presents only one word `HOOD`. You don't need to move it, just select it. This is because, while using the conventional T9 method, it is convenient to confirm the spelling a few times in experience. For example, the less frequently used alphabets are, the smaller the number of candidates will be.
For example, a method of confirming spelling by the method of the present invention designates 'button 1' or 'button 3' as a combination induction button for writing the first letter assigned to the next button, and `button 4`. Alternatively, specify `button 6` as the combination induction button that causes the second letter to be assigned to the next button, and` button 7` or `button 9` to write the third letter assigned to the next button. If you do not want to set the spelling to `D` from above, simply press` Button3` alone.If you want to confirm the spelling to `D`, hold down the` Button1` and press the `button. Press 3`.
In addition, the number of candidate words can be reduced by confirming some spellings. As many spelling letters as needed to complete a word (the spelling is not confirmed, that is, a few letters assigned to the pressed button) or the definite letters (spellings A word that the device will display even if you enter only a portion of the word without typing it or the unknown character (there is no predictable spelling; the computer usually searches for words using `*` or `?`). There won't be a lot of them, and it will be convenient for the user to input only a part.
In the method of T9 etc., every time a letter is input, the most frequently worded word corresponding to the number of letters entered so far is displayed continuously. Therefore, only a part of the word is spelled (candidate or definite or unknown). In addition, if you want to display the candidate word of the desired word, you should give a signal that the user inputs only some spelling. (The reason for the signal that the user inputs only some spelling is that if there is no signal, This is because the device automatically considers that the same number of spellings are entered, and if there is no signal, the device automatically considers that the spelling is less than the spelling number of the desired word. Any word or phrase that includes spelling (= words If it is supposed to automatically display a sequence as a candidate word or candidate phrase, it may be necessary to signal that the number of spellings is the same, to reduce the number of candidates, or to signal both the number of spellings or the same number. The method of giving a signal informing that the number of spellings is small and the same can be arbitrarily determined by the manufacturer or the user.
For example, in the method such as T9, each time a letter is input, the word most frequently corresponding to the number of letters entered so far is displayed continuously.
If the user presses button 4 to write the word `HOOD`, the most frequent` G` in the first letter of `G, H, I` assigned to 4 is displayed first, followed by pressing button 6 first. In the combination of Dunn Button 4 (G, H, I) and Button 6 (M, N, O), the most frequent `IO` is displayed first, then press Button 6 to display Button 4 (G, H, I). ) And the most frequent combination of button 6 (M, N, O) and button 6 (M, N, O) is displayed first, followed by button 3 (G, H, In the combination of I) and button 6 (M, N, O) and button 6 (M, N, O) and button 3 (D, E, F), the most frequent `GONE` is displayed first, but the frequency of use Move the cursor to `HOOD` followed by` HOME` and `HOOF` which are displayed in the following order, in order (the frequency or the displayed characters are randomly expressed).
The number of spellings required to complete the word above (no spelling, ie, a few letters assigned to the pressed button) or definite letters (spelling confirmed) or unknown (no spelling can be predicted at all). For example, you can display a device by typing only a portion of the word, rather than typing it, using the `*` or `?` Commands.
When the user wants to use the word `HOMEPORT`, the button 4 (G, H, I), button 6 (M, N, O), button 6 (M, N, O), button 3 in the existing T9 method (D, E, F), Button 7 (P, R, S), Button 6 (M, N, O), Button 7 (P, R, S), Button 8 (T, U, V) The candidate word group including `HOMEPORT` as a candidate word is displayed, but according to the present invention, the user can combine the combination induction button + button 4 (confirm` H`), button 6 (M, N, O), Combination induction button + button 6 (confirm 'M'), button 3 (D, E, F), combination induction button + button 7 (confirmation 'P') By button 3, the four digits are almost fixed as `HOME` (of course, it is more certain if each letter of the word` HOME` is confirmed), and the device is a candidate for the user by means of the `P` which is subsequently entered. If you display `HOMEPLATE` and` HOMEPORT` as words, you can select the desired `HOMEPORT`. Expression becomes possible. Of course, it is also possible to give an unknown character signal while typing up to `P` (e.g., it may indicate another unknown character as` * `or another symbol in place of the button 3).
If you don't confirm the `P` and the user signals that only part of the word is spelled, you can't tell whether the button 7 is` P`, `R`, or` S` even if `HOME` is confirmed. A large number of all words containing `,` R`, `S` are candidate words, ie
HOMEPLATE, HOMEPORT, HOMER, HOMERANGE, HOMERIC, HOMERULE, HOMERUN, HOMESCHOOLING, HOMESCREEN, HOMESECRETARY, HOMESELLING, HOMESICK, HOMESIGAL, HOMESITE, HOMESPUN, HOMESTAND, HOMESTAY, HOMESTEAD, HOMESTEADER, HOMESTEADING, HOMESTRETCH In the displayed state, the user must select a desired word.
The examples so far are not necessarily realized as such, but the frequency, the candidate words to be displayed, and the like are arbitrarily set to explain the concept.
In the conventional T9 method, `HOME` is not confirmed, so there are many more candidate words. When there are a large number of candidate words, when the desired word is in alphabetical or frequency order, a situation in which a large number of cursor movement buttons must be pressed is opened.
And even though the input method mode such as T9 does not use the input method such as T9, it will not take much time to enter all the spellings of the word. Inputting spelling by combining two buttons uses two hands anyway, so one hand takes only one button, so if you are skilled, you can input almost one button at the same speed as a single stroke, and spelling input method such as T9. Since the act of moving the cursor to the desired word among the displayed candidate words which is almost essential in the present invention is unnecessary and only needs to be selected as it is, the time taken to input the desired word may be faster as compared with the conventional T9.
It can also be programmed to omit the body of action to be selected once all spelling has been confirmed and entered.
For example, when the word 'HOMEPORT' is input while comprehensively explaining the method of the present invention applied in parallel with the conventional method in T9, etc., each word is to be entered in a letter input mode such as T9. Spelling can be input by combining various methods such as the existing method, the method according to the present invention, or the method similar to the present invention without changing the mode. Methods characterized by this also claim to be novel in the present invention. (In conventional T9, if the word you want to enter does not exist in the DB, it is inconvenient to switch to multi-tap mode and completely enter the desired word and then return to T9 mode. In particular, URL, proper noun, e-mail address, and various This is the case when entering human names, foreign words, technical words, etc.)
The various methods of entering letters so that the candidate words mentioned above are displayed are the combination of the methods 1 and 2 below.
1.A type of letter: `ga` (definite letter) or` me` (candidate letter) or `da` (unknown letter)
2. The number of spells to be entered as 'la' (the total number of spellings) or 'do' (the number of spellings required) to form a complete word.
The number of possible combinations of 1 and 2 is ga + la, ga + ma, me + la, me + ma, da + la, da + ma, ga + na + la, ga + na + ma, me + da + Da, Da + Da, Da + Da + Da, Da + Da + Da, Da + Da + Da + Da, Da + Da + Da + Da Here are just a few examples of searching and searching.
Here are just a few examples of how to write a text message. (Let's also enter HOMEPORT. For example, English alphabet is a definite letter, number is a candidate letter, `*` is an unknown letter.)
First, the input method is a combination of `na` and` la`, which is a conventional T9 method.
(Enter `46637678` so that candidate words are displayed.
Button 4 (G, H, I), Button 6 (M, N, O), Button 6 (M, N, O), Button 3 (D, E, F), Button 7 (P, R, S) Button 6 (M, N, O), Button 7 (P, R, S), Button 8 (T, U, V). This detailed description will be omitted below.)
Secondly, a combination of `me` and` horse`
(Enter 46637 so that candidate words can be displayed and signal that the spelling count is insufficient. As mentioned above, the case and method of giving the spelling number can be determined by the manufacturer or user. In a DB with the same few records, there are not many candidates with the spelling entered, so it is better to give a signal when the spelling number is the same, but only when the spelling number is the same.
Thirdly, a combination of `ga` and` horse`
(Enter and type in `HOMEP` so that candidate words can be displayed and signal that the spelling count is insufficient.)
Fourth, a combination of `ga` and` la`
(Because all the spellings are entered with `HOMEPORT`, only one candidate word exists and there is no need to select it.)
Fifth, enter the combination of 'a', 'me', 'da' and 'ra'
(Enter the desired word and spelling number with `H6 * EP67T` so that candidate words can be displayed.)
Sixth, a combination of `ga` and` me`, `da` and` ma`
(Entering 'H6 * EP6' to display candidate words is insufficient, or signaling that the spelling count is insufficient after typing '* EP6')
Here, one more term in the definition of terminology is that one unknown character (described below as `%`) may specify that two or more consecutive characters may be substituted. We also propose a method of inputting a search word by dividing the part with a separator.
Why this method is useful
First, in English, when you can't know not only spelling by sound but also the number of spelling, you can enter the part where you know exactly spelling as a search word.
Second, in the case of English, the front part (= mainly root) is the same and tends to be differentiated into words such as parts of speech due to the spelling change at the end. In this case, as an application of the first method, the spelling may be input by combining the `ga` to` ma` method by separating the non-last part and the last part of the word. Since one unknown letter may replace two or more consecutive letters, the unknown letter is used as a separator that separates the last part from the last part of the desired word. In other words, before inputting the last part, a signal such as a special symbol (eg,%) indicating that the last part is inputted later may be inputted.
Words containing `` SENS '' include SENSE, SENSEFUL, SENSELESS, SENSELESSLY, SENSIBILITY, SENSIBLY, SENSITIVE, SENSITIVITY, SENSITIZE, SENSOR, SENSORIAL, SENSORY, SENSUAL, SENSSUALITY, SENSUALLY, SENSUOUS, SENSULIST, SENSLIIST, etc. there is
Observations show that candidate words can also be reduced by typing the root word `SENS` and the end of a word. This is because words such as English have many variations due to spelling at the end.
Let's look at a few examples of how to enter a search term when `SENSUALIST` is the desired word (in the example below):
As an example of a search term by the first method
1. S% N% U% LIST
2.SE% SU% * 7T
3. You can enter a search term such as NS% AL to generate candidate words that include `SENSUALIST`.
As an example of a search term by the second method
1. SENS% IST
2. 7367% 478
3.S3 * 7% * 7T
4.S3 * 7% 7T
5. S3 * 7% T
6.S3 * 7% 8
7. You can also enter 3 * 7% 8, etc. to generate candidate words that contain `SENSUALIST`.
In addition, as described above, in applying the method of inputting spelling by combining the words `` a '' from `` a '', a significantly smaller number of records than a language dictionary, such as a phone book of a mobile phone, It is very easy to understand if you think that it is made up of phrases). The low number of records is also useful because the number of candidate records is low when retrieving multi-word records. This method is useful when there are many letter buttons and few records, but only a few records. Therefore, this method is also useful for devices with many buttons, such as a computer keyboard, and can be applied to improvement methods such as T9. Here's how to apply it.
1.How to input letters when there is only one spelling per letter (or cursor) like English
Here are just a few examples of `` VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON MOZART '', where the English alphabet is a definite letter, the number is a candidate letter, and the `*` is an unknown letter. A slash (/) is used to indicate a space that is actually a space.The separator between characters is comma (,) or `#` .In practice, unknown characters or actual numbers or spaces or separators between characters Can be replaced by another symbol)
Firstly, a combination of `I` and` La`
For example, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be selected so that the candidate records can be displayed. Type '661278' to search, or type '2623387 866' to search for the word AMADEUS VON.)
Secondly, a combination of `me` and` horse`
E.g
Enter only the first letter of each word (enter `8 2 8 6` to signal that there are words with insufficient spelling)
Or type more than the first letter of each word. (Enter '86 26 8 661 'to signal that there are words with insufficient spelling.
Or enter only a part of the word you want. Here you can type '387' to search for EUS in AMADEUS and signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling.)
Thirdly, a combination of `ga` and` horse`
E.g
Enter only the first letter of each word (enter `V A V M` to signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling)
Or enter more than the first letter of each word (enter `VO AM V MOZ` and signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling).
Or, select one or more words for searching among the words of the record to be selected so that the candidate records can be displayed, and enter a definite letter with insufficient spelling for the selected word ('MOZ' to search only with the word MOZART). Only after input signals a word that lacks a spelling count.
Fourth, a combination of `ga` and` la`
For example, one or more words for search are selected from among the words of the record to be selected so that the candidate records can be displayed. Type MOZART to search or type AMADEUS VON to search for the word AMADEUS VON.)
Fifth, enter the combination of 'a', 'me', 'da' and 'ra'
For example, one or more words for search are selected from among words of a record to be finally selected so that the candidate records can be displayed, and the definite letters, candidate letters, or unknown letters are input according to the complete spelling number. (Type `M6 * 2 * T` to search for the word MOZART or` A6 * 3E8S V * 6` to search for the word `AMADEUS VON`.)
Sixth, a combination of `ga` and` me`, `da` and` ma`
For example, in the selected words, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected so that the candidate records can be displayed. (Enter `M6 * 2` to search for the word MOZART or` A6 * 3E V * `to search for the word` AMADEUS VON` and signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling. Enter `* 8S V *` to search for the word EUS VON` and signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling count)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Chinese Input Details
And the application identification number 474 ~ 517 describes in detail how to easily enter the Chinese characters to combine the twins when entering the combination of the conventional Pinyin and T9 method. In the application, the previous section, 'T9 Detailed Description', is followed.
(In the following application, * is used as a candidate to indicate all the letters assigned to a button.
Be confused with the general idea, so be careful when reviewing that part of the application.)
`2. How to input letters when there is a unique sound for each letter, such as Korean, Chinese, or Japanese, and expresses it with a combination of one or more spellings. Is included in the contents of a field of a record, and its own character is automatically interpreted as a pinyin, similar to the English alphabet, etc. Similar to the example in `3` after a few decades,` 中華民國 大 統領 ` This means that it is possible to assume that the data in the DB is searched as `JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG` automatically when searching for Pinyin symbols similar to the English alphabet.)
(The only difference between English and English is that you input one letter, but when you enter multiple spellings, you can display the letter unit as a separator. As a delimiter between letters that can be less than the number of spelling of the comma (in Korean, you can not enter the delimiter between letters, because you can see that the letters have changed because you just entered the initial consonant) In the above two cases, the delimiter between letters is adopted, but the delimiter between the letters in the above two cases can be any symbol (including no separator or a space). However, if the separator between letters is one space, the separator between words can be two spaces. And may also to other symbols.)
As an example of looking for 'Kim Joon-Hyung Hanja 2 Teacher' and '中華民國 大 統領', we will use only the third and sixth examples of English above. (In this case, Hangul and alphabet are definite letters, numbers are candidate letters, and `*` are unknown letters. For example, a number is actually represented by a slash (/) before or after the number. Spaces are actually expressed as spaces, and separators between letters are represented by commas (,) or `#`. In application, unknown characters or actual numbers or spaces or separators between letters may be replaced by other symbols.)
Thirdly, a combination of `ga` and` horse`
E.g
Enter only the first letter of each word
(Enter 'ㄱ ㅎ ㅅ `to signal that there is a word that lacks spelling. Enter` J D` to signal that there is a word that lacks spelling.)
Or enter the first letter or more of each word.
(`ㄱ ㅎㅎㅎ ㅅㅅ` or `ㄱ, ㅈ, ㅎ ㅎ, ㅈ ㅅ, ㅅ` after typing it will signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling.
After inputting `JHMG DTL`,` J, H, M, G D, T, L` or `J, H D, T, L`, it signals that there are words with insufficient spelling.)
If it's the opposite
The delimiter between letters after consecutive spellings
If there is a comma, it is a signal that a sequence of spellings is sequentially entered from an arbitrary position of an arbitrary character unit due to pinyinization of a unique character of a desired word.
Without a comma, logic can be used (in the same way as Korean) to signal that only the first alphabet of the alphabet corresponding to each unique character is input due to pinyinization of the unique character of the desired word.
E.g
`JHMG,` or `JH,` has a comma at the end, so each alphabet is regarded as the alphabetical order of the pinyin of Chinese characters, so `JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG` can be searched. can not do. You can search for `JUN,` or `JUN, H` or` JUN, H, MIN` by placing a comma after the alphabet after any character at any position.
Since `JHMG` or` JH` do not have a comma at the end, each alphabet is regarded as a sequence of characters from any position of any character unit in the Pinyin Chinese character, and thus `JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG '. `Searchable, even below)
Or, select one or more words for searching among the words of the record to be selected so that the candidate records can be displayed and input the definite letters with insufficient spelling for the selected words.
(In order to search only with the words `Kim Joon-Hyung`, only the words` ㄱㅈ `or` ㄱㅈㅎ `are input and signal that there is a word that lacks the spelling count.
To search only with the words `DE, TONG, LIONG`, only the words` D, T` or `D, T, L` or` DTL` will signal that there are words with insufficient spelling count after input)
Or, if you try to search for `Jun` but only want to enter a part of` 주 `, you can enter` ㄱ주 ㅎ `or` ㄱ, 주, ㅎ `and signal that there is a word that lacks spelling. After typing the word `` or `ㄱ주 ㅎ` or `ㄱ, 주, ㅎ`, signal that a word lacks spelling.
Or, if you want to search for `TONG` but you want to type only part of` TO`, you can type `D, TO, L` to signal that there are words with insufficient spelling.
If `Jun` should not be searched for` Ju`, use `ʻ 주주` or `ㄱ, 주 #` or `ㄱ주 using a shop (#) as a delimiter, which is the same as the spelling number of` 주 `. After typing # ㅎ `or` ㄱ, 주 # ㅎ `or` ㄱ, ㅈ * # ㅎ `, you signal that there are words that lack spelling because of` ㄱ `or` ㅎ `. In this case, you cannot search for 'Jun', and as a result, you cannot search for 'Kim Joon-Hyung Hanja 2 Teacher'.
If `TO` should not be searched because of` TO`, enter `D, TO # L` with a shop (#) as a delimiter, which is the same as the number of spells of` TO`, and enter `D`. Or a word that lacks spelling because of `L`. In this case, you cannot search for `TONG`, and as a result,` JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG`.
Sixth, a combination of `ga` and` me`, `da` and` ma`
For example, or for selecting words, select one or more words for search among the words of the record that you want to make final selection so that the candidate records can be displayed. do. (You can type `ㅅ * 5` or` 선, * ㅐ, 5` or `선, ㅅ * ㅇ # 5` to search for the word` teacher`, and then signal that there is a word that lacks spelling.
Or, type `* 8 * ㅈ 2 /` (`/` means that `2` is actually a number rather than a candidate letter) to search for the word` Kim Joon-Hyung Hanja2`, and then signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling. Gives.)
`D, *, 5` or` DE, T * N, 5` or `DE, TO * 4 # 5` or` * E, TO * G #, L to search by the words `DE, TONG, LIONG` Typing * 6 gives a signal that a word lacks spelling.)
3. From the beginning, one or more delimiters can be applied in the middle of a word to be used when entering and searching. It can be applied to a language similar to English, but the advantage of using is small and if there is a unique sound for each unique letter such as Chinese, when the sound is input as Pinyin similar to the English alphabet, the user's own character unit or user How to enter a search term based on the format you entered when you searched after applying separators where you want
For example, I don't know how to read '中華民國 大 統領' in Chinese, but I'm reading as 'President of the Republic of China', so when a user saves to a database, I try to enter it in the Pinyin format of 'JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG' instead of storing it in Chinese. Let's say you typed 'JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG` using a comma, a delimiter between letters. The Republic of China in the Republic of China entered without a separator.
There are also several ways to enter a search word to display 'JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG' as a candidate for selection, but only the third and sixth examples of English above are examples below. For example, the alphabet is a definite letter, the number is a candidate letter, and `*` is an unknown letter. For example, a number is represented by a slash (/) before or after the number. Delimiters between letters are represented by a comma (,) or `#` .In practice, unknown characters or actual numbers or spaces or separators between letters may be replaced by other symbols.)
Thirdly, a combination of `ga` and` horse`
E.g
Enter only the first letter of each word (enter `J D` to signal that a word lacks spelling)
Or, enter more than the first letter of each word. (Enter 'J, H, M D, T, L` and signal that there is a word with insufficient spelling.)
Or, select one or more words for searching among the words of the record to be selected so that the candidate records can be displayed and input the definite letters with insufficient spelling for the selected words.
(To search only with the words `JUNG, HWA, MINGUK`
Only `J, H` or` J, H, M` will signal that there are words with insufficient spelling after typing.
Or if you want to search for MINGUK, but only want to enter a part with MING, type J, H, MING, and then signal that there are words with insufficient spelling or type H, MING or HW, MING. Later it signals a word that lacks spelling.
If `MINGUK` should not be searched due to` MING`, use `J, H, MING #` or `JUN, H, After typing MING #, a word that lacks spelling signals.
Even in this case, it is impossible to search `MINGUK`, and as a result,` JUNG, HWA, MINGUK DE, TONG, LIONG` cannot be searched.
Sixth, a combination of `ga` and` me`, `da` and` ma`
For example, in the selected words, one or more search words are selected from among the words of the record to be finally selected so that the candidate records can be displayed.
(`J, *, 6` or` JUN, H * A, 6` or `JUNG, ** A # 6` or` JUNG, A, 6`, etc. to search by the words `JUNG, HWA, MINGUK` And then signals that you have a word that lacks spelling.)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*&#detailed description
The traditional `* &# method`
When no characters are assigned to button * and button #
Use the button * as a shift button to enter the second letter assigned to each button,
The button # is used as a shift button for inputting the third letter assigned to each button.
(or
Use the button * as a shift button to enter the first letter assigned to each button,
You can also use Button # as a shift button to enter the third letter assigned to each button.
In the following, button * or button #
It will be explained based on the case of acting as a shift button to input the second or third character.
Think of it the same way if you act as a shift button that allows you to enter the first or third character.)
In other words
If you press a letter button after turning the button * on (or off), the second letter assigned to the letter button is entered.
If you press the letter button after turning button # on (or off), the third letter assigned to the letter button is entered.
(You can also follow Button * or Button # to a character button.)
Like in the LG EZ
Use the button * as a stroke add button,
I used Button # as a consonant button.
(So the LG EZ method is almost identical to the `&# method` below.
Motorola's method doesn't have a character conversion function, and only button # is used as a button for adding strokes, which causes about half of LG EZ or `&# method 'problems.)
And, in the previous explanation, I only criticized the `* &# method`, but if the gear prefers the` * &# method`, the twins can be parallel to the `* &# method`. (I.e. multi-tap method, `* &# method`, twins can be parallel without changing the character mode, but not recommended.)
To explain in more detail,
In LG EZ, if you add the Stroke button (button *) function and the double consonant button (button #) function, you can use the '* &# method' with twins.
Like using buttons * and ## as combination-induced buttons that allow the sixth letter to be entered, as shown in <Figure 07> or <Figure 30>, or as the second consonant button as shown in Figure 31,
If other buttons are not turned on until button * or button # is turned on and then turned off, that is, if a single input is made, the button * and button # are held while the functions of the conventional '* &#method' are maintained. If you press another button, it can be used as a combination induction button with other specific functions.
If this is confusing, Button * and Button # can be left as a conventional function without the combination induction button even when the twins are in parallel.
Disadvantages of `* &# method`
Since only Button * and Button # are used as Shift Buttons,
It is not applicable to the writing system of languages with more than 4 characters for each button including the improved Hangul, Roman, Japanese, and Thai characters.
In English only,
In the standard keyboard as shown in Fig.03 where 4 buttons are assigned to Button 7 and 4 WXYZ to Button 9, there is no shift button for inputting the fourth letter.
To enter S, press Button 7 four times in succession.
When entering Z, button 9 must be pressed four times in succession.
As shown in Fig.04, even if only 3 alphabets are assigned per button, which is used only in Korea or in English, there is no shift button to input the first letter, so the first letter cannot be entered in T9 mode. Therefore, it cannot be combined with T9 mode.
In addition, when the button * or the button # is pressed in the fourth row, the bending angle of the last segment of the thumb is also increased, which is inconvenient.
Another `* &# method` drawback
Even though both hands should cover 1 to 4 rows,
To press Button * or Button #:
Most letters are assigned to lines 1 to 3,
Since two lines, which are approximations of the vertical mean positions of the character buttons, should be moved from four lines with buttons * or button #, that is, two lines,
The average longitudinal copper line is a fairly large two rows
If you use the combination induction button table as shown in <Figure 07> and the twins using the letter assignment table as shown in <Figure 03>,
In line 2, which is an approximation of the average position of the button to which the character is assigned,
The average vertical copper line up to 2 rows, which is the average position to which the combination induction button is assigned, becomes 0 rows.
Another `* &# method`
The left hand should cover all 1,2,3 rows, and the right hand should cover both 1,2,3 rows, so the horizontal line is large. However, the twins need to cover the left hand in the first row, the right hand in the third row, and the right or left hand in the second row, so there are fewer horizontal lines, and the two-hand load equalization becomes better, and the stability of holding the device Also improves.
To explain in more detail,
The conventional `* &# method` is
To use both hands alternately, the left hand must cover both rows 1,2,3 and the right hand must cover both rows 1,2,3, i.e. with two rows of average two-handed positions each.
To enter the second letter, you should always use only the button * as a combination induction button.
In order to enter the third letter, you should always use only the button # as a combination induction button.
The average horizontal copper line of one hand becomes one row
The copper wire in the transverse road was large (the copper wire increases even after returning to the average position)
(The `* &# method` means that if the average horizontal moving line for pressing the combination induction button is one column, if you want to continuously enter the second and third letters sequentially , You have to move two columns, three columns, one column to one column, and the twins only have to move one row between two and three rows to press each combination induction button. Since the rectangle is 1.5 times larger than two columns on a mobile phone keypad, the distance is three rows, which means three times the number of copper wires compared to the twins. If you use it the other way around, it's a spring with almost no copper wires, and the next time you enter it, it's also the case of a single stroke in the middle. It is known by the examples below.)
Applying twins
The left hand is in charge of the first row,
Right hand is in charge of row three,
In the situation that the second column is left hand or right hand in conformity with the situation,
In other words, the average horizontal position of both hands is 1.33 in the left hand and 2.67 in the right hand.
Combination induction button to enter the second letter or
Combination induction button to enter the third letter
There are two in total, one in each of the first and third columns, so you can select anything close to you and press the horizontal line. (When using two-handed thumb, the horizontal average position of the two-handed thumb is 1.33 rows in the left hand and 2.67 rows in the right hand, so the average copper line moves only from 1.33 to 1 row for the left hand and 2.67 to 3 rows for the right hand. The average copper wire in the furnace is 0.33 rows, which is 33% of the horizontal copper wire.
This paragraph also applies to `neighbor key input method`.
Mentioned above in `* &# how`
Let's explain in more detail that even if the average horizontal line for pressing the combination induction button is one row, you want to continue entering the second and third letters in succession,
E.g,
A word or character sequence that includes the case where the second letter of the first column button and the third letter of the third column button are continuous,
HO ME, HY DRO, HOQY
A word or character sequence that includes the case where the second letter of the first column button and the third letter of the second column button are continuous,
H A L T, H A L L, CHLQV
A word or character sequence that includes the case where the second letter of the second row button and the third letter of the third row button is continuous,
Q UO TE, G UY , BFKOUY
For words or character sequences that include the case where the second and third letters of the first row of buttons are continuous,
HR , H A R D, IQ , HRIQ
A word or character sequence that includes the case where the second and third letters of a second-column button is continuous,
L A B , LUL L, BLUCKV
For words or character sequences that include a case where the second and third letters of the three-column button are continuous,
F A X, OX EN, FNYEOX
Words that include the case where the second and third letters of the same button are consecutive,
B A C on button 2, EF FECT on button 3, HI GH on button 4,
SPRIN KL E on button 5, M ONO on button 6, T UV ALU on button 8,
SE XY on button 9
If you type in these things, you can clearly see that there is a big difference between the twins and the * &# method.
Especially
1 column
The second letter of button 4
Q, the second letter of button 7
In three rows
The third letter of button 3
O, the third letter of button 6
Y, the third letter of button 9
When the combination of is contained in the word consecutively, both hands are biased in the first column, then move to all the three columns, and the movement is very large.
(E.g,
When entering HO of HOME,
This is the case when entering HYDRO's HY.
If you enter the second letter of the first row of three rows of buttons and the third letter of the third row of three rows of buttons, the interference between fingers increases.)
For example, HO of HOME
To enter as twins
6 + 4, 7 + 6 copper wire is very small,
R L L R
HO
To type in `* &# method`
You should enter *, 4, #, 6
H O
*, When operating 4, both hands are in one row,
When operating # and 6, both hands are in three rows. And the movement of button * to button # is also large.
The same is true for the words OH , OH IO, OH M, and OH P, which contain the opposite spelling OH rather than HO.
At first glance, the slight difference in copper on the small keypad doesn't seem to affect the input speed, but the difference in the difference is whether you can enter more than one stroke.
(If you enter it as twin, you may have more than one stroke than if you input it with '* &# method.' This is because you can type faster.
With one hand
The speed of alternately pressing button 2 and button 5
The speed at which button 2 and button *
The speed with which button 2 and button # alternates
Speed to alternate Button 2 and Right Button
You can easily see if you compare
For example, if you enter NH, RY, even HE, RO (or OR).
Looking at the case of entering NH
If you type * &#,
* + 6 + 4
(Press the button 6 and the button 4 in order with the left hand while pressing the button *, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, and enter NH.)
3 inputs are performed.
(When the right hand moves in a large copper line from the third row to the first row, and the button 4 is pressed while the button * is pressed, the two hands' thumb is biased in the first row, resulting in the interference of both fingers and inferior stability of the device. Discomfort occurs.)
If you type in twins,
6 + 4, 4 + 6
(Press the button 6 with your right hand and enter N while holding down the button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter.)
With button 4 already left hand and button 6 already right hand,
While holding down the button 6, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, press the button 4 with your left hand and enter H.)
Even if you enter 4
There are much less copper wires than the * &# method, and there is no bias between both hands, so you can type much faster and more conveniently.
(The same is true for HN, not NH.)
Looking at the case of entering RY
If you type * &#,
# + 7 + 9
(Press the button 7 and the button 9 with your left hand and enter RY while holding down the button #, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter.)
3 inputs are performed.
(When the left hand moves in a large copper line from the first row to the third row, and when the button 9 is pressed while the button # is pressed, the two hands' thumb is stuck vertically while being biased in the third row, so that the interference of both fingers occurs at the maximum. , The inconvenience of holding the device to the maximum inconvenience occurs.)
If you type in twins,
9 + 7, 7 + 9
(Press the button 7 with your left hand and enter R while pressing the button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter,
With button 7 already left hand and button 9 already right hand,
Enter N by pressing button 9 with your right hand while pressing button 7, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter.)
Even if you enter 4
There are much less copper wires than the * &# method, and there is no bias between both hands, so you can type much faster and more conveniently.
(The same is true for YR, not RY.)
Looking at the case of typing HE
If you type * &#,
* + 4 + 3
Enter by pressing (press HE by pressing button 4 and button 3 in order with the left hand while pressing the button *, which is the combination induction button for entering the second letter).
(When the right hand moves in a large copper line from the first row to the third row, and the button 4 is pressed while the button * is pressed, the two hands' thumb is biased in the first row, resulting in the interference of both fingers and inferior stability of the device. Discomfort occurs.)
If you type in twins,
6 + 4 + 3
(Press the button 4 and the button 3 with your left hand and press HE while pressing the button 6, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter.)
You can also enter 3 by typing in (6 + 4 and 4 + 3 are recommended, as shown below).
6 + 4, 4 + 3
(Press the button 6 with your right hand and enter N while holding down the button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter.)
With the left hand already on button 4, with the copper wire at zero
Press and hold button 4, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the second letter, with your left hand and press button 3 to enter E.)
Even if you enter 4
There are much less copper wires than the * &# method, and there is no bias between both hands, so you can type much faster and more conveniently.
(The same is true for EH, not HE.)
Looking at the case of entering RO
If you type * &#,
# + 7 + 6
Enter by pressing the button #, which is the combination induction button for entering the third letter, with the right hand and pressing the button 7 and the button 6 with the left hand to enter RO.
(The left hand moves in a large copper line from the first row to the third row, and when the button 6 is pressed while the button # is pressed, the two hands' thumb is biased in the third row, causing the interference of both fingers and inferior stability to the device. Will occur.)
If you type in twins,
9 + 7 + 6
(Press the button 7 and the button 6 with your left hand to enter RO while pressing the button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter.)
You can also enter 3 by typing in (9 + 7, 7 + 6 is recommended as below).
9 + 7, 7 + 6
(Press the button 7 with your left hand and enter R while pressing the button 9, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter,
With the left hand already on button 7, with the copper wire at zero
Hold down button 7, the combination induction button that allows you to enter the third letter, with your left hand and press button 6 to enter O.)
Even if you enter 4
There are much less copper wires than the * &# method, and there is no bias between both hands, so you can type much faster and more conveniently.
(The same is true for OR, not RO.)
In addition, `* &# method` means that button * and button7, button # and button9, two pairs of buttons * and button9 are held vertically while holding button * and pressing button7 while holding button #. Since the two thumbs are in contact with each other and interfere with each other, writing becomes more inconvenient.
In particular, pressing button 7 with your right thumb while pressing button * with your left thumb and pressing button 9 with your left thumb while holding button # with your right thumb will intensify both thumb contact and interference.
In addition, `* &# method` is a combination-induced button that writes a button * or button # to a specific sequence of letters assigned to another button only when there is no letter in button * or button #.
(To illustrate why,
If a button has a letter assigned to it and it acts as a combination inducing button to write the second letter assigned to another button, there is no combination inducing button that causes the second letter assigned to the button * to be written.
If there is a letter assigned to button # and it acts as a combination induction button that causes the third letter to be assigned to another button, there is no combination induction button that causes the third letter assigned to button # to be written.)
By the way, most mobile phones are not equipped with the '* &#method', and almost 99% of mobile phones have one to seven special characters assigned to the button * or button #, unless you move them to other buttons. It's practically impossible to use the `* &# method`.
In addition, the '* &#' method causes the same button problem when the first letter of the same button is consecutive in parallel with the multi-tap method.In this case, four space buttons in English and a right direction in Korean There is bound to be a large copper wire that requires artificial movement of the cursor with the button.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Adjacent Key Details
The application of adjacent key input method is described in application identification number 198 ~ 219 as follows.
What is called the adjacent key input method?
The adjacent key input method has been developed that combines the up, down, left, and right buttons of the buttons directly assigned to the letters assigned to them, but this also has advantages. When combined with other letter-button buttons that contain `,` # `, they are more frequently connected together than when` * `and` # `are specified as combination-induced buttons. It is more likely to do.
In addition, due to pressing the adjacent buttons with both hands, a lot of keyboard problems occur, and when you try to press the letter button, both hands thumb should be in charge of 1,2,3 rows.
To explain the adjacent key input method,
For example, if a button has three letters assigned to it,
To use the button assigned to the desired letter, type the letter assigned to the second (= middle)
The button on the left of the button to which the desired letter is assigned becomes a combination induction button for entering the first letter assigned to the button to which the desired letter is assigned.
When the button to the right of the button to which the desired letter is assigned is designated to be a combination induction button that inputs the third letter assigned to the button to which the desired letter is assigned.
When button 4 is assigned 'G, H, I'
If you want to type `H`, just press button 4.
If you want to input `I`, enter button 5 on the right side as combination induction button and enter in combination with button 4.
If you want to input `G`, you can use the button on the left as a combination induction button, and you need to make the button 1 as a combination induction button, because there is no button on the left, Inconsistency is inevitable (there is a general rule that the left or top button should be a combination-driven button that allows you to enter the first letter).
As a result, buttons 1, 4, and 7 in column 1 have the same problem as above.
In addition, the buttons 3, 6, and 9 in the third column do not have the right button, so they have no choice but to adopt the combination of the lower button as a combination-induced button with the third letter written on it. A general rule arises that is a combination induction button that causes the third character to be entered.)
After all, when you enter the first letter assigned to a button in row 1 and the third letter assigned to a button in column 3, it is easy to be confused unless you are a master of which buttons to apply as combination induction buttons.
In addition, in the case of Button 1, there is no left button and there is no upper button, so there is no way to write the left letter (= 1st letter), so only 2 letters can be assigned to Button 1.
Therefore, when a button acts as a combination induction button, the combination induction button is selected in consideration of the spatial positional relationship with the combination induction button with the button to which the desired letter is assigned according to the number of letters from the button to which the desired character is assigned. In addition, when the same button acts as a combination induction button, the combination induction function is changed, resulting in inconsistency.
For example, button 2
Because it is on the right side of button 1, it also functions as a combination induction button that causes the third letter assigned to button 1 to be written.
Since it is on the left side of the button 3, it also functions as a combination induction button that allows the first letter assigned to the button 3 to be written. Therefore, it is necessary to check the number of letters to the assigned button to determine the combination induction button. .
And in a slide-type cell phone
If you hold down button 4 with your left thumb and try to press button 1 with your right thumb, your right thumb will be stuck on the upper slide with the liquid crystal, making it difficult to press button 1.
If you hold down button 6 with your right thumb and try to press button 3 with your left thumb, your left thumb is stuck on the upper slide with the liquid crystal, making it difficult to press button 3.
In addition
Twins mainly use 1, 3 rows of buttons as a combination induction button, so there are fewer movements of the thumb, and the stability of holding the device is good.
Adjacent key input method requires the use of the second row of buttons as a combination induction button when the third letter of the first row of buttons and the first letter of the third row of buttons are used. .
In addition
`Neighbor Key Input Method`
Is only applicable when there are 3 letters per button
In the standard keyboard as shown in Figure 03, which has 4 PQRS and 4 WXYZ buttons, there is no shift button for inputting the fourth letter.
(There is no shift button for inputting the fourth letter in the standard keyboard as shown in Fig.03 where 4 buttons are assigned to Button 7 and 4 WXYZ to Button 9,
To enter S, press Button 7 four times in succession.
When entering Z, button 9 must be pressed four times in a row)
As shown in Fig.04, even if only three letters are assigned to each button, which is not used in Korea or only, there is no shift button for inputting the second letter, so the second letter cannot be entered decisively in T9 mode. It cannot be combined with T9 mode.
In addition, the left hand should cover both rows 1,2,3, and the right hand should cover both rows 1,2,3, so the copper line is large.
However, twins need to cover the left hand and the third hand to cover the right hand, and the second column to cover the right or left hand depending on the situation, resulting in fewer copper wires, better balance of both hands, and improved stability of holding the device. .
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
2-TOUCH Details
With 2-TOUCH method,
It seems to have been widely applied in the early mobile phones of the 1980s.
(English and Korean also seem to have been entered in 2-TOUCH.),
When the button was pressed, all the letters assigned to the button appeared on the display screen, where the phoneme was entered by pressing a number in the order of the desired letters.
E.g,
If you want to enter C when ABC is assigned to button 2,
When you press button 2, the ABC assigned to button 2
No. 1 is A, No. 2 is B, No. 3 is C on the display screen, and C is entered when button 3 is pressed.
The letters assigned to the display screen are omitted, and the user recognizes the order indicated on the buttons and selects the desired letter by pressing the number of the order.
The 2-TOUCH method allows you to enter up to 12 characters per button in two strokes.
The big drawback is that the first letter also needs two strokes,
Since both hands are biased in one or three rows, interference between the two hands is generated, and the stability of holding the device is inferior.
In addition, since there are no advantages such as the multiple advantages of twins, such as the multi-tap method and the T9 method, it is almost eliminated from the modern character input method.
In most cases, the 2-TOUCH method was discarded and the multi-tap method was adopted.
Samsung's Japanese input method patent, which was patented in 2007, is applicable to all languages, including Japanese application number 10-2006-0023897.
It is similar to 2-TOUCH method as above.
Japanese keyboard has 5 characters per button.
Assuming ABCDE is assigned to button 2,
When button 2 is pressed, ABCDE assigned to button 2 appears on the display screen with the cursor at C.
If you press the OK button, C will be entered.
Press the left button once to enter B,
If you press the left direction button twice or press and hold A,
Press the right button once to enter D,
Press the right arrow button twice or press and hold E for input.
(I think it's better to press twice, as you can do about 3 double clicks for the time required to make a long press.)
The disadvantage of this method
One tarot does not allow you to enter letters and at least two strokes are required.
If you enter A or E, which is far from the first cursor, you will need 1 more stroke or longer (long press), which is equivalent to a total of 3 strokes or more.
Since it is necessary to operate the direction button away from the small keypad, the copper wire is too large seems to have a lot of disadvantages than the conventional 2-TOUCH method.
In addition, there are no advantages such as multiple advantages of twins, such as multi-tap or T9.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Multi-tap description
The multi-tap method
As the world's most commonly used method,
When multiple letters are assigned to the same button, they are pressed continuously until the desired letter appears.
For example, if A 2 is assigned to button 2,
Button 2
Press it once and A appears in the cursor.
Press 2 times and B appears on the cursor.
Press 3 times to see C appear in the cursor.
Even at Samsung Cheonji
Consonants are entered in the multi-tap method
Button 4 is assigned to a.
Button 4
Press it once and a appears on the cursor.
Press 2 times and ㅋ appears on the cursor.
Press 3 times to show ㄲ on the cursor.
(The more letters you assign per button, the higher the number of strokes.)
And as above
If you enter a second character or more,
The multi-tap method, when pressed several times, presses only once with one hand, so the hand you are currently using is very busy and the hand you are not using does not work.
The twins use both hands to spell every single spell, so you can type them faster than you would with the multi-tap method.
(The multi-tap method is a two-to-three-foot unilateral run and the feet change to the target point in succession of the unicycle, and the twins walk normally (or jump) to the target point with two feet.)
Even if you compare only the letters of the second order and the letters of the third order,
In the multi-tap method
You have to double click with one hand to enter the second order letter and another hand with triple click to enter the third order letter, so every time you type a letter, the working hand is very busy and the other hand is playing. ,
Twins
One hand presses the combination induction button for entering the second letter, the other hand presses the button with the desired letter, and enters the second letter.
One hand presses the combination induction button to enter the third letter, and the other hand presses the button to which the desired letter is assigned to enter the third letter.
From the standpoint of one hand, the muscle contraction interval of the thumb is more than twice as long as the multi-tap method.
In combination with the combination induction button, even if two hits, the psychological feeling of one stroke, including the many advantages of the twins are manifested.
In addition, the multi-tap method has a fatal disadvantage that occurs until the same button problem.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Twin maximum expansion (not recommended)
So far, the combination induction buttons are twins, so it is mentioned that only 6 combination induction buttons can be made per group, but it can be expanded further.
However, its effectiveness is not so good, but it may be necessary, so I will introduce it only in the form of the greatest expansion.
In English standard keyboard as shown in Figure 03, the letters are not assigned to Button 1, Button *, Button0, and Button #.
Even under the condition that the combination induction button precedes the letter button
When combining buttons that do not have letters assigned to them, it is not necessary to assign the assigned functions to twins and to combine them, and to distinguish between when the combination inducing button precedes the letter button and when it follows. It can also be specified as a combination induction button to change the function.
However, most of the aforementioned advantages of the twins disappear, such as interference between the two hands, increased copper wire, and poor stability of holding the device because they are not designated as twins. It is not recommended because it is designated as a combination induction button, which can cause a great deal of confusion.
For example, you can
In the method that makes the combination-inducing button precede the letter button,
When button 1 precedes the letter button, it acts as the first function combination induction button.
When button 1 follows the letter button, it acts as the second function combination induction button.
If the button * precedes the letter button, it acts as the third function combination inducing button.
When the button * follows the letter button, it acts as the fourth function combination induction button.
When button 0 precedes the letter button, it acts as the fifth function combination induction button.
When button 0 follows the letter button, it acts as a sixth function combination induction button.
If the button # precedes the letter button, it acts as a seventh function combination induction button,
When the button # follows the letter button, it acts as an eighth combination button.
If it precedes the button 4 and the button 6 letter button, it acts as the ninth function combination induction button,
If it precedes the button 7 and button 9 letter button, it acts as a combination button of the tenth function,
If it precedes the button 2 and the button 8 letter button, it acts as the eleventh function combination induction button,
If it precedes button 5 and button 3 letter buttons, it acts as a combination button of the 12th function.
Each button danta may be configured in such a manner as to perform the thirteenth function.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
It is recommended to allow the user to select (change) the following items on the machine.
1 Allows the user to change (select) the function of the character button as a combination induction button.
2 Allows you to change (select) the assignment of letters (especially added Korean phonemes, punctuation, symbols, and emoticons) to buttons.
(It's better if the change can be reflected in the button, such as an organic light-emitting diode button.
Since a conventional button is most often printed in paint, the change cannot be reflected in the button. )
E.g,
You can also show the assignment status based on the button number, change it,
(For example, in the mode showing the assignment status based on the button number, if button 5 is selected, the letter assignment status of all groups including the first to fifth groups of button 5 in the normal character mode is displayed and the user can change To be able.)
You can also show the assignment and change it on a letter-by-letter basis.
(E.g,
When the heart picture emoticon is already assigned to the third letter of button 5 on page 1 of the display screen, which is the second group of plain text mode,
In the mode that shows the assignment status based on each special character, if you select the heart-shaped emoticon,
The heart is marked 2153 with the information field (or next to it), and the user can change it.
When a bouquet picture emoticon is not yet assigned to plain text mode, the bouquet picture emoticon is displayed as 0000 in the information field (or next to it), and the user can change it. )
3 Twin exclusive mode has been newly added to allow the user to change to twin exclusive mode.
Twin-only mode means that the first letter is entered as a single stroke and the remaining letters as a combination of twins.
4 It is possible to change (select) the character input method for each group of the first to fifth group characters.
5 Allow a portion of the display to choose whether or not to show characters, including special characters and glyphs.
6. Allows you to change (select) how many new characters (especially in Hangul input) can be entered with a multi-tap, or not, or even with a multi-tap.
7 Auto Cursor time setting Allows you to change (select) the time.
8 Others I've mentioned so far
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
The reason why it was difficult to input characters in English on Korean small keypad
(If you apply twins, you can enter Greek and Roman characters including English faster than Korean.)
26 letters for English alphabet and 40 letters for Korean alphabet
On the surface, English input should be much easier, but not.
The main reason is that the same button problem occurs more frequently in English than in Korean in multi-tap mode.
Hangul is the first consonant (consonant), followed by the neutral (vowel), and may or may not have a final consonant (consonant).
So if you assign a button and a vowel only button assigned to consonants on the small keypad,
Since the last letter (consonant) and the first letter (consonant) of the first letter are assigned to the same button, the same button problem does not occur very much in the multi-tap method.
So, while using a method that included a multi-tap method, it was possible to type fast in the world.
(And like LG EZ, if the consonant input is not a multi-tap method, the same button problem does not occur at all, so the usage is a little complicated.
By the way, in the case of English, the button assignment itself is not assigned separately to consonants and vowels, and even the spelling of words is not necessarily a vowel after the consonants. Abbreviations, including abbreviations such as English general words and chat terms, do not make abbreviations with consonants and vowels like Korean, but are often made only after the first letter of a word. Generate.
In the case of English,
There is no consonant that acts as a consonant `ㅇ (이응)` of Hangeul,
There is no vowel that plays the Hangul vowel `ㅡ (
The law of vowels following the consonants is further decayed,
Like Hangul, separating the consonant button and the vowel button itself becomes meaningless.
This causes more of the same button problem.
The English word itself, mentioned above,
There is no Korean consonant `ㅇ (이응)`,
Since there is no Hangul vowel `ㅡ (,)`,
Compared with Hangul,
Since English replaces one consonant (consonant `ㅇ (이응)`) and one vowel (`ㅡ)` with a space, it is rather Korean when writing letters by hand or entering letters on a QWERTY keyboard. There is an advantage in reducing the behavior to express the sound more.
However, in the small keypad, what causes such an advantage causes a disadvantage that causes the same button problem a lot.
English has a lot of pronunciations. So rather than using the vowel that plays the role of the Hangul vowel `ㅡ (()`.
The word `spring` is written as` SPRING` in English, but because there is no vowel meaning `ㅡ` in Korean, the same button problem occurs because S, P, R assigned to button 7 must be entered in succession. If there was a Korean 'ㅡ `phoneme on a button, there would be no problem with the same button, such as typing additional phonemes that function` ㅡ `, or moving the cursor to a space-only button due to the same button problem. It's possible, but moving the cursor to the space-only button is a lot of psychological pressure, because it seems like you're doing unnecessary work, and space-only buttons are on four lines with no one button assigned to it, and only one of them. The movement of the cursor with the right button, like the conventional Hangul input method, is more burdensome because the movement is bigger.)
If you want to write `` Sururu '' in English, you will omit `ㅡ` and write it as `ㅅ ㄹㄹㄹ`.
To write 'aya' in English, omit `ㅇ` and write `ㅏ ㅑ`.
To write 'without the word' in English, omit `ㅡ` and consonant `ㅇ` and write `ㄸㄴ ㄱㅁ ㅓ ㅄ ㅣ`.
(B, under ㄸ, ㅁ under ㄱ, and ㅓ under 하는데 should be written in the word program, so we only expressed it as ㄸㄴ ㄱㅁ ㅓ ㅄ.)
If you use Korean phonemes like this
It will be more convenient when writing by hand or typing on a QWERTY keyboard,
When typing on a small keypad, the same button problem occurs in Korean.
(In fact, if you introduce this method into Korean input, you may omit the most commonly used vowels, ㅏ and Choseong, ㅇ.)
If you input Korean as above,
When I try to type `ㅏ ㅑ`,
In the Sky and Curitel method, 'ㅏ ㅑ' is assigned to the button 3 and is input in the multi-tap method, so the same button problem occurs even when the vowel is input.
In Korean, as shown in <Figure 36.9>, the average number of strokes required for each phoneme is less than LG EZ.The input method of the Pantech system is multi-tap, so the same button problem occurs frequently when entering words. Therefore, there are many thumb people who prefer the LG method that does not cause the same button problem and dislike the Pantech system.
The problem with the same button is that it makes the text input work tired and increases the number of strokes and moving lines.
Hangul is the best character of the creation principle.
However, the speed of Korean input on the small keypad was faster than English because the principle of creation is not scientific and superior, but because the character's operation is used as an operation rule that causes the same button problem less on the small keypad. Even on a computer keyboard, Hangul input speed is not faster than English.
In this situation
While the same button problem that occurs in English as a twin does not occur, all phonemes can be entered as 1 to 2 strokes, and when the other advantages of twins are expressed together,
It is possible to enter English with less phonemes faster than Korean.
In more detail, English has fewer phonemes, so fewer characters are assigned per button.
In English or Korean, all letters above the second sequence can be entered as two strokes with twins, so the number of phonemes assigned to each button may not matter.However, the first letter is entered as a single stroke. Because the case is bigger. In English, you can enter 8 out of 26 phonemes (up to 12) in single, while in Korean, you can enter 10 out of 40 phonemes (up to 12) in single.
(The Greek, Roman alphabet, Cyrillic, and Arabic alphabets can be typed faster than Hangul.)
Even if there are many phonemes in Korean, the same button problem does not occur, but all phonemes can be entered within two strokes.
To explain why in more detail,
English has only 3 letters per button except for Button 7 and Button 9. Then, only the combination induction button for inputting the third letter is necessary, so the combination induction button for inputting the fourth letter is rarely used.
If you want to input all 40 Korean phonemes within 2 strokes, you need to assign additional phonemes that are not assigned to completion in the conventional methods anyway, so that there are more buttons with 4 letters than English.
If so, the combination induction button to enter the fourth letter should be used more often than English.
As mentioned earlier in <Figure 07 ~ 07.6>,
Using a combination induction button to enter the fourth letter is a bit inconvenient than using a combination induction button to enter the first to third letters.
If the combination induction button that allows the fourth letter to be entered is shown in Fig. 07 and is in the second column but is in the second column, it is more inconvenient than when the button is pressed in the first or third column.
It is not necessarily inconvenient because it is a combination induction button, and even in the conventional character input method, when inputting general numbers or characters with both hands, it is easy to press the first and third row of buttons, and the second row of button presses are the first or third row. It is a bit inconvenient than pressing a button.
When you use both hands, pressing the left hand for 1 row and the right hand for 3 rows is easier than pressing the second row. This is because the average position of both hands is 1.33 in the left hand and 2.67 in the right hand.
If there are four combination-inducing buttons on the fourth row that allow you to enter the fourth letter, as shown in Figure 07.3, the copper lines increase.
That means it's uncomfortable.
Hangul does not enter phonemes using the T9 method.
Since we rarely use the combination induction button that lets you enter the first letter,
If you assign a combination induction button that allows you to enter the fourth character as shown in Figure 07.51 in three rows, one column or three columns, you can enter it more conveniently and quickly.
And
If you enter English as twins, both the character button and the combination induction button will be in one or three lines, so you only need one or three lines.
If you apply the twins in parallel with Hangul, the characters are also assigned to Button 0, like Samsung's Cheonji, LG EZ, which sometimes requires up to four lines. (As for the Pantech-based Sky and Curitel method, characters are all assigned to four rows of buttons *, 0, #, and the Motorola method is assigned to four rows of buttons *, 0, so the line is up to four lines. Copper wires occur more often.)
When entering Korean characters, you can assign characters only in columns 1 to 3, not in parallel with the conventional method. However, since there are 4 buttons assigned to 5 letters per button, it is not very good to see.
In addition to the above, let's hear a few more reasons why English has the same button problem than Korean. (7, 8 and 9 are mentioned above.)
1 If a vowel + a single vowel in the verb,
Add one more consonant when ending the ed, the present, or the person (er).
in verbs such as stop, beg, drop, nod, stir, slur, fur, quit, plan, hem, occur, admit, defer, prefer, deter,
If you change the verb with only Stop,
Sto p ed, sto pp ing, sto pp er changes as p is added one by one, and the same character p becomes continuous, so the same button problem occurs.
Ends with 2 vowels + terminals
When creating adjectives and adverbs, we add one more consonant and add ~ er and ~ est.
Example) adjective: big-bi gg er-bi gg est
Adverb: hot-ho tt er-ho tt est
3 Occurs when creating a word derived from numerous prefixes and suffixes.
(Prefixes, suffixes occur when the base word and the attachment point,
Prefixes, spelling of the suffix itself can cause the same button problem.
Example: A word created with the prefix ir: i rr egular
Words created with the suffix ous: autono mo us
Spelling of the prefix itself: omn i ~
Spelling of the suffix itself: ~ i on
The plural noun of the noun and the third person singular of the verb are appended with s, so the same button problem occurs when entering the plural noun ending in p, q, r assigned to the same button as the s and the third person singular of the verb.
5 There are many sequences of the same letter from a to z in common words.
(Excluded forms and abbreviations such as verb changes, adjective changes, and adverb changes.)
Yes)
a sequence of a (b aa ),
continuation of b (e bb ),
a sequence of c (su cc eed),
continuation of d (a dd ),
a sequence of e (b ee ),
continuation of f (o ff ),
continuation of g (e gg ),
a sequence of h (s hh ),
a sequence of i (hawa ii ),
sequence of j (ha jj ),
continuation of k, (short for kkt)
a sequence of l (ba ll ),
continuation of m (h mm ),
a sequence of n (ma nn er),
Continuous (n oo n) of o,
continuation of p (short for ppp)
continuation of q (s qq ),
continuation of r (bi rr ),
s continuous (gla ss) of,
continuation of t (wa tt ),
sequence of u (m uu m uu ),
continuation of v, (short for vv)
continuation of w, (short for ww)
continuation of x, (short for xx)
a series of y,
continuation of z (fri zz ),
In addition, there are too many continuations of two letters among 3 (4) letters assigned to the same button, and there are quite a few words including three continuations as shown below.
Abc sequence of button 2: cab , cab in, cabb age, bac k
Continuation of def on button 3: def ace, defe r, defe at, fede ral, etc.
Ghi sequence of button 4: n igh t, l igh t, f igh t, del igh t, high etc
Button 6 mno sequence: mono , mon ster, Mon day, mon k, onm essage, etc.
Sequence of pqrs on Button 7: spr ight, spr ing, spr inkle, etc.
Continuation of tuv of button 8: tuv a, tuv alu, etc.
6. Make the pronunciation of ㅜ overlap with oo.
Ex) n oo n
7 It is not essential that vowels follow consonants.
(So the consonant and vowel keys are not separated.)
8 The first Korean `ㅇ` and the vowel `ㅡ` are used as spaces in English.
9 When creating an abbreviation, pick only the first phoneme of the word in the word.
Example) General Word: BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation)
Standard unit: AAA size battery
Chat term: bb l (be back later: I'll come back later)
10 ~ ed of the past and past injection forms of the verb is assigned to the same button (button 4).
11. There are also psychological factors that you think you can hit a lot when you hit the same button in succession.
I think it's worth it to double click the same button, but when I hit the same button three, I think there are a lot of hits.
If you input English `O` in a multi-tap method, you have to press button 6 three times, but I think there are a lot of hits.
In the case of inputting Korean phonemes by a conventional method, phonemes inputted in three or more strokes by different pressing are not considered to be so many.
E.g,
To enter ㅑ in the heavenly way ㅣ. . You have to type three, but I don't think so many.
In addition, if you want to input 에서 in Cheonjiin way, you should input 5 strokes. However, users who prefer Cheonjiin way should write it in the order of handwriting, so I think it can only be done. .
In addition, when entering 에서 in LG EZ method, press ㅗ button, ㅏ button and ㅣ button to input 3 strokes.
12 Many other cases
The three suffixes and prefixes listed above are as follows.
Prefix
ac ad: direction approach / to
ambi: two sheep
an: negative / not without
ante: before / before
ant anti: against / not
be: Verb formation / make
bene: good / good
bi di: two / two
circum: around / arround
de: down away
dis: detached exit / away
en: inside verb formation / make (transitive verb) in
extra: outside
epi: contact / on
eu: good / good
ex: out / out
for: separation break away
fore: before / before
hyper: up / over
hypo: under / under
im in: above in / on in
in im il ir: negative / not
inter: between / between
mal male: bad / bad
mono: one / one
multi: many / many
mis: bad wrong
ob oc of opp: against toward
omni: all / all
out: out beyond
over: Too much
pan: all / all
para: beside
per: through badly
pre: before / before
pro: front / forth
proto: first / first
post: after / after
re: repeat again / back again
se: separation exit / away
sub: ~ below / under
syn: same / same
trans: past / pass
un: no / not
uni: one / one
with: against back
semi: half partly
co col com con cor: together / together
contra contro counter: against
Suffix (finally determines the part of speech)
Suffixes that create verbs
ate: activate (cf) noun + ate = adjective
Nouns ending in e: th, adjectives as verbs (breathe)
en: nouns, adjectives as verbs (lengthen: lengthen), P.P forms when attached to verbs
(i) fy: to (magnify: enlarge)
ize, ise: to (modernize)
pose: The meaning of put (place, place) `compose, propose
Suffixes that make nouns
cy, ce, age, ion, tion, ety, ity, ment, th, tude, ty, y, ness, ing
ics, logy, ism, ry, ship, al, ary, ory
Suffixes that make people (also nouns)
ant, ist, ian, ard, er, or, ar, ee, ess
Suffixes that make up adjectives
able, ible, ant, ent, ary, ory, ic, ical, (i) ous, some, less, al
ful, ish, ive, ly, y, ate
Suffixes that make up adverbs
ly = Make adverbs attached to adjectives, and adjectives if attached to nouns.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Compose or play
As you can enter many letters quickly by applying twins,
You can also apply twins to products that have the ability to compose or play
You can make that function run faster.
Since one octave is composed of 12 notes, you can make 12 notes with 0 ~ 9, *, # 12 buttons, and express different octaves with different group letters input method.
(The 12 notes above represent 7 notes and 5 semitones for Doremipasolasi.)
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Shortcuts in Call Waiting Mode
Not in character mode,
Even in the normal state, call waiting mode
You can use a combination of two or more buttons as a shortcut.
In this case, it is not necessary to designate two combination induction buttons having the same function.
It doesn't have to be 12 buttons, 0-9, *, #,
It can be any button on the phone, including call buttons, direction buttons, and OK buttons.
In the conventional mobile phone, many users frequently use menus such as text message writing, phone book, camera, volume control, MP3 operation, Internet connection, and the like.
I personally used notes and voice memos frequently, but those menus were uncomfortable because they didn't have shortcuts.
To record voice memo, I had to press the Menu button, select Electronic Diary, select Voice Memo, and select Voice Memo.
now
E.g,
With 1 + 2 (press button 2 while pressing button 1), you can go directly to the screen immediately before `record voice memo`.
You can also go directly to the Voice Memo screen by pressing 1 + 3 (press button 3 while pressing button 1) and you can check the previous recording.
In addition
Subway map view directory (e.g. 9 + 0), line 1 line view (e.g. 9 + 1), line 2 line view (e.g. 9 + 2), line 3 view (e.g. 9 + 3),
Game directories (e.g. 3 + 0), bomb games (e.g. 3 + 1), go-stop games (e.g. 3 + 2),
Mobile phone music directory (e.g. 4 + 0), mobile phone play (e.g. 4 + 1), mobile phone compositions (e.g. 4 + 2),
Memo directory (ex: 5 + 0), take notes (ex: 5 + 1), view notes (ex: 5 + 2),
Current world time directory (ex: 6 + 0), US time (ex: 6 + 1), UK time (ex: 6 + 2)
If you want to be able to use your favorite shortcuts, you can use your favorite menus.
In mobile phones with a touch screen, the above functions can be clicked on the icon of the touch screen, but it is worth promoting in low and medium-priced phones without a touch screen.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
If you need a combination induction button to enter the first letter
1. When the twins are in parallel with the multi-tap method, if you want to solve the same button problem that occurs when the first letter of the same button is input continuously (not necessary when solving the same button problem with the auto cursor time setting)
2. When a letter is assigned to a button that functions as a single stroke in the text input mode.
(As an example of the type of button which performs a certain function by the single stroke in the text input mode
Usually button * or button #
When it is a character mode change button, a button for selecting candidate letters in T9 mode, or a stroke add button or double consonant button in Korean input method,
Or there are function buttons other than 12 letter buttons including call button and end button.)
3. When twins are T9 type parallel, input the first letter of button as definite letters instead of candidate letters.
4. When the twins enter the first letter of the button in parallel with the 2-TOUCH method
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Now at the beginning of this commentary
'Twin multiple advantages' section and
`Proof of the quickest way to type in twins on the small keypad:` Go back to the section and try again.
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
The following is a video script.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 01: General Introduction of Twin Character Input Method
<Open an English Improvement>
Hello?
I will explain the twin character input method.
On a device with a small keypad consisting of 0 ~ 9, *, # buttons, such as a mobile phone, / the fastest text entry speed in the world is / in Korean now.
In short, the twin character input method is expected.
Greek and Roman letters, including English
Japanese Characters,
Almost every character in the world,
When typing on a mobile phone with a small keypad
While you can use various conventional input methods as they are, without changing the character mode,
With all the phonemes in one or two strokes, / minimizing the traffic, equalizing the load on both hands, and holding a mobile phone stably,
It is improved to input Hangul faster and more conveniently that it is the fastest in the world.
Greek and Roman characters, including the English alphabet, are improved / faster and more convenient than Korean input speed.
In the mobile phone with a small keypad, Hangeul was able to give the first place in the text input speed.
Whether it is Hangul, Greek, or Roman alphabets, including English alphabets, the twin input method allows you to type in a mobile phone with a small keypad, which is a little faster than hand-scratching paper.
Or you can type in all the phone numbers on a small keypad, either by dialing the phone number with one hand, or a little faster than tapping the QWERTY keyboard's touchpad with a stylus pen.
So it's possible to write a novel on a cell phone.
It's a necessity for the situation of internet activity with mobile phone.
Japanese hiragana and katakana can be typed much faster than handwriting.
Chinese characters are often typed using English alphabets, so Chinese characters can be entered quickly.
It's so easy to apply it only to enter a few letters when entering a phone book search term.
(<QWERTY MOBILE PHONE PHOTO>)
In the conventional text input method, it is too cumbersome to enter text in a mobile phone with a small keypad.
At present, mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards are sold in 15-20% of countries.
As you type in Hangul / you almost don't need a phone with a QWERTY keyboard.
Almost no cell phone with QWT is required to enter foreign characters.
(Figure 22)
It's a great way to apply it to expensive phones.
I think it should be applied to low and medium-priced phones.
Mobile phone manufacturers like Nokia and Samsung Electronics are also conducting R & D and marketing with a lot of interest in low and medium prices to increase their global market share.
In addition, special characters such as punctuation marks and picture emoticons can be inputted in Doota in the normal text mode without changing the text mode in the normal text mode.
Whether you are typing a regular character or a special character / with a two-handed hand, since it uses both hands, it is the same as the one-handed speed with only one hand.
In other words,
Twin character input method
On small pads such as mobile phone keyboards
Like this, almost all letters and special characters including English, Japanese, and Korean
This is a quick and easy way to type in one or two.
Special characters, including punctuation and picture emoticons, can also be entered in normal text mode without changing the text mode.
(<Touch pad>)
And even the touchpad can be applied to the small pad type touchpad, which has several characters assigned to one button.
(Figure 22)
In addition, conventional Hangul input methods such as Samsung's Moaki method, Cheonjiin method, LG Electronics' EZ method, multi-tap method and “T9” method which are always used in foreign countries, and twin character input method without changing the character mode are used. Can be used in parallel. In other words, every time the user inputs Chinese characters, the user can use the conventional method or use the twin character input method without changing the character mode. So from the enterprise's point of view, there is no danger in applying the twin character input method.
The twin character input method is not a method of discarding the conventional character input method, but also a method of assisting the conventional character input method.
However, it can be applied differently from the conventional input method.
There are also content that can be applied to Qwerty keyboards, such as computer keyboards.
And you can apply the twin input method even with the following / conventional keyboard.
The conventional English keyboard is shown in <Figure 03>.
The traditional Japanese dial is shown in Figure 17.
The traditional Hangul Cheonji keyboard is shown in <Figure 22>.
Please refer to the commentary for more details and other benefits.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 02: Principles of Twin Character Input Method
<<<<< 468 >>>>>
(<Figure05>)
Let me talk about the principle of the twin input method.
In the conventional input method mode, while also able to input in the conventional input method,
Without changing the text mode,
You can apply twin input method.
(<Figure 03>)
Twin input method
If you press the letter button while holding the shift button on the computer keyboard, the second letter is entered,
In the keyboard of the phone is to use the shift button to enter the second to sixth characters,
Not actually adding multiple shift buttons,
It is a method to use 12 buttons of conventional buttons *, #, 0 ~ 9 for various types of shift buttons for inputting the second to sixth letters of each button.
<<<<< 478 >>>>>
If you choose different types of shift buttons as twins
Pressing a button once, ie holding down a button and not releasing another button, releasing a button, causes the first letter assigned to each button to be entered, as in the conventional case. Sometimes you can use 1 or 3 as a shift button that allows you to enter the first letter assigned to each button.)
Use button 4 or 6 for a while as a shift button that allows you to enter the second letter assigned to each button,
Use button 7 or 9 for a while as a shift button to enter the third letter assigned to each button,
Use button 2 or 8 for a while as a shift button that allows you to enter the fourth letter assigned to each button,
Use button 5 or 0 as a shift button to enter the fifth letter assigned to each button,
You can use button * or # as a shift button to enter the sixth letter assigned to each button.
To summarize the function of the shift button, once again, I decided 1,2,3,4,5,6.
(Of course, it can be set differently. 1,2,3,4,5,6. You can also set it as easy to remember. You can change which button acts as a shift button that allows you to enter the number of letters assigned to each button.) There is.)
<<<<< 496 >>>>>
[Place <Figure 03>]
Note that,
(For Samsung's Anycall or Pantech-based Sky or Curitel phones, all of them are for export. PQRS is assigned to Button 7, and WXYZ is assigned to Button 9.)
The twin input method can be applied with the standard English keyboard as shown in <Figure 03>.
If applied to an improved keyboard that adds special characters to the standard English keyboard, such as <Figure 16.5>,
Button7
To enter the first letter P, just click button 7 once.
To enter the second letter Q, double-click button 7, or press button 7 while holding down the button 4 or 6, which is the shift button for entering the second letter, without changing the character mode (button 4 It's much easier to use Button 6 as a shift button than
To enter the third letter R, click button 7 three times in succession, or press button 7 while pressing the button 7 or 9, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the third letter without changing the text mode (but Since button 7 cannot be pressed again while the button 7 is shifted and held, enter R by pressing button 7 while pressing button 9)
<<<<< 497 >>>>>
To enter the fourth letter S, click button 7 four times in succession, or press button 7 while holding down button 2 or button 8, which is a shift button for entering the fourth letter without changing the text mode ( It's much easier to use Button 8 as a shift button than Button 2),
To enter the fifth character dollar sign, click button 7 five times in succession, or press button 7 while pressing button 5 or button 0, which is the shift button for entering the fifth character, without changing the text mode.
To enter the sixth character, the tearful expression, click button 7 six times or press the button 7 while pressing the button * or button #, which is the shift button for entering the sixth character, without changing the character mode. (It's much easier to use Button # as a shift button than Button *?)
Let's quickly enter the PQRS dollar sign tearful expression assigned to Button 7 again.
PQRS dollar sign tears
Is it so easy to type?
<<<<< 502 >>>>>
The reason why the conventional multi-tap method by pressing the same button several times and the twin input method can be performed without changing the character mode is the same.
Conventionally, in the character input mode, letters are not input as soon as the button contact is turned on, but letters are input when the button is turned off.
In text input mode
If you press the button briefly, the alphabet is entered in English mode and the Korean phoneme is entered in Korean mode.
Press and hold for 1 second to enter a number.
In other words, it was a different signal depending on how long it took for the button to turn off after it was turned on.
In this case, the operation principle of the shift button on the computer keyboard is introduced, so when another button is turned on until a button is turned off, it becomes another signal.
In this case, if two or more twins with the same function are designated as twins, the buttons to which letters have been assigned can be shifted, so that more shift buttons can be generated, shorter moving lines, and interference between both hands. To get rid of the device, to hold the device reliably, and so on.
<<<<< 516 >>>>>
In addition, the user who wants to input in the multi-tap method, which is a method of inputting the same button by pressing the same button several times in the conventional manner, can also input the PQRS by circulating even when the button 7 is pressed several times, and the dollar sign and the tearful expression are in the character mode. You can also “restrict” it so that you can only type in the twins without any changes.
And if the letters in the 3rd or more sequence are inputted with two strokes using the shift button to input the letters of the sequence, will the number of strokes be lowered naturally?
In case of inputting the second letter, it is 2 strokes even if you double-click it.You can also press the button assigned the desired letter while pressing the shift button for inputting the second character.
Using the shift button distributes the load on both hands evenly, and there are many other advantages to be explained later, so it is better to enter the second letter using the shift button.
<<<<< 517 >>>>>
What has been described so far is, in fact, a description of how to input six characters of the first group of each button, and six characters of the second to third groups of each button, in total, 18 characters are also twin input methods. Through, you can easily enter 2 ~ 3 strokes without changing the text mode in normal text mode.
Please refer to the following video and commentary for more detailed information and various applications such as inputting without changing the character mode, even lower case letters and special characters.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 03: why the character input method should be improved even on the small keypad
<<<<< 104-0037 0008? 104-0039 >>>>>
(<Figure 03>)
Let me tell you why you should improve the text input method on the small keypad.
<<<<< 104-0038 0012 >>>>>
(<Figure 14.5>)
And you know that a small pad includes a touch pad as well as a small pad type.
<<<<< 104-0043 0015 >>>>
Qwerty keyboard
The majority of consumers around the world, 80-90% (99.9% in Korea), have many reasons
Without choosing a mobile phone that has a QWERTY keyboard like this.
<<<<< 104-0045 0007? 104-0033 >>>>>
In the end, we choose a mobile phone with such a small keypad.
<<<<< 104-0047 0022 >>>>>
The specific reason may be as follows.
Qwerty keyboard phones
The size of the phone itself is often large and inconvenient to carry.
Even though the size is small, it is usually a horizontal folder or a horizontal slide. When you press or call a phone number with one hand, you may feel uncomfortable.
<<<<< 104-0051 0020 >>>>>
On the other hand, Qwerty phones with vertical folders or vertical slides are much smaller than fingers, making it difficult to properly press the right button.
Some phones are equipped with a small keypad and QWERTY keyboard, but they are thicker.
<<<<< 104-0052 0017 >>>>
And the design is not sophisticated, and it is mostly expensive.
Anyway, in countries other than Korea, Qwerty keyboard phones are still not the choice for most users who do not write very much.
<<<<< 104-0056 0025 >>>>>
(Figure 20)
So I bought a mobile phone with a small keypad.
After purchase, I feel uncomfortable when I enter a few words or search characters when searching for a phone number. However, the next time you buy a cell phone, it's not always inconvenient enough to make you think you should buy a cell phone with a QWERTY keyboard.
<<<<< 104-0072 0026 >>>>>
(<Qwerty keyboard photo>))))))
Conventionally,
Korea with the fastest Korean alphabet
In other countries, inputting characters including the multi-tap method and T9 method on the small keypad was much more inconvenient than Korean input, so if you had to enter a lot of characters, you had to buy a cell phone with a qwerty keyboard. However,
<<<<< 104-0074 0031 >>>>>
Now, twin input methods have been developed, so characters that represent other languages such as English on a small keypad can be entered faster than Korean input speed.
Qwerty mobile phone sales in some regions outside Korea will increase to 10-20%, and the QWERTY mobile phone sales will decrease as much as Hangul.
<<<<< 104-0076 0015 >>>>>
(I understand that the global Qwerty mobile phone sales target for 2008 is around 15%.
We also know that Samsung Electronics' Qwerty mobile phone sales target for 2008 is around 15%.)
<<<<< 104-0080 0028 >>>>>
However, in the future, even if Qwerty cell phone sales increase, even if it increases, at least 50% will be small pad mobile phones because of the inherent advantages of small pads.
Currently, 1 billion mobile phones are sold worldwide a year, so 50% of them are 500 million, or at least 500 million a year, for the small pad market.
<<<<< 104-0084 0036 >>>>
The lowest priced mobile phone is a mobile phone with such a small keypad anyway.
If twin input method is applied, user can input text conveniently.
Twin input method should be applied to low and medium-priced cell phones or home and office landline phones that are in demand in poor and developing countries.
This is because cost reduction has become a major challenge for the mobile phone industry in the mobile phone market, where competition is growing in emerging countries.
<<<<< 104-0086 0015 >>>>>
(In particular, as technology has leveled out in recent years, price has become the biggest differentiator. Emerging markets such as Southeast Asia, Latin America and Africa have emerged as growth engines. It is even more important that Ericsson's Big 5 monopoly can monopolize 80% of the market and effectively lower its price by building economies of scale.
<<<<< 104-0089 0016 >>>>>
Samsung Electronics is also aggressively targeting emerging markets by adjusting its existing business portfolio, which was focused on high-end products. It was also thanks to the success of this strategy that beat the Motorola on a volume basis.
<<<<< 104-0090 0005? 104-0099 >>>>>
For reference, a little more about Hangul input method
<<<<< 104-0091 0022? 104-0058 >>>>>
By the way,
Even from the Korean input point of view, the small keypad can be used to enter characters in the world fastest.
At the time of purchase, customers who did not choose mobile phones with QWERTY keyboards,
After the purchase, in the text input, enter a person's name when searching for a phone number, while complaining of inconvenience,
<<<<< 104-0092 0015 104-0065 >>>>>
After changing the phone manufacturer, I found it hard to type characters because of the shortcomings of the changed keyboard layout and the changed text input method.
I talk a lot.
<<<<< 104-0093 0018? 104-0067 >>>>>
In particular, when the thumb tribes, who entered texts using the LG Electronics EZ method, used Samsung's Cheonjiin method or Pantech's Sky or Curitel method, many people would repurchase LG Electronics' mobile phones again.
<<<<< 104-0094 0006? 104-0068 >>>>>
Older people may prefer Samsung's natural world.
<<<<< 104-0095 0012? 104-0069 >>>>>
In this situation, in order to realize customer satisfaction, the text input method on the small keypad can only be improved to satisfy both the beginner and the thumb.
<<<<< 104-0096 0034 >>>>>
By combining twin input methods with each of the conventional methods, including Samsung's Cheonjiin method, LG Electronics' EZ method, Pantech's Sky or Curitel method, and Motorola's method,
In each conventional text mode,
While it is possible to input like conventionally,
Without changing the text input mode
In parallel with the twin input method
All 40 Korean phonemes can be entered as 1 or 2 strokes, and special characters can be entered quickly and easily in the plain text mode.
<<<<< 104-0098 0016 >>>>>
so
Those who prefer the traditional method can also be satisfied, and they can also be satisfied with the thumb that desires faster text input.
So there is no risk to manufacturers or carriers in applying twin input methods.
<<<<< 104-0101 0010 >>>>>
So now
The best way is Samsung's heaven and earth,
-LG EZ is the best way,
Motorola's way is the best.
<<<<< 104-0103 0024 >>>>>
Samsung's Cheonjiin method and twin input method is the best combination,
-The best way is to combine LG EZ and twin input.
-The best combination of Pantech's Sky and Curitel's method and twin input method,
-The combination of Motorola and twin input is the best way to come out.
<<<< 104-0105 0008 >>>>>
Anyway, when you send a text message contest on the small keypad, the method of applying the twin dressing method is unconditionally 1st.
<<<<< 104-0111 0040 >>>>>
(Is currently
If you look at various mobile community boards and portal site comments,
'Samsung's Cheonjiin method can be learned quickly, but when you write it, you get a lot of strokes, and when you enter a series of characters assigned to the same button, it becomes uncomfortable because you have to move the cursor manually. The EZ method is difficult to learn because there are a lot of hidden phonemes (= derived), but once you learn it, the number of strokes is less than that of the Cheonjiin method. It is neutral.
<<<<<< 104-0120 0045 >>>>>
In fact, until now, LG EZ is ranked first in various character input competitions and is recognized for its excellence in speed.
(However, the LG EZ method has 15 phonemes that require 3 or more strokes to input, and there are various problems such as a large number of lines for pressing the button * for adding strokes and a button # for double consonants. ,
If you combine the conventional LG Easy method and twin-coating method, you can input all phonemes as 1 or 2 strokes, and you can make the movement line very small in 1 ~ 3 lines, and evenly load both hands.)
<<<<< 104-0123 0009 >>>>>
Forward,
When combined with twins, you can type much faster than the conventional LG EZ method.
<<<<< 104-0124 0008 >>>>>
However, I do not know if the conventional LG EZ method and the twin input method are faster than the combined method.)
<<<<< 999 >>>>
10 seconds finish
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 04: English input method improvement (-bright)
Let me tell you an introduction to entering English.
The conventional English keyboard in the mobile phone
In detail
There are <Figure03> or <Figure04> types.
<Figure 03> Type
Button 1 does not have an alphabet assigned to it.
Button 7 is assigned 'P.QRS'
Button 9 is assigned 'WXYZ'
Button 1, *, 0, # to / (slash): (colon). (Period), (comma) @? ! There are about 0-7 items depending on the manufacturer. Many types have two or three assignments.
<Figure 03> is a keyboard layout applied to almost all mobile phones around the world. You can say `standard`.
LG Electronics and Motorola are of <Figure 03> type for both Korean sales and exports.
Sharp Electronics, Nokia, etc. are also produced only in <Figure 03>.
However, Samsung Electronics and Pantech affiliates SKY and Curitel are sold to Korea in the form of <Figure 04> but for export to <Figure 03>.
<Figure 04> Type
Button 1 is assigned 'QZ',
Button 7 is assigned 'PRS'
Button 9 is assigned WXY.
In the future, the standard keyboard type will be described as <Figure 03>.
The state of the keyboard to which the twin input method can be applied does not matter.
As shown in <Figure 03>, you can apply the existing keyboard as it is.
As shown in <Figure 16.6>, you can add red punctuation degree to the conventional keyboard.
As shown in <Fig. 16.5>, you can add a few additional picture emoticons to a conventional keyboard.
You can move the alphabet below the numbers and place them as shown in <Figure 05>.
As shown in <Figure 06>, you can add one more picture emoticons.
It is also possible to further expand the combination of the various keyboard states mentioned above and the various states that have been devoted to some of the following display screens.
Display screen
It can be applied by adding sentence marks as in <Figure 16.1>.
As shown in <Figure 16>, you can add and apply the emoji first.
Or on the display screen
The first page shall be assigned with punctuation marks as shown in <Figure 16.1>.
The second page is assigned with punctuation marks as shown in <Figure 16>.
Subsequent pages may continue to assign special characters.
Part of inputting the display screen is also conventionally
Special characters are entered like that,
Korean characters are displayed only on the display screen in the Korean input mode as shown in <Figure 15>.
The method of inputting special characters through the display screen I suggest is not to enter special characters by changing to special character mode.
In text mode, you can use the “call” key with no “no” response as a toggle key to show or hide the special character table.
The special feature is that / special characters appear in normal text mode / so that special characters can be easily entered in normal text mode.
In the text mode, you can make as many special character assignment page as usual by using two volume control buttons that have no response / volume up / down as page change button on display screen.
With this improved method, it is possible to input special characters without changing the character mode in the normal character mode, but it is also possible to change and enter the special character mode in the conventional manner.
Please refer to the description for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 05 98
Improved English input method 1 Bright
Let's learn English input method.
You can input other characters such as Japanese or Korean in the same way as English input method.
The keyboard should be like <Figure 05> of the various keyboards presented in the previous video description.
The display screen will be described with an example as shown in Figure 16.
sure
The keyboard is like <Figure 03>.
The display screen can also be in the form of <Figure 16.1> assigned from punctuation.
Let's divide the letters of each button in <Figure 05> into two groups into two groups.
If the current text mode is described in lower case mode / button 6
The first group is lowercase m n o? 6 expressions,
The second group is divided into six uppercase M N O, even though in lowercase mode.
(In order to enter uppercase letters in lowercase mode without changing the mode, we have made this allocation rule.)
In lowercase mode, I'll explain based on button 9.
The first group will have 6 lowercase letters w x y z%
The second group will have 6 uppercase letters WX YZ (the sun) in lowercase mode.
And if you choose six types of shift buttons as twins
When a button is pressed once, the first letter is entered (in special cases, buttons 1 and 3 are used as shift buttons to enter the first letter assigned to each button).
Use buttons 4 and 6 as shift buttons to enter the second letter assigned to each button,
Use buttons 7 and 9 as shift buttons to enter the third letter assigned to each button,
Use buttons 2 and 8 as shift buttons to enter the fourth letter assigned to each button,
(As mentioned above, use buttons 2 and 8 as shift buttons for entering the fourth letter assigned to each button, rather than using buttons * and # as shift buttons for entering the fourth letter assigned to each button.) I think this would be more advantageous for typing the letters s and z, but I could change the button *, # to a shift button that allows me to enter the fourth letter.)
Use button 5,0 as a shift button to enter the fifth letter assigned to each button,
We will use the buttons * and # as shift buttons to enter the sixth letter assigned to each button.
Summarizing the function of the shift button, once again, I decided 1,2,3,4,5,6. (Of course, you can set differently. You can easily do 1,2,3,4,5,6, etc.) Can vary.)
In lower case mode, I will explain based on button 6.
Lower case m n o? First of all, how to input 6 expressions.
Lowercase m can be entered by pressing button 6 once,
Lowercase n can be entered by double-clicking button 6 or by pressing button 6 while pressing button 4 or button 6, which is a shift button for entering the second letter without changing the character mode. (But you can't press button 6 again while holding down button 6. Lowercase n is entered by pressing button 6 while pressing button 4. As you will see later, press button 6 while pressing button 4 rather than double-clicking.) It is better to enter by pressing, so it is better to press and hold button 4 to enter.)
Lowercase o is entered by pressing button 6 three times in succession, or by pressing button 6 while pressing button 7 or button 9, which is the shift button for entering the third letter, without changing the character mode. (But if you press button 9 while pressing button 9, both hands are biased in the 3rd row, so the interference of both hands occurs and the stability of holding the mobile phone is not good. Therefore, press the button 6 while pressing the button 7 We recommend that you enter.
In this way, there are two shift buttons that perform the same function, so the user can select and use them conveniently.)
The question mark (?) Is entered by pressing button 6 four times in succession, or by pressing the button 6 while pressing button 2 or button 8, which is a shift button for inputting the fourth letter without changing the character mode,
The heart is entered by pressing button 6 five times in succession, or by pressing the button 6 while pressing the button 5 or button 0, which is a shift button for inputting the fifth letter, without changing the character mode,
You can enter the expression in love by pressing button 6 six times in succession, or by pressing the button 6 while holding down the button * or button #, which allows you to enter the sixth character without changing the character mode. It's a lot easier to use a button * as a shift button instead.)
Lowercase m, n, o ,? Let's try again quickly, heart, loved ones
Lowercase m, n, o ,? , Heart, in love.
(Not related to Button 6
The fourth letter assigned to Button 7 is
Hold down the button 2 or the button 8, which is the shift button to enter the fourth letter, and press the button 7 to enter it, and S
The fourth letter assigned to button 9 is Z
You can easily press the button 9 while holding down the button 2 or button 8, which allows you to enter the fourth letter. Z (demonstration))
The second group of buttons 6, the capital letter m, n, o How to enter the beer brewed carrots will be explained in the next video.
Please refer to the manual for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 06 103
Improved English input method 2
In the following, we will explain how to input 6 uppercase letters M N O in the lower case mode.
The second group of input methods
In lowercase mode, we will use the example of pressing the letter button for about 0.5 seconds while holding down the shift button without changing the character mode.
(Of course, you can use other push methods.)
That way,
In lowercase mode, press and hold button 6 for 0.5 seconds while pressing button 1 or button 3, which is the shift button for entering the first letter. (According to the rules, press button 6 without requiring the shift button.) You can also enter it by pressing and holding for about 0.5 seconds, but you can use it by pressing and holding for about 1 second as usual.)
In lowercase mode, press and hold button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while pressing button 4, which is a shift button to input the second letter.
In lowercase mode, uppercase 5 (0) is entered by pressing and holding Button 6 or Button 9 for about 0.5 seconds while holding down the button 7 or button 9, which is the third button.
Beer can be entered by pressing and holding button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while pressing button 2 or button 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter.
To enter a cherry, press and hold the button 5 or the button 0, which is the shift button for entering the fifth letter, and press and hold button 6 for about 0.5 seconds (missing from recording).
Carrots are entered by pressing and holding Button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while holding down the button * or button #, which is the shift button for entering the sixth letter.
Let's quickly type the capital letters m, n, o, beer, cherry, carrots in lowercase mode?
In lowercase mode, capital letters m, n, o, beer, cherry, carrot,
Enter this
Although you used long presses that you don't normally speak,
In the past, the text mode had to be changed or entered, even if the text mode was changed, the page had to be changed many times and entered again.
By using the twin method, it is much easier to input the text without changing the text mode.
In order to input more special characters in the normal character mode, you can dedicate part of the display screen to show the special character assignment table.
For example, in text mode, you can use the call button that does not respond when pressed to toggle the display of special characters on the display screen.
If you press the call button in normal text mode and the special character table as shown in <Figure 16> appears on the display screen, let's input the special characters on the display screen without changing the text mode in the normal text mode.
Special characters on the display screen are now considered the third group.
Now, let's talk about how to enter the third group of buttons 6: card, kitchen knife and three masked expressions.
The third group of input methods
In lowercase mode, we will use the example of pressing the letter button without double-clicking the shift button without changing the text mode.
(Of course, you can use other push methods.)
That way,
To enter a card, double-click the button 1 or button 3, which allows you to enter the first letter, and then press the button 6 without releasing it.
Double-click the button 4, which is the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter, and press the button 6 without releasing it.
The mask expression is entered by pressing the button 6 while holding down the button 7 or button 9, which is the shift button for entering the third letter.
And in the text input mode, you can change the page of special character table on the display by pressing two volume control buttons which do not respond.
Even if the page is changed, special characters on the display screen can be entered using the third group input method.
The keyboard is the same as the conventional <Figure 03>, and the first page of the display screen is assigned with punctuation marks as shown in <Figure 16.1>, the second page is as shown in <Figure 16>, and the following pages continue. You can also assign special characters.
At this time, the characters in the japan can be input by the twin first group character input method without changing the conventional input method or character mode, and the characters on the display screen can be input by the twin second group character input method.
Of course, you can change to the special character mode and select and enter the desired special character.
You can also press the call button again to hide the special characters on the display screen. Even if you don't see the special character table, you can enter the third group input method if you memorize the table just shown.
How to enter button 9 and the assignments to other buttons will be explained without explanation.
Please refer to the description for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 07 139
7 common misconceptions about twin input
There are six common misconceptions about the twin input method.
As a first misconception
It is a misconception that conventional input methods cannot be used when using twin input methods.
The twin input method can use the twin input method without changing the character mode in the conventional input method.
In other words
For example, button 6 in Figure 16.5 is shown.
To enter the first letter m, just click button 6 once.
To enter the second letter n, double click the button 6, or press the button 6 while pressing the button 4, which is the shift button for entering the second letter, without changing the text mode.
To enter the third letter O, click button 6 three times in succession, or press button 6 while pressing the button 7, which is the shift button to enter the third letter, without changing the text mode.
As a second misconception
It is a misconception that you cannot type with one hand in the character mode where you can use the twin input method.
As I mentioned in the first misconception
The twin input method can use the twin input method without changing the character mode in the conventional input method. Therefore, if the conventional method was a one-handed input method, the input method can be input with one hand.
As a third misconception
It's a misconception that the button becomes too complicated because the emoji must be marked on the button.
It is not necessary to display punctuation or picture emoticons on the button.
For example, in English
The buttons can be marked as in the conventional way as shown in <Figure 03>, and special characters can be shown only on the display screen as shown in <Figure 16.1>.
For example in Hangul
In the input method
The buttons can be marked as in the conventional way as shown in <Figure 20>, and additional phonemes such as <Figure 22.8> or <Figure 16.2> can be assigned to the display screen only, or special characters can be marked as shown in <Figure 16.1>.
And also to give you a solution,
You don't have to worry about anything, you can produce two types of keyboards.
If you take an example with Korean alphabet,
Although twin input method such as <Figure 20> is applied, it has the same format as the existing keyboard.
With improved keyboard type as shown in <Figure 22>.
You can produce two types of keyboards.
As a fourth misconception
The misconception that the twin input method is not applicable to the touchpad.
Even the touch pad can be applied to the small keypad type touch pad in which several characters are assigned to one button as shown in <Fig. 14.5>.
As a fifth misconception
It is a misunderstanding that you can display the punctuation marks and pictures on the mobile phone keypad and press the same button several times in the multi-tap method as in the past.
For example, in English
In the conventional keyboard like <Figure 03>,
Since only M, N, and O are assigned to button 6, you can enter M, N, and O while circulating, pressing button 6 several times.
Now, even if you assign button 6 to?, Heart, and facial expression on the keypad as shown in <Fig. 16.5>,
When inputting by pressing the button 6 multiple times with the multi-tap method, only M, N and O are “circulated”.
?, Hearts, facial expressions can be limited to the twin input method.
Also in Korean
For example, in the improved keyboard of the natural method, such as Figure 22,
By tapping button 9 several times,
Allow you to enter only "circular" input
Vowels, parentheses, hearts, stars, and expressions can be restricted to the twin input method.
As a sixth misconception
It's a misconception that you can't display a picture emoji on a button.
The detailed explanation explained that there is enough space to display the picture emoji.
Even if there is not enough space to display the pictures emoji like this, I think it can be simplified.
7th misunderstanding
When the button * or 0 or # is used as a phoneme conversion function such as a double consonant button or a stroke adding button, or when used as a function button such as a character mode change function or an English letter in uppercase and lowercase conversion function, the twin input method is used. It is a misconception that it cannot be used as a shift button.
Even if letters are assigned to buttons 0 to 9, that is, they can be used as shift buttons for a while as letter buttons can be used as shift buttons for twin input methods.
Please refer to the description for more details and various applications.
Please refer to the detailed descriptions in this cafe for details, applications and details that have not been mentioned so far.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video08 412 times
English alphabet A to Z fast typing demonstration
<<<<< 412 >>>>>
Before you enter English words,
First, let's enter A to Z which is the entire alphabet.
In the multi-tap mode, which is the conventional input mode, from A to Z,
You can also press the same button once or multiple times.
In the multi-tap mode, we will enter the twin input mode without changing the character mode.
<<<<< 417 >>>>>
In conclusion, you can enter A to Z quickly.
A, B, C, D, E, F... … … … X, Y, Z
<<<<< 420 >>>>>-Bright picture quality
Let's type on a real phone?
A, B, C, D, E, F... … … … X, Y, Z
<<<<< 425 >>>>>
The more you practice, the faster you can type.
Should we try again slowly?
A, B, C, D, E, F... … … … X, Y, Z
<<<<< 430 >>>>>
So far, for example, in a description with a keyboard with a large number of picture emoticons including <Figure 05>, you can use the twin input method to convert special characters including punctuation marks and picture emoticons to the special character mode. I think you agree that you can easily type 2 strokes in normal text mode.
From now on, in the same keyboard as in the conventional <Figure 03>, please feel free to enter the alphabet faster and more conveniently than the Korean phoneme that the input speed is 1st in a mobile phone with a small keypad by the twin input method.
With the twin input method, even a mobile phone with a small keypad can enter alphabets faster than the speed of handwriting on paper.
(<Quarterly keyboard photo>)
The input speed difference with QWERTY keyboard is hardly seen.
So it's possible to write a novel on a cell phone with a small keypad.
The biggest reason for typing so fast is
While you can enter alphabets such as C, F, I, L, O, R, S, V, Y, and Z assigned to the 3rd to 4th buttons with 2 strokes,
The letters B, E, H, K, N, Q, U, and X, which are assigned to each button that can be input by double-clicking, also use the shift button to equalize the load of both hands. Entered in tarot,
When entering alphabets assigned to the same button continuously, for example, when entering A, B, and C continuously, even in the multi-tap mode, there is no need to move the cursor using the space button.
There are two shift buttons on button 4 or 6 to enter the second letter.
There are two shift buttons on button 7 or 9 to enter the third letter.
There are two shift buttons on button 2 or 8 to enter the fourth letter.
(When entering only alphabets, it is better to use only button 8 as the shift button to enter the fourth letter.)
The shift button is only in the 2nd and 3rd row, so there is no big line to 4th row,
Because there are two in the first row and the third row, the copper wire is small at the current position of the thumb, and both thumbs are not so biased in the first or third row, so that both finger interference does not occur and the stability of holding the mobile phone is not reduced. This is because the shift button can be selected.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video09 448
English Alphabet A to Z Quick Input Demonstration 1
<<<<< 448 >>>>>
You already know how to enter the letters A through Z, but I will explain it in detail.
(If you already know, you do not need to see the following.)
In case of inputting only English alphabet except special character by twin input method
The shift button is used to enter the second letter.
The shift button is used to enter the third letter.
The shift button to enter the fourth letter, button 8, you only need to know.
This is because only four letters are assigned to button 7 and button 9.
<<<<< 451 >>>>>
A can only press button 2 once.
B can be entered by pressing button 2 while pressing button 4 or 6, which causes the second letter to be entered. I pressed button 2 while pressing button 4 to enter the ratio.
Even if A and B are assigned to the same button, and you enter A after B consecutively, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
C can be entered by pressing button 2 while pressing button 7 or 9, which is the shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 2 while pressing button 7 to enter seeds.
Even if B and C are assigned to the same button and you enter B after C continuously, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
<<<<< 452 >>>>>
D can only press button 3 once
E can be entered by pressing button 3 while pressing button 4 or 6, which is the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter. I pressed button 3 while pressing button 4 to enter it.
Even if D and E are assigned to the same button and you enter E consecutively after D, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
You can enter F by pressing button 3 while pressing button 7 or 9, which is the shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 3 while pressing button 7 and entered F.
Even if E and E are assigned to the same button and you enter E consecutively after E, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
<<<<< 454 >>>>>
G is just one press of button 4,
H can be inputted by pressing button 4 while pressing button 4 or 6, which is the shift button for entering the second letter. However, you cannot press button 4 while pressing button 4, so you pressed button 3 while pressing button 6 to enter H.
Even if G and G are assigned to the same button and you enter G consecutively after H, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
I can enter the child by pressing button 4 while holding down the button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter. I pressed button 4 while pressing button 9 to enter the child.
Even if H and I are assigned to the same button, and H is entered in succession, I do not need to move the cursor artificially.
<<<<< 456 >>>>>
J only needs to press button 5 once
K can be entered by pressing button 5 while holding down either button 4 or 6, which causes the second letter to be entered. I pressed K while pressing Button 4.
Even if J and K are assigned to the same button and you enter J consecutively after J, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
You can enter L by pressing button 5 while pressing button 7 or 9, which is the shift button for entering the third letter. I pressed button 5 while pressing button 7 to enter EL.
Even if K and L are assigned to the same button and you enter L consecutively after K, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 10 457
English Alphabet A to Z Quick Input Demonstration 2
<<<<< 457 >>>>>
M just press button 6 once
N can be entered by pressing button 6 while holding down the button 4 or 6, which is the shift button for entering the second letter. But you can't press button 6 while pressing button 6, so you pressed button 6 while pressing button 4 to enter yen.
Even if M and N are assigned to the same button and you enter N consecutively after M, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
O can be entered by pressing button 6 while pressing button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter. I pressed button 6 while pressing button 7 and entered wrong.
Even if N and O are assigned to the same button and you enter N consecutively after O, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
<<<<< 458 >>>>>
P is just one press of button 7
Q can be entered by pressing button 7 while pressing button 4 or 6, which is the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter. I pressed button 7 while pressing button 6 to enter the cue.
Even if P and Q are assigned to the same button and you enter Q consecutively after P, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
R can be entered by pressing button 3 while holding down the button 7 or 9, which causes the third letter to be entered. However, you cannot press button 7 while pressing button 7, so you pressed button 7 while pressing button 9 to enter an egg.
Even if Q and R are assigned to the same button and you enter R consecutively after Q, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
S can be entered by pressing button 7 while pressing button 2 or 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter. I pressed button 7 while pressing button 8 to enter es.
Even if R and S are assigned to the same button and you enter R consecutively after S, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
<<<<< 459 >>>>>
T is just one push of button 8.
U can be entered by pressing button 8 while pressing button 4 or 6, which is the shift button for entering the second letter. I pressed button 8 while pressing button 4 and entered u.
Even if T and U are assigned to the same button, and you enter U consecutively after T, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
V can be entered by pressing button 8 while holding down the button 7 or 9, which causes the third letter to be entered. I pressed V while pressing button 7 to enter V.
Even if U and V are assigned to the same button, and you enter V after U, you do not have to move the cursor artificially.
<<<<< 460 >>>>>
W just press button 9 once
X can be entered by pressing button 9 while pressing button 4 or 6, which is the shift button to enter the second letter. I pressed button 9 while pressing button 4 to enter X.
Even if W and X are assigned to the same button and you enter X consecutively after W, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
Y can be entered by pressing button 9 while pressing button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter. But you can't press button 9 while holding button 9, so you pressed button 9 while pressing button 7 to enter the wai.
Even if X and Y are assigned to the same button and you enter Y consecutively after X, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
Z can be entered by pressing button 9 while holding down the shift buttons 2 or 8, which allows you to enter the fourth letter. I pressed button 9 while pressing button 8 to enter the jet.
Even if Y and Z are assigned to the same button and you enter Y consecutively after Z, you do not need to move the cursor artificially.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Videos11 526 times
Six new advantages in entering words using English words as an example 1
<<<<<< 526 >>>>>>
(<Figure 03>)
Let's quickly type a word like this:
MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI
<<<<<< 527-0046 >>>>>>
Let's take a look at the new advantages of typing words that use real English words.
With twin input method
You can enter all spells in 1 or 2 strokes,
The buttons assigned to the letters are also used as twins as shift buttons,
In addition to the advantages mentioned above, the movement of the thumb is small, there is no interference between the two-handed thumb, the load on the two-handed thumb is distributed evenly, and the stability of holding the mobile phone is high.
With twin input method
If you actually type a word, whether it's an English word, a Japanese word, or a Korean word,
You will notice that there are five additional big advantages:
<<<<<< 542-0025 >>>>>
Firstly, even if you continuously enter phonemes assigned to the same button, you don't have to do the unnecessary action of manually moving the cursor with the space-only button or the right button.
Let's type Mono
12 inputs are required when using the multi-tap method.
<<<<< 543-0100 >>>>>>
Press Button 6 once / enter M.
Press the space button to move the cursor
Press Button 6 three times to enter /
If you press the button 6 three times without moving the cursor with the space button in front of you, the previously entered M changes to Y, then changes to Y, and then to M again.
Press the space button to move the cursor
Press Button 6 twice to enter / yen
Press the space button to move the cursor
Press Button 6 three times to enter.
<<<<<<<< 547-0039 >>>>>>>
Thus, if you try to enter the spelling assigned to the same button / continuously, and you do not move the cursor with the space button or wait two seconds, only the characters displayed by the current cursor will change.
Since this phenomenon occurs much more frequently in English words than in Korean, it was one of the biggest reasons that the traditional multi-tap method could not input English faster than Korean. Now, twin input method has been developed to input English faster than Korean. It became.
<<<<< 549-0053 >>>>>
If you input MONO with twin input method, only 7 strokes are required, not 12 strokes.
Press Button 6 once to enter Em,
Press button 6 while pressing button 7 from button 7 or 9 to enter the third letter,
Press button 6 while pressing button 4 from button 4 or 6 to input second letter, enter yen,
Press button 6 while pressing button 7 from button 7 or 9 to enter the third letter.
<<<<<< 554-0033 >>>>>
Let's enter it again
Let's type on your phone?
Let's type fast
The movement of the thumb is also very small and easy to type.
If you enter ACC in ACCEPT like this,
If you enter DEF of DEFECT like this,
If you input HI of HIDE like this,
If you enter KL in WRINKLE like this,
If you input PR of PRAY like this,
In this case, RS of ER's multiple ERS,
If you input VU of VULGAR like this,
If you enter WY for SNOWY WY like this,
There are too many examples, such as entering XY for XYLOPHONE this way.
<<<<<< 562-0059 >>>>>>
However, when the twin input method is 'parallel' in the multi-tap mode, a situation may arise in which the cursor must be moved artificially when the first letter assigned to each button is continuously entered.
However, if you use the shift button 1 or 3 to enter the first letter instead of pressing the space button, you do not have to move the cursor artificially, and there are fewer moving lines, evenly load on both hands, and There is more to it than pressing the space button, which is not biased.
Introducing autocursor time setting, or the twin-input dedicated mode, does not occur at all. For more information, please refer to the detailed explanation.
<<<<<< 564-0059 >>>>>
Second.
When there is a sequence of letters of the same order of each button, the number of strokes greatly decreases as the shift button which we pushed in the front can just use from the back. Japanese has no spacing between words, so it is more useful for Japanese word input.
Let's enter FOLLOW.
Let's type in the conventional multi-tap method. (17 total)
3, 3, 3, 6, 6, 6, 5, 5, 5, #, 5, 5, 5, 6, 6, 6, 9
Enter this
<<<<<< 570-0040 >>>>>
If you type in the twin input method, you can type like this. (You need only 7 strokes, not 17 strokes.)
Since FOLLO of FOLLOW is the third letter of buttons 3, 6, 5, 5, and 6, press and hold button 7 in button 7 or 9, which is a shift button to input the third letter, buttons 3, 6, 5, 5 Press, then 6 to enter.
If you enter CIRCL in CIRCLE as CIRCL like this
If you enter BE in BECOME BE
If you enter CO in BECOME
If you enter OFF like this
There are too many examples, such as entering KE in POKE like this.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Videos12 575 times
6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example 2
<<<<< 575-0022 >>>>>
Third, as the letter button is shifted, the letter button when entering the previous letter becomes the shift button for entering the next letter. With the copper wire at 0, the copper wire is minimized and the effect of saving almost one stroke is the endorphin.
<<<<< 587-0110 >>>>>
Let's enter IN of ING?
Yen
Since the child is the third letter of button 4, enter the child by pressing button 4 while holding down the button 7 or the 9 button 9, which is the shift button for entering the third letter.
And since Y is the second letter of button 6, I want to press the button 4 or the six button 4, which is the shift button to input the second letter, but when I entered the previous letter, I used button 4 as the letter button, Since you were at button 4, to press the shift button, press button 6 while pressing button 6 to enter yen without having to move your thumb elsewhere.
Aien
PY of COPY is PY
If you enter IX in SIX like IX
LIE IE IE
SYMBOL SY SY
There are too many examples, such as entering OH OH this way.
<<<<< 594-0020 >>>>>
Fourth, as the letter button is shifted, the shift button for inputting the previous letter has the effect of minimizing the number of copper wires and saving almost one stroke in the state where the copper wire, which becomes the letter button of the latter letter, is 0. Endorphins rise
<<<<< 597-0052 >>>>>
Let's type STOP ST.
ST
Since S is the fourth letter of button 7, press and hold button 7 while pressing the shift button 2 or the eight button 8, which causes the fourth letter to be entered.
Since the tee is the first letter of the button 8, I want to press the button 8 with a single stroke. When I typed the previous letter S, I used the button 8 as a shift button, so the thumb was already on the button 8. Do not need to press the button 8 directly in place to enter the tee.
ST
When entering NG and NG ING
If you enter OP in POP like this
There are too many examples, such as SU in SUSPEND.
<<<<< 600-0029 >>>>>
Fifth, the advantages of the third and fourth sometimes occur at the same time while entering two spellings.
That is, as the letter button is shifted, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the shift button for inputting the latter letter, while the shift button for entering the previous letter becomes the letter button of the later letter. Sometimes.
<<<<< 610-0124 >>>>>
Let's type XI in TAXI.
X child
Since X is the second letter of button 9, hold down the button 4 or the six button 4, which is the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter.
Since the child is the third letter of the button 4, I want to press the button 7 or the 9 button, which is a shift button that allows the user to enter the third letter. Since I was on button 9, I want to press the shift button, and I want to enter the child by pressing button 4 while holding the button 9 right in place like this without having to move the thumb elsewhere. Since we used as a shift button, to press the button 4 because the thumb was already on the button 4, enter the child by pressing the button 4 directly in place without having to move the thumb elsewhere.
X child
<<<<< 615-0050 >>>>>
Not only when there are two spellings that lead to such a situation, as in the example of explaining the second to fifth advantages, but also when the first letter of each button is sandwiched between the two spells, those advantages are almost always present.
And further assigns a shift button for inputting the second and third characters, such as a button 2 or 5, which is a shift button for inputting the fourth and fifth characters, and a shift button for inputting the second and third characters. This may cause the benefits to appear more often.
For more details and various applications, please refer to the detailed manual.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 13 674
Quickly enter 40 English words
<<<<< 674-0029 >>>>>
I'm going to type about 40 English words quickly.
For information on how to enter, please refer to the previous video or detailed explanation.
The individual details of the 40-word entry are detailed in the detailed description.
In this video,
Blue ballpoint pen means left thumb
The red ballpoint pen means the thumb of the right hand.
<<<<<< 688-0147 >>>>>>>
Please pay attention to the following two head input advantages.
.
First, both blue and red never go to the 4 lines with large copper lines, and move only within 1-3 rows,
Secondly, shift buttons with the same function are arranged in rows 1 and 3, with twins on both sides.
Most blue ballpoint pens, which mean left-handed thumb, can be pushed in only one row, sometimes in the second row, and no third row at all.
Most red ballpoint pens, which means right-handed thumb, can be pressed only in three rows, sometimes in the second row, without pressing the first row at all,
The two hands are not single-sided or three-row in this way, there is no interference between the thumbs of both hands, the stability of holding the mobile phone is excellent, and the load is evenly distributed to both hands,
Third, as the shift button of the button assigned the letters mentioned in the previous video to see if the "6 new advantages of inputting words using the example of English word input" is implemented properly.
In conclusion, you can see if the two-handed thumb is small, comfortable, and fast.
In particular, in the past, notice how you can enter English text faster than Korean, which is the world's number one character on small keyboards.
<<<<<<<< 690-0026 >>>>>>>
And there are scenes that are input to the actual mobile phone,
The alphabet of my cell phone is different from the English standard keyboard like <Figure 03>.
Assume that it is the same as the English standard keyboard like <Figure 03>.
Samsung Electronics Anycall or Pantech's Sky and Curitel are also exported in the same alphabetical arrangement as the English standard keyboard as shown in <Figure 03>.
MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI
<<<<<< 1696-0022 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 702-0015 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 705-0017 >>>>> Fast on your phone
FOLLOW, NAKED, REMEMBER, LADY, COTTON, C I R C L E
<<<<<< 1707-0028 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 719-0013 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 725-0013 >>>>> Fast on your phone
W I N G SMALL GAME STORE
<<<<<< 1730-0022 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 732-0016 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 738-0015 >>>>> Fast on your phone
CONSIDER CAMP FAR C O P Y T A X I
<<<<<< 1746-0027 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 755-0018 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 762-0017 >>>>> Fast on your phone
S T Y L E S U S P E N D F E E D M O N O
<<<<<< 1768-0029 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 775-0017 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 790-0016 >>>>> Fast on your phone
SIX HAPPY ADD EGG MOON HIGH POKE YIELD
<<<<<< 1802-0031 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 803-0020 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 812-0018 >>>>> Fast on your phone
SEXY STRIKE POST POPCORN
<<<<<< 1815-0032 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 822-0018 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 827-0017 >>>>> Fast on your phone
POPOFF ING IN IS ED OF OFF BE
<<<<<< 1829-0038 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 835-0024 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 837-0022 >>>>> Fast on your phone
ON YOU I SS ZZZ LOVE
<<<<<< 1858-0031 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
<<<<<< 871-0017 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 872-0019 >>>>> Fast on your phone
Sequence number minutes seconds
1 674 29
2 688 1 47
690 26
1 1 Slow in Figure 03 3 696 22
1 2 Quickly in Figure 03 4 702 15
1 3 Fast on the phone 5 740 17
2 1 Slow down in Figure 03 6 707 28
2 2 Quickly in Figure 03 7 719 13
2 3 Fast on your phone 8 739 13
3 1 Slow down in Figure 03 9 730 22
3 2 Quickly in Figure 03 10 732 16
3 3 Fast on the phone 11 738 15
4 1 Slow in Figure 03 12 746 27
4 2 Quickly in Figure 03 13 755 18
4 3 Quickly on your mobile phone 14 762 17
5 1 Slow in Figure 03 15 768 29
5 2 Quickly in Figure 03 16 794 17
5 3 Quickly from your phone 17 790 16
6 1 Slow down in Figure 03 18 802 31
6 2 Quickly in Figure 03 19 803 20
6 3 Quickly on your phone 20 812 18
7 1 Slow down in Figure 03 21 815 32
7 2 Fast in Figure 03 22 822 18
7 3 Quickly from your phone 23 827 17
8 1 Slow in Figure 03 24 829 38
8 2 Quickly in Figure 03 25 835 24
8 3 Quickly on your phone 26 837 22
9 1 Slow in Figure 03 27 858 31
9 2 Quickly in Figure 03 28 871 17
9 3 Quickly on your phone 29 872 19
674
Slow to sum in Figure 03 260
Quickly sum in Figure 03 158
Quickly sum on phones 154
Total 674
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 14 1696
Slow typing of 40 English words
MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI
<<<<<< 696-0022 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
FOLLOW, NAKED, REMEMBER, LADY, COTTON, C I R C L E
<<<<<< 1707-0028 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
W I N G SMALL GAME STORE
<<<<<< 1730-0022 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
CONSIDER CAMP FAR C O P Y T A X I
<<<<<< 1746-0027 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
S T Y L E S U S P E N D F E E D M O N O
<<<<<< 1768-0029 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
SIX HAPPY ADD EGG MOON HIGH POKE YIELD
<<<<<< 1802-0031 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
SEXY STRIKE POST POPCORN
<<<<<< 1815-0032 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
POPOFF ING IN IS ED OF OFF BE
<<<<<< 1829-0038 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
ON YOU I SS ZZZ LOVE
<<<<<< 1858-0031 >>>>> Slow in Figure 03
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Videos Number 15
The reason why you typed English later than Korean
(= Two input methods make it possible to input Greek and Roman characters including English faster than Korean)
<<<<< 102-0717 0042 >>>>>
The English alphabet is 26 characters, and the Korean alphabet is 40 characters including 19 consonants and 21 vowels.
On the surface, typing in English should be much easier, but not.
It is said that Hangeul creation principle is scientific.
Of course, it is true that Hangeul Principle is a scientific character that cannot be found in the world, but it is not the fastest way to enter Hangul in the world on a mobile phone.
On computer keyboards, there are several phonemes that require you to use the shift button to type Hangul.
<<<<< 102-0719 0036 >>>>>
The reason why you can type Hangul faster than English in the mobile phone is because the input speed is slower than the speed of entering Korean, even if you input English in any way developed so far, including the conventional multi-tap method or T9 method.
Now, if you input English by twin input method, you can input English alphabet faster and faster than any other Korean input method than conventional Korean input method.
<<<<< 102-0721 0008 >>>>>
Now let's see what problems the twin input method solved when entering the English alphabet.
<<<<< 102-0723 0027 >>>>>
Two common methods of English input
Multi-tap method and T9 method
The T9 method was inconvenient and slower than the conventional Hangul input method because of the various disadvantages described in the video "Improvement of the T9 input method".
However, the T9 method is also faster than the conventional Hangul input method with the help of twin input method.
<<<<< 102-0724 0052 >>>>>
The most popular English input method, the multi-tap method
When entering different alphabet letters consecutively on the same button, the last letter had to be entered only after manually moving the cursor.
For example, to enter MONO
Press Button 6 once to enter Em,
Press the space button to move the cursor,
Press Button 6 three times to enter
Press the space button to move the cursor,
Press Button 6 twice to enter Yen
Press the space button to move the cursor,
Press button 6 three times to enter wrong.
<<<<< 102-0734 0031 >>>>>
The multi-tap method is very annoying because you need to move the cursor manually / to 4 rows / one more stroke, and it feels unnecessary. This phenomenon will now be called the same button problem.
This same button problem was the biggest factor that prevents you from entering English quickly. If you enter the twin input method, the same button problem may not occur at all.
<<<<< 102-0735 0039 >>>>>
The same button problem occurs in both Korean and Korean and Pantech's Sky or Cupidel input methods.
However, it only occurs when the consonant is input, and it also occurs only when the last character of the first letter, that is, the first letter of the base and the next letter, is assigned to the same button.
LG Electronics does not cause the same button problem at all. So LG Electronics is very popular among Korean teenagers and college students. They even hate Samsung's natural approach.
<<<<<< 102-0736 0012 >>>>>
Anyway, because of the same button problem, I was not able to enter English quickly.
Then, let's see why these same button problems occur in English.
<<<<< 102-0742 0036 >>>>>
First,
As the biggest factor,
In the case of English, the button assignment itself is not assigned to consonants and vowels separately, and even the spelling of words does not necessarily have vowels after the consonants and consonants after the vowels. It happens a lot.
So there are too many sequential two letters in the alphabet assigned to the same button, and there are quite a few words that contain three sequential letters.
<<<<< 102-0746 0019 >>>>>
Button 2 is assigned ABC, and if you look at the word CABBAGE, it is called CABBA and contains 5 consecutive letters assigned to Button 2.
The same can be seen below.
(((((
Abc sequence of button 2: cab, cabin, cabbage, back, etc.
Continuation of def on button 3: deface, defer, defeat, federal, etc.
Ghi succession of button 4: night, light, fight, delight, high etc
Mno sequence of buttons 6: mono, monster, Monday, monk, onmessage, etc.
Continuation of pqrs on button 7: spright, spring, sprinkle, etc.
Button 8 tuv sequence: tuva, tuvalu, etc.
)))))
<<<<< 102-0756 0017 >>>>>
The second,
Abbreviations such as English short words and chat terms do not create abbreviations with syllables combined with consonants and vowels like Hangul, but only after the first letter of the word, causing the same button problem more.
<<<<< 102-0766 0021 >>>>
(((((
General words: BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation)
Standard unit: AAA size battery
Chat term: bbl (be back later: I'll come back later)
)))))
.
<<<<< 102-0773 0029 >>>>>
Third
When a verb has a verb, such as STOP, which ends with a short vowel + terminal, like Stopped, stopping, stopper,
Add one more consonant, one more consonant, when you attach ed, the past tense, ing, the current tense, and er, which is the person or machine. It is.
<<<<< 102-0781 0026 >>>>
Fourthly
Ends with short vowels + terminals
For example, when there is an adjective named BIG, like big-bigger-biggest
Adjectives and adverbs add Gs one by one, ie, overwrite one more consonant and then add ~ er and ~ est.
<<<<< 102-0797 0007 >>>>>
Fifth
It also happens when you create a derived word with a lot of prefixes and suffixes.
<<<<< 102-0810 0048 >>>>>
E.g,
When prefixing IR with the word Irregular, the same letter R is contiguous twice,
When you add the suffix OUS to the root Autonom, M, the last alphabet of the root, and O, the first alphabet of the suffix, are both sequences of alphabets assigned to button 6,
The spelling of the prefix itself causes some problems,
Omni's omn is a sequence of letters assigned to button 6
Some spelling of the suffix itself causes problems,
ION, the noun ending, is a continuation of the alphabet assigned to button 6.
(((((
Example: A word created with the prefix ir: irregular
Words created with the suffix ous: autonomous
Spelling of the prefix itself: omni ~
Spelling of the suffix itself: ~ ion
)))))
<<<<< 102-0811? 0840 0014 >>>>>
There are also a lot of prefixes and suffixes.
You can use this prefix
You can use this prefix
This suffix
There is also this suffix.
<<<<< 102-0812 0019 >>>>
Sixth
The plural noun and the third person singular of the verb are appended with ~ s, so the same button problem occurs when entering the plural noun ending in p, q, r assigned to the same button as the s and the third person singular of the verb.
<<<<< 102-0815 0008 >>>>>
7th
The past and past participle forms of ~ ed are assigned to the same button (button 4).
<<<<< 102-0818 0003 >>>>>
Eighth
There are many other cases.
<<<<< 102-0819 0007 >>>>>>
In this way, I found out why there are more problems with the same button in English words than in Korean.
<<<<< 102-0821 0042 >>>>>
The reason for not being able to enter English quickly is that the same button problem causes more strokes.
There seems to be a psychological factor as well.
Firstly, it is more annoying to think that moving the cursor is unnecessary when the same button problem occurs.
Secondly, double-clicking is used a lot in computer mice, so
When entering English letters, pressing the same button three times in succession when entering the third letter of each button, C, F, I, L, O, R, V, or Y, seems to be quite disgusting.
<<<<< 102-0834 0037 >>>>
because,
Even when Korean phonemes are input in the conventional way, phonemes inputted by three or more different buttons by pressing different buttons do not seem to be so many.
E.g,
In the input method
To enter ㅑ | . When you type in three strokes, you don't think so many strokes.
When I type., I think that I need to type five strokes.
<<<<< 102-0837 0027 >>>>>
Anyway, the psychological matters mentioned so far have not been affected. In the past, English was not able to be entered faster than Korean. However, the twin input method solves all the problems that occur when entering English.
In addition, even when applying the twin input method is a little more convenient when entering English than Hangul.
<<<<< 102-0999? 0841 0003 >>>>.
Please refer to the detailed explanation here.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 16 247
Introduction to Japanese Characters and Problems of Conventional Input Methods
Let's introduce Japanese characters for a while and learn about the problems of Japanese character input method in the conventional mobile phone.
Japanese characters are called 50 degrees, so you can easily think of them as 50.
The English alphabet has the same pronunciation, but it is divided into upper and lower case letters.
The pronunciation of Japanese is the same, but it is divided into hiragana and katakana.
So you can think of 50 Hiragana and 50 Katakana.
(<Hiragana ticket>)
Should we learn about hiragana?
Hiragana 50 notes are like this.
(Read)
You can think of it like this 50.
(<Katagana ticket>)
Katakana 50-degree table is like this.
Only the letter shape is different from hiragana and pronunciation is the same as hiragana.
(Read)
You can think of it like this 50.
In addition, 5 characters per button are assigned to Hiragana mode and Katakanaga mode on buttons 0-9 and 10 buttons of the mobile phone.
In hiragana input mode (<hiragana picture>) hiragana is assigned to each button 5
In katakana input mode, (5 katakana pictures) are assigned to each of the 5 katakana buttons.
However, as shown in <Figure 17>, the first letter of the five letters assigned to each button is written in hiragana as the representative letter.
Even if the representative letter is written, it is not to be confused.
because,
If button 5 is marked with “na,” button 5 is assigned to “na ni nu no no.”
This is because if button 6 is marked `` ha '', but 6 is assigned to `` ha hifu he ho ''.
so
E.g,
In hiragana mode,
To enter hiragana, you must press 1 to 5 times.
Even if there are only three alphabets per button on the English keyboard like <Figure 03>, it is difficult to input by conventional input method on small pad. I explained that this solved nicely.)
(Figure 17)
Japanese characters are more clamoring because they have five letters per button.
In addition, if you enter the letters assigned to the same button continuously, you will have a lot of inconvenience to move the cursor as you would when entering conventional English.
So, if you enter some letters of the word you want to enter, the phone presents the candidate words containing those letters and uses the PREDICTION, that is, the prediction function, to select the word you want.
If you take an example with Korean words
To enter ‘학 dance’,
If you enter one letter of `scientist` as a candidate word
Student, bachelor cap, school corps, department, academic, semester, academic, abuse, grade, academic, academic, learning, academic, school, school district, school, academic, academic, academic, parent, parent, academic, academic, academic, academic, Candidates such as school days are presented, and the user selects 'school dance'.
In fact, typing Japanese in this way requires a lot of strokes because you have to move the cursor several times to the desired word.
Nowadays, new words, foreign words, / Korean and Japanese "investigations" are often not in the DB, so it's a multi-tap method.
So I try to use commercial phrases such as 'Hello?', 'Where are you?' For Japanese mobile phones, but it's still inconvenient.
(Figure 18)
In Korean input, such PREDICTION, that is, prediction function is rarely needed.
If twin input method is applied to Japanese character input, without such prediction function,
As English alphabet input is improved by twin input method, it can input faster and more conveniently than Korean.
Japanese characters are faster and more convenient than Korean. Special characters such as punctuation marks and picture emoticons can also be easily entered in two characters without changing the character mode in Japanese character mode.
Of course, the first letter only needs to be pressed once.
Of course, when applying the twin input method when entering the English alphabet, you can use the same method of pressing the same button multiple times, which is a conventional multi-tap input method, you can use the twin input method without changing the character mode.
And
On button 1 of the conventional keyboard as shown in <Figure 17>. @ /: Special characters are assigned, but such a very small number of special characters cannot be input in Japanese character input mode, and it is inconvenient to input the character mode only by changing the character mode to English mode or special character mode.
(Figure 18)
When the twin input method is applied, these punctuation marks and picture emoticons can be inputted in two ways without changing the character mode in hiragana mode or katakana mode without changing the character mode to the special character mode. can.
I'll explain it in the next video.
Please refer to the description for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 17 274
Improved Japanese input method
(Figure 18)
The method of applying the twin input method to Japanese input on the small keypad is the same as the method of improving the English input method.
For more details, please refer to the English input video description and detailed explanation, and I will explain briefly with the focus on pictures.
The state of the keyboard to which the twin input method can be applied does not matter.
As shown in <Figure 17>, you can apply the existing keyboard as it is.
As shown in <Figure 19.5>, one red punctuation mark can be added to each button and applied.
As shown in <Figure 18>, you can add one more emoticon to the conventional keyboard.
Even in this state
For example, in hiragana mode,
Take Button 6 as an example.
The five hiragana and question marks, including hiragana and `` ha, '' are defined as six groups in the first group.
The first hiragana assigned to each button can be entered as one stroke,
You can enter 2nd to 5th hiragana,
You can enter 5 katakana, punctuation marks like question marks, and picture emoticons like bouquets in Hiragana mode with 2 strokes without changing the text mode.
Then let's enter it.
Button 6 has hiragana ‘하’ as the representative letter. In other words, button 6 has been assigned to `` Hahifuheho '' (Please refer to the previous video, Japanese Character Introduction Video).
In hiragana mode, hiragana `` hahifuheho '' and 6 question marks are defined as the first group of button 6, and input.
‘Hahifuheho question mark’
(The first letter, hiragana 'ha' is entered with a single stroke, and the rest is entered with two strokes.)
In hiragana mode, Katakana "hahifuheho" and 6 bouquets are defined as the second group of buttons 6, and in hiragana mode, you can enter like this without changing the character mode.
Katagana `` Hahifuheho Bouquet ''
To introduce the principle very briefly,
Button 6
Of each group
Use shift buttons 1 or 3 to enter the first letter.
Use shift buttons 4 or 6 to enter the second letter.
Use shift buttons 7 or 9 to enter the third letter.
Use shift buttons 2 or 8 to enter the fourth letter.
Use shift button 5 or 0 to enter the fifth letter.
Use shift buttons * or # to enter the sixth letter,
In hiragana mode
Of the letters of the first group
The first letter hiragana ‘하’ was entered once by pressing
In the second to sixth letters, while holding down the shift button, shortly press the button 6 to which the letter you want to enter is assigned.
Of the second group of letters
The first to sixth letters were entered by pressing and holding the shift button for about 0.5 seconds while holding down the shift button.
The detailed description can be found in the English input improvement video or the detailed commentary.
Of course, according to the conventional method, the multi-tap method by pressing the same button several times with one hand, you can enter without changing the character mode, such as input without changing the character mode.
And when entering the letters assigned to the same button consecutively, there was a conventional inconvenience to move the cursor, which solves it.
And there are many other advantages.
For input of Greek and Roman characters including English, the twin input method will be a great gift.
Twin input method will be a blessing to input Japanese characters.
As shown in <Figure 19>, you can move the alphabet under the number and place it, and you can apply it by adding more picture emoticons.
Even in this state
For example, in hiragana mode,
Take Button 6 as an example.
In hiragana mode, hiragana `` hahifuheho '' and 6 question marks are defined as the first group of button 6, and input.
‘Hahifuheho question mark’
(The first letter, hiragana 'ha' is entered with a single stroke, and the rest is entered with two strokes.)
In hiragana mode, 6 lips, rice, pepper, anku, cards, and masked expressions are defined as the second group.
Lips, rice, pepper, anku, card, mask
The input principle is the same as explained when you input the letters of button 6 in <Figure 18>.
It is also possible to further expand the combination of the various keyboard states mentioned above and the various states that have been devoted to some of the following display screens.
Display screen
It can be applied by adding sentence marks as in <Figure 16.1>.
As shown in <Figure 16>, you can add and apply the emoji first.
Or on the display screen
The first page is shown in Figure 16.1.
The second page is shown in Figure 16.
Subsequent pages may continue to assign special characters.
Such special characters on the display screen can also be easily entered by defining the third group of characters without changing the character mode.
Among the letters on the display, cards, cooking knives, and masked expressions will now be defined as the third group of button 6, and they will be entered by pressing the buttons on the keyboard.
(<Figure 19>)
Card, cooking, mask
Characters of 3 groups were entered by double-clicking the shift button and holding down the button 6 to which the character to be input was assigned.
Now, the detailed description of what was just demonstrated and explained, and the detailed description of the display of the special character table on the display screen with the call key and the invisibility, or the change of the special character table page on the display screen with the volume control button, can be found in the English input improvement video or detailed explanation. You can see it.
(<Samsung Patent Information>)
Note that
There is a Japanese input method patent (patent number 10-2006-0023897) that was registered in 2007 by Samsung Electronics.
To introduce the content
Assuming ABCDE is assigned to button 2,
When button 2 is pressed, ABCDE assigned to button 2 appears on the display screen with the cursor at C.
At this time, if you press OK button, C is input.
Press the left button once to enter B,
If you press the left direction button twice or press and hold A,
Press the right button once to enter D,
Press the right arrow button twice or press and hold the button to enter E.
The disadvantage of this method
One tarot does not allow you to enter letters and at least two strokes are required.
The first and fifth letters need three strokes or a long press.
In addition, the copper wire is too large because you need to operate the direction buttons that are out of the 12 buttons of buttons 0 to 9 and * # which are small pads.
There are also many advantages of the twin input method such as multi-tap or T9.
Please refer to the description for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 18 152
Introduction of the method to the Samsung Anycall input method
Let me introduce the introduction of the twin input method without changing the character mode to the conventional Samsung Anycall input method.
(Figure 22)
We will explain how to combine the input method and twin input method of Samsung Electronics without changing the character mode.
If you watched the principle video of the twin input method, the introduction video of the English input method, and the two English input method videos, there is nothing to say.
If you don't understand, now you can watch 4 videos related to English input method.
The conventional keyboard of Samsung Anycall is shown in <Figure 20>.
The green letters ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ in <Figure 21> are not marked and are hidden.
To introduce the conventional heaven and earth input method
The vowel is entered by combining Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ),
Consonants are multitaped and pressed several times until the desired letter appears.
Hangul phonemes are a total of 40, including 19 consonants and 21 vowels.
<Figure 21.5> shows how to input 40 Hangul phonemes in the traditional Cheonjiin way.
In the summary at the end of the table, Figure 21.5,
13 phonemes requiring 3 strokes
Four phonemes that require four strokes
There are two phonemes that need five strokes,
As a result, you can see that there are a total of 19 phonemes that require 3 or more strokes.
Phonemes that require four or five strokes are often at-bats and a lot of typos.
For example, to enter ㅞ
Buttons 3, 2, 2, 1, and 1 in <Figure 20> should be pressed in sequence, but if you press wrongly, you will often have to re-enter from the beginning.
However, as shown in <Figure 22.7>, the conventional keyboard is assigned to / completed phonemes in / red that are not assigned to / completed.
Even if you can input as it is, you can input 19 phonemes that require three or more in two without using the twin input method in the conventional heaven and earth input mode without changing the text mode.
In other words, all 40 Korean phonemes can be entered as one or two.
The phoneme that can be input with two strokes in the conventional way is also a more comfortable posture, faster speed, can be inputted in two strokes without changing the character mode. You can also make the consonant crash almost impossible.
The auto-cursor time setting method introduced in the detailed manual or the twin-input-only mode does not cause consonant collision at all.
As shown in <Figure 22>, special characters are additionally assigned, and special characters can also be input with 2 ~ 3 strokes in the natural input mode without changing the character mode to special character mode.
In the conventional input mode, the twin input method can be used and the conventional input method can be used. Therefore, even if the user prefers the conventional method, there is no inconvenience at all. Not at all.
In addition, in the conventional input method mode, users who want to input Korean characters or special characters quickly by using the twin input method without changing the character mode can be satisfied.
Actually
The state of the keyboard to which the twin input method can be applied does not matter.
Even in the same state as in <Figure 20>, / using the call key, which has no response in the text input mode, as the toggle key
As shown in <Figure 22.8>, a part of the display screen is dedicated.
In the conventional keyboard, red phonemes that are not assigned to completion / red phonemes are displayed on the display screen, which is assigned to completion, and the red phoneme can also be entered into the phone by pressing the actual keyboard without changing the character mode. Of course, you can press the call key again to make the virtual keyboard disappear. If you remember the red phone assignment status, you can enter the red phone.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 22.7>,
It is also possible to apply additionally assigned to the actual keyboard that is the traditional heaven and earth / red phonemes that are not assigned to completion / to the keyboard additionally,
As shown in Figure 22.6,
You can also assign additional punctuation marks (such as??, () ‘“ / ~!).
(In the past, English alphabets were written under Korean phonemes, but the English alphabet was written under numbers to make room.)
In addition
As shown in Figure 22.5,
You can assign additional pictures to the emoticons,
As shown in Figure 22,
You can also assign additional picture emoticons.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 22.4>, you can assign and add one more emoji.
In addition, by combining the various actual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states that dedicate some of the following display screens, even the special characters on the display screen can be directly input in 2-3 letters in the normal text mode.
Display screen
As shown in <Figure 16.2>, you can add and apply phonemes that require 3 or more strokes.
It can be applied by adding sentence marks as in <Figure 16.1>.
As shown in <Figure 16>, you can add and apply the emoji first.
Or on the display screen
The first page looks like <Figure 16.2>.
The second page is shown in Figure 16.1.
The third page is like <Figure 16>.
Subsequent pages may continue to assign special characters.
Part of the display screen input
In the past, special characters were entered as such.
As in <Figure 15>, a virtual keyboard showing Korean characters is displayed on the display screen only in the Korean input mode so that Korean characters can be input from Japanese mobile phones.
The method of inputting special characters through the display screen I suggest is not to enter special characters by changing to special character mode.
In the character mode, the “call” key, etc., which has no “no” response, is used as a toggle key to show or hide the special character virtual keyboard that dedicates part of the display screen.
The special feature is that / special characters appear in normal text mode / so that special characters can be easily entered in normal text mode.
In the text mode, you can make as many special character assignment page as usual by using two volume control buttons that have no response / volume up / down as page change button on display screen.
With this improved method, it is possible to input special characters without changing the character mode in the normal character mode, but it is also possible to change and enter the special character mode in the conventional manner.
Please refer to the description for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 19 186
How to apply to Samsung Anycall Cheoin input method 1
(Figure 22) (Just)
Following the introduction on how to improve
Let's take a closer look at how to apply the twin input method to Samsung Anycall's input method.
It is the same way to improve English input method.
As I mentioned in the previous video,
The keyboard should be like <Figure 20>.
As shown in <Fig. 22.8>, the display screen is allocated a part of the display screen, and / red phonemes / red phonemes which are not assigned to completion type can be allocated to completion type in the traditional keyboard.
Or you can set up the keyboard as in <Figure 22.7> and display screen as <Figure 16.1>.
First, the keyboard / will be like <Figure 22> among the various keyboards presented in the previous video description.
The display screen will be described with an example as shown in Figure 16.
(Figure 22)
While being able to input by conventional way,
Without changing the text mode,
You can apply twin input method.
Twin input method
If you press the letter button while holding the shift button on the computer keyboard, the second letter is entered,
In the keyboard of the phone is to use the shift button to enter the second to sixth characters,
Not actually adding multiple shift buttons,
It is a method to shift the conventional buttons *, #, 0 to 9 for a while.
And if you choose different types of shift buttons as twins
When a button is pressed once, the first letter is entered as in the conventional case (in some cases, a button 1 or 3 can be used as a shift button for inputting the first letter assigned to each button).
Use button 4 or 6 as the shift button to enter the second letter assigned to each button,
Use button 7 or 9 as a shift button to enter the third letter assigned to each button,
Use button 2 or 8 as a shift button to enter the fourth letter assigned to each button,
Use button 5 or 0 as a shift button to enter the fifth letter assigned to each button,
We will use button * or # as a shift button to enter the sixth letter assigned to each button.
To summarize the function of the shift button, once again, I decided 1,2,3,4,5,6.
(Of course, you can set differently. You can easily do 1,2,3,4,5,6 and so on.)
Let's divide the letters of each button into two groups.
When the current text mode is natural text input mode /
Based on the button 6
Easily
The first group is vowels, vowels, four,
The second group can be divided into left parenthesis, broken heart, lips, bob, and four
Slightly more difficult
The first group consists of ㅌ, ㅌ, ㄸ, vowels, left parenthesis, 6 broken hearts,
The second group is divided into lips, rice, and two.
(How to type in easy division can be found by listening to the following explanation of difficult division.)
Let's explain based on button 6 when the current text mode is the text input mode.
Let's first describe how to enter the first group of buttons 6, ㅌ, ㅌ, ㄸ, vowel ㅛ, left parenthesis, and 6 broken hearts.
C, just press the button 6 once to enter,
Press the button 6 while double-clicking the button 6 or holding down the button 4 or the button 6, which is a shift button for inputting the second letter, without changing the character mode. (But you cannot press Button 6 again while holding Button 6, so you can press Button 6 while pressing Button 4 to enter it. As will be explained later, you can press Button 6 while pressing Button 4 rather than double-clicking. It is more advantageous to input by pressing, so it is better to enter by pressing button 6 while pressing button 4).
To input 버튼, press Button 6 three times in succession, or press Button 6 while pressing Button 7 or Button 9, which is a shift button that allows the third character to be entered without changing the character mode. (By pressing the button 9, you can press the button 6 because the two hands are in three rows, so the interference between the two hands and the stability of holding the phone are not good. Would be much more comfortable?
In this way, there are two shift buttons that perform the same function, so the user can select and use them conveniently.)
To enter the vowel, press button 6 four times in succession, or press button 6 while pressing button 2 or button 8, which is a shift button for inputting the fourth letter, without changing the character mode,
The left parenthesis is entered by pressing button 6 five times in succession, or by pressing the button 6 while pressing the button 5 or button 0, which is a shift button for entering the fifth letter without changing the character mode,
The broken heart is entered by pressing button 6 six times in succession, or by pressing the button 6, which is a shift button for entering the sixth character, or # while pressing the button 6, without changing the character mode. Would be much easier to use as a shift button?
Let's quickly type ㄷ, ㅌ, ㅛ, vowel 괄, left brace, broken heart again.
Type 이렇게, ㅌ, ㄸ, vowel, left parenthesis, broken heart.
In addition, the conventional method, the multi-tap method, that is, even if you press the same button several times, you can limit the added characters than the conventional input only so that you can enter in the same situation as before.
Then, for example
If you press the button 6 several times, you can enter / /, ㅌ, 순환 only to cycle, vowel ㅛ, parentheses, broken heart, lips, bob is limited to the twin input method.
In addition, if you press button 1 several times, you can enter only / vowels, and the rest is limited to vowels ㅏ, clear, period, single quote, despair, and cars only by the twin input method.
Button 9
You know how to enter, ㅉ, ㅉ,, right parenthesis, heart, and how to enter other buttons.
And
Hangul phonemes are a total of 40, including 19 consonants and 21 vowels.
Entering 40 Korean phonemes in the conventional Cheonjiin way, as shown in the summary at the end of the <Figure 21.5> table
13 phonemes requiring 3 strokes
Four phonemes that require four strokes
There are two phonemes that need five strokes,
As a result, you can see that there are a total of 19 phonemes that require 3 or more strokes.
Using the twin input method,
You can input 19 phonemes that require 3 or more inputs in 2 strokes, even if you can input them as they are.
In other words, all 40 Korean phonemes can be entered as one or two. You can also eliminate consonant collisions.
In addition, in the improved Korean phoneme assignment, including <Figure 22>, only 40 Korean phonemes were assigned as complete.
You can also assign only the phonemes that need 4 and 5 strokes to be completed.
Only phonemes that require 3 or more hits can be assigned as complete.
The second group of button 6, Lip, Bob, and how to enter text on the display screen without changing the text mode will be explained in the next video. Very easy.
Please refer to the manual for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 20 219
How to apply to the Samsung Anycall input method 2
(Improve your way to heaven and earth)
(Figure 22)
next,
In the 2nd group of button 6, Lip and Bob,
Let's learn how to input without changing the text mode.
Input method of 2nd group of each button
In the plain text mode, we will use the example of pressing the letter button for about 0.5 seconds while holding down the shift button without changing the text mode.
(Of course, you can use other push methods.)
That way,
The first character of the second group of buttons 6 is 0.5 seconds after pressing button 1 or button 3, which is a shift button that allows the first character to be entered without changing the character mode in the plain character mode. Long press to enter. Tadak (depending on the rules, you can press and hold the button 6 0.5 seconds long, without the need for a shift button.
However, you can press and hold for about 1 second in the normal plain text mode to enter numbers as they are.)
Bob, the second character of the second group of button 6, presses and holds the button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while holding down the button 4, which is a shift button for inputting the second character, without changing the character mode in the plain text mode. Enter. Tadaak
If you increase the number of special characters
As shown in Figure 22.4, the second group of buttons
Lips, Bob, Cherry, Cooking, Cards, Masks
The third letter of the second group of button 6 is Cheonji, and in the normal character mode, the button 6 is pressed for about 0.5 seconds while the button 7 or button 9, which is a shift button for inputting the third letter, is changed without changing the character mode. Press and hold to enter. (Much easier to use Button 7 as a shift button than Button 9?)
The fourth knife of the second group of button 6, in the plain text mode, while pressing the button 2 or button 8, which is the shift button for inputting the fourth letter without changing the character mode, presses the button 6 0.5. Long press for seconds
The fifth character of the second group of buttons 6 is the heaven and earth mode. In the normal character mode, hold down button 6 or button 0, which is a shift button for inputting the fifth character, without changing the character mode. Press and hold to enter.
The sixth letter of the second group of buttons 6 is a masked expression, while holding down the button 6 or the #, which is a shift button for inputting the sixth letter without changing the character mode in the plain text mode, the button 6 is 0.5 Long press for seconds. (It's much easier to use Button * as a shift button than Button #?)
The second group of buttons 6
Let's quickly enter the lips, rice, cherry, cooking, card, and facial expressions once again. (Lips, rice, cherry, cooking, cards, masks)
In the past, it was inconvenient to input even if there were only three letters on the button. However, the twin input method makes it easy to enter even though there are 12 letters on the button.
In addition, in the following video description, even special characters on the display screen can be entered without changing the character mode in normal character mode.
Now, the homework is how to express the many characters assigned to the button to the user.
If you have left braces, broken hearts, lips, and rice,
In the plain character mode, the third character of the second group, the lips, is entered by pressing and holding the button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while pressing the button 7 or the button 9, which is the third button to enter the third character. (Much easier to use Button 7 as a shift button than Button 9?)
In plain text mode, the fourth letter of the second group, Bob, is entered by pressing and holding button 6 for about 0.5 seconds while pressing button 2 or button 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter.
(Figure 22)
Although you used long press, which is a pressing method that you do not want to speak when you input Hangul phonemes,
When entering a special character, conventionally, the character mode should be changed to the special character mode and input, and even if the special character mode has been changed, the page needs to be changed several times to find and enter the desired special character, and again, the normal character mode. I needed a lot of bats to get back to
By using the twin method, it is much easier to input the text without changing the text mode.
You can see how to enter the two group letters assigned to other buttons without explaining them.
How to input the characters on the display screen, the third group of button 6, without changing the text mode will be explained in the next video.
Please refer to the commentary for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 21 230
How to apply to Samsung Anycall's input method 3
(Enter the special characters displayed on the display screen)
(Figure 16)
next
Let's learn how to input the displayed items on the display screen in normal text mode without changing the text mode.
To enter more special characters in normal character mode, without changing the character mode, you can dedicate a portion of the display screen to show `special character assignments like this.
For example, in text mode, you can use the call button which does not respond when pressed, as a / toggle key to show or hide the special character table on the display screen.
Again, the keyboard returns to the state shown in Figure 22.
If you press the call button in normal text mode and the special character table as shown in <Figure 16> appears on the display screen, let's input the special characters on the display screen without changing the text mode in the normal text mode.
Special characters on the display screen are now considered the third group.
Now, let's talk about how to enter the third group of buttons 6: cards, cooking knives, and three masked expressions.
Input method of the third group of each button
For example, in the plain text mode, without changing the text mode, double-click the shift button, and then press the text button without releasing it.
(Of course, you can use other push methods.)
That way,
The first letter of the third group of buttons 6 is shown in (<Figure 22>). In normal character mode, double-click the button 1 or button 3, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the first letter without changing the character mode Later, keep your hands on the button 6 to enter. like this
(Figure 16)
In the third character of the third group of button 6, the cooking knife has a double-click on the shift button, which allows you to enter the second character in the normal character mode, (<Figure 22>). Keep your hands on the button 6 to enter. like this
(Figure 16)
The third character of the third group of button 6, the masked expression, (<Figure 22>) is double-clicked on the button 7 or button 9, which is a shift button that allows the third character to be entered without changing the character mode in the normal mode. After clicking, release the button 6 to enter. like this
In the text entry mode, you can also change the page of the special character table on the display by pressing the Volume Control button.
Even if the page is changed, special characters on the display screen can be entered using the third group input method.
However, you can change to special character mode and select and enter the desired special character.
And as another way,
Special characters on the display screen as shown in Figure 16 are regarded as part of the second group.
3 cards, cooking knife, mask
, (Figure 22)
In normal text mode, the second and third letters of the second group of buttons 6 are regarded as the 3rd, 4th, and 5th letters of the second group of buttons 6, followed by the lips and bobs. You can also
The second group of letters input method was explained in the previous video, so even if you do not explain again, you will know.
You can also press the call button again to hide the special characters on the display screen. Even if you don't see the special character table, you can enter it as the third group input method if you memorize the <Figure 16> table just shown.
And keyboard is the same as in <Figure 20>.
On the first page of the display screen, all phonemes are assigned to completion as shown in <Figure 22.8>.
The second page of the display screen is assigned with punctuation as shown in <Figure 16.1>.
The third page of the display screen is shown in <Figure 16>, and the following pages can continue to assign special characters.
In this case, only the red of the phonemes on the first page of the display screen as shown in <Figure 22.8> is added as compared to the conventional keyboard <Figure 20>.
The letters on the conventional keyboard as shown in Figure 20 and the letters on the first page of the display screen as shown in Figure 22.8 are shift buttons, which are the normal twin input mode, without changing the conventional input mode or text mode. While holding down, press the letter button briefly to enter the first group of character input method,
Characters on the second page or more of the display screen can be entered in the second group character input method by pressing and holding the shift button for about 0.5 seconds.
How to enter the 3 group letters assigned to other buttons will be understood without explanation.
Please refer to the description for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 22 101-0016
6 New Advantages in Entering Words Using Hangul Words as an Example
<<<<<< 101-0016 0048 >>>>>
Let's enter a few words in parallel with the twin input method in the Korean input method that is the top of Anycall of Samsung Electronics.
To tell you the conclusion
As shown in <Figure 20>, we can explain how the twin input method can be used in parallel with the conventional keyboard as it is.
For the sake of explanation, for example, as shown in Figure 22.7, a keyboard with a red finished phoneme is added to a conventional keyboard.
'Knife, 뺐, Say, Saw, Knot, Hyo, Frame' can be entered easily and quickly as twin input method as follows.
<<<<<< 101-0042 0025 >>>>>
Knife, knives, say, sure, filial piety, quick
<<<<<< 101-0050 0025 >>>>
Let's type fast on your phone
Knife, knives, say, sure, filial piety, quick
<<<<<< 101-0060 0133 >>>>>>
Should we try again slowly?
Kitchen Knife, Knife, Saying, Sure, Hyo, Frame
<<<<<< 101-0076 0100 >>>>>>>
In this way, even if the keyboard is a type of the phone is additionally assigned to the conventional keyboard,
In the conventional Hangul input methods mode including the celestial input method each time you input one phoneme, you can input the same as the conventional input methods such as one-handed input. I know you can do it.
Let's take a look at some of the advantages of the twin input method.
There are many advantages to this
The conventional Korean input methods are LG Electronics Cyon's EZ method, Pantech's Curitel or Sky method, Motorola's method, or conventional Korean input methods, whether English, Japanese, or twin input methods. The advantages appear the same.
<<<<<< 101-0080 0224 >>>>>>
As mentioned in the detailed commentary or in the previous video, the type of keyboard to which the twin input method can be applied is
As shown in <Figure 22.7>, the red finalized phoneme is added to the conventional keyboard, or
Additional assignment of punctuation marks as shown in <Figure 22.6> or
(<Figure 22>) The additional characters such as punctuation marks or picture emoticons are assigned.
The keyboard is the same as the previous one as shown in <Figure 20>, and it is also possible to allocate a part of the display screen to allocate the completed phonemes as shown in <Figure 22.8>.
In this form,
If you have a touch pad keyboard, you can just touch these parts and type.
In the case of general push button keyboard, the push keyboard is the same as in the conventional <Figure 20>.
In the text input mode, there is no response even when pressed, for example, using the call key as a toggle key to show or hide the virtual keyboard that now dedicates a part of the display screen as shown in (Fig. 22.8).
Now, in the text input mode, press the call key to make these virtual keyboards visible, and then press the keyboard with the actual push button to enter them.
Of course, even if you press the call key again to hide the virtual keyboard on the display screen, you can enter additional phonemes including red phonemes as twin input methods.
<<<< 104-0081 0008? 104-0520 >>>>>
Think of the call button as a function key to show or hide the cheat sheet.
<<<<< 104-0082 0024? 104-0527 >>>>>
It is as if Korean characters are inputted from Samsung's mobile phones exported to Japan. In the Korean input mode, a part of the display screen is devoted to display a virtual Korean keyboard. Fig. 17) This is the same as typing the actual keyboard with no Korean characters displayed.
<<<<< 104-0083 0014? 104-0516 >>>>>
Now in a wide variety of forms, including examples
As shown in <Figure 22.7>, I will explain with the form of adding red completed phonemes to the conventional keyboard.
<<<<< 104-0084 0013? 104-0533 >>>>>
You can think of this as pressing the keyboard and typing in the twin character input method in the same state as in the conventional case.
<<<<< 104-0085 0014? 104-0517 >>>>>
This is to explain that the twin input method is efficient even when inputting general Korean phonemes, not special characters.
<<<<<<< 101-0083 0112 >>>>>>
And, please pay attention to the following advantages of twin input method.
First, shift buttons with the same function are arranged in rows 1 and 3, with twins on both sides.
Most blue ballpoint pens, which mean left-handed thumb, can be pushed in only one row, sometimes in the second row, and no third row at all.
Most red ballpoint pens, which means right-handed thumb, can be pressed only in three rows, sometimes in the second row, without pressing the first row at all,
The two hands are not single-sided or three-row in this way, there is no interference between the thumbs of both hands, the stability of holding the mobile phone is excellent, and the load is evenly distributed to both hands,
Secondly, we have the following advantages mentioned in the video, "6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example."
Let's try to type words again and again.
<<<<<<< 101-0087 0125 >>>>>>
The first advantage mentioned in the video is "6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example."
Even if you enter phonemes assigned to the same button consecutively, let's type “knife” as an example of the advantage that you don't need to move the cursor artificially with the space-only button or the right button.
In the conventional method, since the a and the letter 's' are assigned to button 4, which is the same button, and must be entered continuously, after entering a, move the cursor with the right button and type ㅋ. Therefore, excessive copper wire to the right button is needed, and it seems to be doing unnecessary work, and it causes psychologically significant stress,
If you enter the twin input method
When you enter ㅋ after entering a, you can press the button 4 while holding down the button 6 from the button 4 or 6, which is a shift button to input the second letter, without having to move the cursor with the right button. Just type
Reduces the number of strokes by one stroke, no excessive movement and no psychological stress.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 23 101-0096
6 New Advantages in Entering Words Using Hangul Words as an Example
<<<<<< 101-0096 0156 >>>>>>
But for example, if you try to type
The support of the song "a" and "gi" (a) are contiguous twice, although the frequency is very small compared to the conventional method.
If the first letter of a button is two consecutive times, even if the twin input method is applied, when the multi-tap method and the twin input method, which are conventional consonant input methods, are used, the cursor is moved by using the right button as before. I think there will be situations where you might need to move the.
Instead of using the right button to move the cursor first, while holding down the letter 'a', the shift button for entering the first letter, or the button 3 or the triple button 3, The copper wire is much smaller, more convenient and faster than pressing the right button.
In other words, type ㄱㄱ like this. A
Secondly, like the Japanese mobile phone, the auto cursor time setting can be adjusted so that if the cursor is moved automatically within 0.5 seconds after some characters are displayed, it is automatically 0.5 even if the cursor is not moved with the right button. You can also move the cursor after a few seconds.
Thirdly, the twin input mode can be set so that the first letter of each button can be entered unconditionally without the shift button, and the cursor can be moved with the right button.
<<<<<< 101-0109 0120 >>>>>>
In the video titled "6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example,"
When there is a sequence of letters in the same order for each button, you can use the shift button you pressed in the back as it is, so let's type '뺐' and 'say' as an example of the advantage that the number of strokes is greatly reduced.
If you enter 'stake' in the conventional way, you need 9 shots.
7, 7, 7, 1, 2, 1, 8, 8, 8
ㅃ ㅣ. ㅣ ㅆ need a total of nine strokes
If you apply the twin input method, you need only 4 shots instead of 9 hits.
9 + 7 + 5 + 8
ㅃ ㅐ ㅆ
ㅃ is the third letter of button 7, ㅐ is the third letter of button 5, and ㅆ is the third letter of button 8.
While holding down the button 9 with your right hand, press the buttons 7, 5, and 8 with the left hand in order to enter ㅃ, ,, ㅆ.
<<<<<<< 101-0113 0121 >>>>>>
Let's type `say`.
If you input in the conventional way of heaven and earth, a total of 12 strokes are required.
8, 8, 1, 2, 5, 5, 0, 0, 1, 2, 5, 5
ㅎ ㅣ. ㄹ ㅁ ㅣ. D
If you apply the twin input method, you need only 7 hits instead of 12 hits.)
6 + 8 + 1 + 5 + 0 + 1 + 5
ㅎ ㅏ ㄹ ㅁ ㅏ ㄹ
`ㅎ, ㅏ, ㄹ, ㅁ, ㅏ, ㄹ` is the second letter of buttons 8,1,5,0,1,5,
While holding down the button 6 with the right hand, press the button 8,1,5,0,1,5 with the left hand in order to enter the second letter. , ㅏ, ㄹ `,
<<<<<< 101-0114 0112 >>>>>
In addition, you can also input two vowels, ㅙ and 5, which were required for five inputs in the celestial input method.
While holding down the button 8 from the button 2 or 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter,
Press button * to enter ,,
Press button # to enter ㅞ.
Let's type "pretty".
Since ㄲ is the third letter of button 4, from the button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter, press 4 4 while pressing button 9 to enter ㄲ,
Since ㅙ is the fourth letter of the button *, from the button 2 or 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter, hold down the button 8 and enter 8.
<<<<< 101-0119 0155 >>>>>>>
“The third advantage mentioned in the video,“ 6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example, ”
As the letter button is shifted, the letter button for entering the previous letter becomes the shift button for entering the next letter. As an example of the advantage that the copper line is 0, minimizing the copper line and saving almost one stroke, let's enter the ‘ko’ of ‘must’.
Entering in the conventional way is as follows: (Total 5 strokes are required.)
4,4,4,2,3
The twin input method is as follows. (4 shots required)
9 + 4, 4 + 3
ㄲ ㅗ
(It can be said that the difference is only one stroke, which is only 20% difference, but it is much faster because it uses both hand loads evenly and there are very few moving lines.)
ㄲ Since this is the third letter of button 4
While holding down the button 9, the shift button that allows you to enter the third letter, press the button 4 with your left hand to enter ㄲ,
Is the second letter of button 3
I want to press the left button on the button 4, which is the shift button that allows me to enter the second letter, but since the left hand is already on the button 4,
Press button 4 immediately, then press button 3 with your right hand to enter ㅗ.
So you can type this quickly ('pretty').
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video24 0125
Six Advantages of Entering Words Using Hangul Words as Examples
<<<<<< 101-0125 0133 >>>>>
The fourth advantage mentioned in the video, "6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example,"
As the letter button is shifted, the shift button for inputting the previous letter has the effect of minimizing the copper line and saving almost one stroke, with the copper line being 0, which becomes the letter button of the latter letter. As an example, let's enter '꼭 ㄱ' of 'must'.
ㅗ ㄱ
Is the second letter of button 3
While holding down Button 4 with your left hand, press Button 3 with your right hand to enter ㅗ.
A is the first letter of button 4
I'm going to press button 4 with my left hand, but since my left hand was already on button 4, with the copper line 0, just press button 4 and type a.
So you can type quickly ('ㅗㄱ')
In the end, the word becomes a third and fourth advantage.
Let's enter it again. exactly
<<<<<< 101-0131 0134 >>>>>>
The fifth advantage mentioned in the video, "6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example,"
The advantages of the third and fourth may occur at the same time, even while entering only two spells.
That is, as the letter button is shifted, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the shift button for inputting the latter letter, while the shift button for entering the previous letter becomes the letter button of the later letter. Let's enter filial piety as an example of the advantage.
Filial piety
This is the second letter of button 8, so hold down button 6 from the button 4 or 6, which is the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter.
Since ㅛ is the second letter of button 6, we want to press button 8 from the button 2 or 8, which is a shift button that allows the user to enter the fourth letter.
I'm going to press button 6 while I'm already doing it, but since button 6 already had my right thumb, I press button 6 right there and type 'ㅛ'.
Filial piety
<<<<< 101-0134 0146 >>>>>>
As the sixth mentioned in the video "6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example"
Not only when there are two spellings that cause such a situation, as in the example of explaining the second to fifth advantages, but also when the first letter of each button is sandwiched between the two spellings. To sum up, let's type in a 'frame' between the two spells, with the first letter of each button between the two spells.
frame
The second letter of button 6,
Between the second letter ㄹ of button 5
Even if the first letter ㅡ of button 3 is stuck
You can use the shift button 4, the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter you used when typing, to enter ㄹ.
In other words
While holding down button 4 from the button 4 or 6, which is the shift button for entering the second letter, press button 6 to enter ㅌ,
Press button 3 repeatedly to enter
Press button 5 while pressing the button 4, which is the shift button used to enter the second letter, to enter ㄹ.
ㅌ ㅡ ㄹ ㅌ ㅡ ㄹ
<<<<< 101-0146 >>>>>
And
Shift button 5 or 0 to enter the fifth character
Press the shift button * or # to enter the sixth character.
Specify more shift buttons to input 2, 3, and 4 letters, such as shift buttons to input 2, 3, 4 letters, or switch functions when each button acts as a shift button. May cause them to appear more often.
The advantages of typing Hangul words and the quick typing demonstration
It's like the advantages of typing English words and quick typing demonstrations. 40 English words to quickly enter the demonstration ”video has a detailed explanation and examples, so please watch this video after watching this video.
For more details and various applications, please refer to the detailed manual.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 25 299 times
Pantech's Sky Curitel Hangul input method improvement
(Figure 25)
The method of improving the Hangul input method of Sky or Curitel of the Pantech series is the same as the method of improving the input method of Anycall of Samsung Electronics,
For more details, please refer to the video description and detailed explanation on how to improve the input method.
The Hangeul keyboard of Sky or Curitel of Pantech series is shown in <Figure 23>.
The green letters ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ, ㅆ in <Figure 24> are not marked and are hidden.
To introduce the conventional Pantech series input method
Consonants and short vowels are entered in a multi-tap method by pressing several times until the desired letter appears, and double vowels are entered in combination with short vowels.
(More details in the commentary)
Hangul phonemes are a total of 40, including 19 consonants and 21 vowels.
<Figure 24.5> shows how to input 40 Korean phonemes using the conventional Pantech series input method.
In the summary at the end of the table, Figure 24.5,
You can see that there are 10 phonemes that require three strokes.
However, in the conventional Pantech-based keyboard as shown in <Figure 26.7>, the phonemes marked in red that are not assigned as / completed are additionally assigned as / completed.
In the conventional text mode, you can enter the 10 phonemes that require three or more in two, even if you can input them in the conventional way without changing the text mode.
In other words, all 40 Korean phonemes can be entered as one or two.
The phoneme that can be input with two strokes by the conventional method can be inputted with two strokes at a more comfortable posture, faster speed, and without the change of the character mode. It is also possible to minimize the occurrence of consonant collisions, which causes the inconvenience of having to move the cursor with the direction keys when continuously inputting phonemes assigned to the same button.
The auto-cursor time setting method introduced in the detailed manual or the twin-input-only mode does not cause consonant collision at all.
As shown in <Figure 25>, special characters are additionally assigned, and special characters can also be input in two characters in Korean input mode without changing the character mode to special character mode.
In the conventional input method mode, it is possible to input with the conventional input method, but can also use the twin input method without changing the character mode. There is no risk to apply it.
In addition, in the conventional input method mode, users who want to input Korean characters or special characters quickly by using the twin input method without changing the character mode can be satisfied.
In fact, it doesn't matter which state you use to apply the twin input method.
Even in the same state as in <Figure 23>, / using the call key, which has no response in the text input mode, as the toggle key
As shown in <Figure 26.8>, a part of the display screen is allocated.
In the conventional keyboard, red phonemes that are not assigned to the completed type are displayed in the virtual keyboard of the display screen, which is assigned to the completed type. Then, in the Korean input mode, the actual phone is pressed without changing the character mode. You can enter it. Of course, you can press the call key again to make the virtual keyboard disappear. If you remember the red phone, you can enter the red phone.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 26..7>,
In addition to the conventional keyboard / / red phonemes not assigned to the complete form / can also be applied to the keyboard as a complete mark,
As shown in Figure 26.6,
Additional punctuation marks such as (?., () ‘“ / ~!) Can also be applied.
(In the past, English alphabets were written under Korean phonemes, but the English alphabet was written under numbers to make room.)
In addition
As shown in Figure 26.5,
You can assign additional pictures to the emoticons,
As shown in Figure 25,
You can also assign additional picture emoticons.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 26>, you can assign and add one more emoji.
In this type of keyboard, in Hangul input mode, take button 6 as an example.
ㅖ ㅕ ㅔ ㅖ Left parenthesis Right parenthesis is defined as the first group of buttons 6,
Lip bob cherry knives and card masked expressions are defined as the second group of buttons 6,
If you want to input all these things in Korean input mode without changing the character mode with special characters, you can enter like this.
ㅓ ㅕ ㅔ ㅖ Left Bracket Right Bracket Lip Bob Cherry Knife, Card Masked Expression.
You can find out how to input the video by watching the English input method improvement video or Samsung Anycall input method improvement video or detailed commentary.
(<Figure 16.2>)
In addition, by combining the various actual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states that dedicate part of the following display screen, even special characters on the display screen can be directly inputted by pressing the actual keyboard in 2-3 letters in the normal text mode. Yes.
Display screen
As shown in <Figure 16.2>, you can add and apply phonemes that require 3 or more strokes.
It can be applied by adding sentence marks as in <Figure 16.1>.
As shown in <Figure 16>, you can add and apply the emoji first.
Or on the display screen
The first page looks like <Figure 16.2>.
The second page is shown in Figure 16.1.
The third page is like <Figure 16>.
Subsequent pages may continue to assign special characters.
For example, as shown in Figure 16.1.
Among the letters on the display, the single quote sun bouquet is now defined as the third group of button 6, and the buttons on the actual keyboard will be pressed and input from the Hangul input mode to the special character mode without changing the character mode.
(<Figure 26>)
Single quote sun bouquet
Please refer to Samsung Anycall's input method improvement video or more details on how to input it and how to display and hide the special character table on the display screen with a call key, or change the special character table page on the display screen with volume control buttons. You can see the detailed explanation.
In addition, the conventional method, the multi-tap method, that is, even if you press the same button several times to enter the same situation as before, you can limit the added characters to only the twin input method.
For more details and various applications, please refer to the Enhancement Videos and Detailed Descriptions.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Videos26 354 times
LG Electronics Cyon EZ Hangul input method improvement 1
<<<<< 0354 0200 >>>>>
(Figure 29)
The method of improving LG's Cyon's Hangul input method on the small keypad is the same as that of Samsung's Anycall.
For more details, please refer to the video and detailed explanation on how to improve the input method.
Conventional LG Electronics Cyon's EZ type Hangul keyboard is shown in <Figure 27>.
<Figure 28>
The blue letters 버튼 ㄲ 버튼 버튼 ㄷ ㄷ ㅃ ㅃ ㅃ ㅑ ㅑ ㅑ ㅠ ㅠ ㅠ are buttons that are buttons for adding strokes after pressing the buttons to which such phonemes are assigned, even though they are not written on a conventional keyboard. You can also enter it by pressing button #, the consonant button 1 or 2 more times. That is, it is not assigned to completion.
The conventional LG Electronics Cyon's EZ input Hangul input method is described in more detail in the manual.
Hangul phonemes are a total of 40, including 19 consonants and 21 vowels.
<George 28.5> shows how to input 40 Hangul phonemes by EZ type input method of conventional LG Electronics Cyon.
In the last part, the summary,
13 phonemes that need three strokes,
There are two phonemes that need four strokes,
You can see that there are a total of 15 phonemes that require more than 3 hits.
<<<<< 0360 0302 >>>>>
However, as shown in <Fig. 373>, in the conventional EZ type Hangul keyboard of LG Electronics Cyon, the phonemes marked in red and blue that are not assigned to the completed form are additionally assigned to the completed form.
In the conventional text mode, you can input 15 phonemes that require three or more in two, even if you can input the text in the conventional fashion without changing the text mode.
In other words, all 40 Korean phonemes can be entered as one or two.
The phoneme that can be input with two strokes by the conventional method can be inputted with two strokes at a more comfortable posture and at a faster speed if the twin input method is used in parallel without changing the character mode.
Another shortcoming of the conventional EZ input method of LG Electronics Cyon is to input a vowel including blue letters, which are blue characters. Each time / following the button to which the phoneme is assigned, /, button *, which is a stroke addition button, or Button #, which is a double consonant button, must be pressed in succession, each time a large copper line in four rows occurs. Since there is only one button and two consonant buttons, both hands are biased in one or three rows, so that the two inputs can interfere with each other and the mobile phone's stability of holding the mobile phone can be eliminated.
.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 29>, special characters including picture emoji can be additionally assigned, so you can input 2 special characters in Hangul input mode without changing the character mode to special character mode.
In the conventional input method mode, it is possible to input with the conventional input method, but can also use the twin input method without changing the character mode. There is no risk to apply it.
In addition, in the conventional input method mode, you can input two letters of Korean or special characters in parallel with the twin input method without changing the character mode.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Videos27 363 times
LG Electronics Cyon's EZ Hangul Input Method Improvement 2
<<<<< 0363 0345 >>>>>
In fact, it doesn't matter which state you use to apply the twin input method.
Even in the same state as in <Figure 27>, in the character input mode, call keys that do not respond when pressed are used as toggle keys.
As shown in <Figure 32.8>, a part of the display screen is dedicated.
In the conventional keyboard, red and blue phonemes that are not assigned to the completed form are displayed.The virtual keyboard of the display screen is assigned to the completed form.Then, in the Korean input mode, without changing the character mode, the actual keyboard is pressed You can also enter the phonemes in blue as complete. Of course, you can press the call key again to make the virtual keyboard disappear. If you remember the red and blue phoneme assignment status, you can enter the red and blue phonemes.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 32.7>,
You can also apply the red and blue phonemes that are not assigned to the traditional keyboard / to the completed keyboard / by additionally marking them as complete on the actual keyboard,
As shown in Figure 6.32,
Additional punctuation marks such as (?., () ‘“ / ~!) Can also be applied.
(In the past, English alphabets were written under Korean phonemes, but the English alphabet was written under numbers to make room.)
In addition
As shown in <Figure 32.5>,
You can assign additional pictures to the emoticons,
As shown in Figure 29,
You can also assign additional picture emoticons.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 32>, you can assign and add one more emoji.
Even in this state of the keyboard, in the Korean input mode, for example, the button 6 is assigned to 12 such buttons assigned to the button 6,
ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ Left parenthesis Right parenthesis is defined as the first group of button 6,
Lip bob cherry knives and card masked expressions are defined as the second group of buttons 6,
In Hangul input mode, you can input all the phonemes that have been assigned in the conventional way, but if you want to input all of them directly in the conventional Hangul input mode without changing the character mode to the special character mode.
ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ left parenthesis right parenthesis lip bob cherry knife, card mask
You can find out how to input the video by watching the English input method improvement video or Samsung Anycall input method improvement video or detailed commentary.
<<<<< 0367 0256 >>>>>
(<Figure 16.2>)
In addition, by combining the various actual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states that dedicate part of the following display screen, even special characters on the display screen can be directly inputted by pressing the actual keyboard in 2-3 letters in the normal text mode. Yes.
Display screen
As shown in <Figure 32.8>, red and blue phonemes, which are not assigned to completion type, can be additionally assigned to completion type and applied.
As shown in <Figure 16.2>, you can add and apply phonemes that require 3 or more strokes.
It can be applied by adding sentence marks as in <Figure 16.1>.
As shown in <Figure 16>, you can add and apply the emoji first.
Or on the display screen
The first page is like <Figure 32.8>.
The second page is shown in Figure 16.2.
The third page is like <Figure 16.1>.
The fourth page is shown in Figure 16.
Subsequent pages may continue to assign special characters.
For example, as shown in Figure 16.1.
Among the letters on the display, the single quote sun bouquet is now defined as the third group of button 6, and the buttons on the actual keyboard will be pressed and input from the Hangul input mode to the special character mode without changing the character mode.
(<Figure 32>)
Single quote sun bouquet
Please refer to Samsung Anycall's input method improvement video or more details on how to input it and how to display and hide the special character table on the display screen with a call key, or change the special character table page on the display screen with volume control buttons. You can see the detailed explanation.
And conventionally assigned letters can be entered in the same situation as the conventional way using the conventional input method,
Added letters can be restricted to input only by twin input method
For more details and various applications, please refer to the Enhancement Videos and Detailed Descriptions.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 28: New Advantages in Entering Words Using Hangul Words as an Example
<<<<< 103-861 0017 >>>>>
(Figure 27)
LG Electronics ez Hangul Input Method When Parallel Input
How convenient is it when you actually type words?
Of course, while you can enter the traditional input method, without changing the character mode is to try to input in the twin input method.
<<<<< 103-0864 0012 >>>>>
Like this, the keyboard is the same as before,
(<Figure 32.8>
You can do this only on the display screen,
<Image 32.7>
You may well know that you can type this type of keyboard.
<<<<< 103-0866 0026 >>>>>
In fact, we saw the convenience of the word input for the twin input method with Samsung Electronics' cheonjiin input method in the previous video, “6 New Advantages of Word Input Using Korean Word Input”. The same effect works for other input methods, so I don't need to try again, but let's take a quick look.
<<<<< 103-0869 0013 >>>>>
Watch the video titled “6 New Advantages in Entering Words Using Korean Words as an Example” for a detailed explanation of the moments and principles of effects and how to make them more frequent.
<<<<< 103-0870 0006 >>>>>
In the video titled "6 New Advantages in Entering Words Using Korean Words as an Example"
<<<<< 103-0873 0028 >>>>> Hold on time
The first advantage mentioned
Even when the phonemes assigned to the same button are continuously inputted, this is an example of the advantage that the user does not need to move the cursor artificially with the space-only button or the right button.
There is no such example.
Because LG Electronics ez Korean input consonants are not input in the multi-tap method, which is a method of inputting consonants from the Cheonjiin input method.
<<<<< 103-0874 0014 >>>>>
The second advantage mentioned
When there is a sequence of letters in the same order for each button, the shift button pressed in the front can be used as it is, so that the number of strokes is greatly reduced.
<<<<< 103-0875 >>>>>
Let's enter the wedges and the bones
<<<<< 103-0878 0024 >>>>>
Let's type ‘ワ ッ ド.’ ㅆ ㅙ
ㅆ is the fourth letter of button 7
ㅙ is the fourth letter of a button *
While holding down the button 8 from the button 2 or 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter, press the button 7 and the button * in succession.
<<<<< 103-0880 0024 >>>>>
Let's enter ‘bones’. ㅃ ㅕ
ㅃ is the fourth letter of button 5
ㅕ is the fourth letter of button 3
While holding down the button 8 from the button 2 or 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter, press the button 5 and the button 3 consecutively to enter.
<<<<< 103-0882 0029 >>>>>
Let's type tofu. ㄷ ㅜ ㅂ ㅜ
Since TT TT TT TT is the second letter of 2,6,5,6,
While pressing the button 4 from the button 4 or 6 which is the shift button to input the second letter, press the buttons 2, 6, 5, 6 consecutively.
<<<<< 103-0884 0019 >>>>>
The third advantage mentioned
As the letter button is shifted, the letter button for entering the previous letter becomes the shift button for entering the next letter. This is an example of the advantage of minimizing copper wire and saving almost one stroke with the copper wire being 0.
<<<<< 103-0886 00004 >>>>>
Let's type '쩨' and 'adopt'.
<<<<< 103-0888 0039 >>>>>
Let's type 쩨? ㅉ ㅔ
ㅉ is the fifth letter of button 7,
While holding down button 5 from shift button 5 or 0, which is the shift button for entering the fifth character, press button 7 to enter ㅉ.
ㅔ is the third letter of button 8,
I want to press button 7 from the button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter. Since there is already a left hand on the button 7, press the button 7 right away, and then press button 8 to enter ㅔ. .
<<<<< 103-0889 0003 >>>>>
ㅉ ㅔ
<<<<< 103-0891 0044 >>>>>
Let's type "accept". ㅐ ㅌ ㅌ ㅐ ㄱ
The effect occurred when you entered the 의 of the chop and the 의 of the tack.
While holding down the button 4 from the button 4 or 6, the shift button for entering the second letter, press the button 9 to enter ㅐ.
ㅌ is the third letter of button 2,
I want to press button 9 from button 7 or 9, which is the shift button to enter the third letter. Since button 9 already has the right hand, press button 9 at that point and press button 2 at that point to enter ㅌ.
<<<<< 103-0892 0003 >>>>>
ㅐ ㅌ
<<<<< 103-0893 0017 >>>>>
The fourth advantage mentioned
As the letter button is shifted, the shift button for inputting the previous letter has the effect of minimizing the copper line and saving almost one stroke, with the copper line being 0, which becomes the letter button of the latter letter. As an example
<<<<< 103-0894 0002 >>>>>
Let's type 'cha'.
<<<<< 103-0898 0035 >>>>>
ㅋ ㅐ
Since this is the third letter of button 7,
While holding down button 9 of button 7 or 9, the shift button that allows you to enter the third letter, press button 7 to enter
ㅐ is the second letter of button 9,
I'm going to press button 9 while holding down button 4 from button 4 or 6, which is a shift button that allows me to enter the second letter. Since button 9 already had my right hand, I press button 9 at that point and type ㅐ.
<<<<< 103-0904 00003>
ㅋ ㅐ
<<<<< 103-0905 0026 >>>>>
The fifth advantage mentioned
The advantages of the third and fourth may occur at the same time, even while entering only two spells.
That is, as the letter button is shifted, the letter button of the previous letter becomes the shift button for inputting the latter letter, while the shift button for entering the previous letter becomes the letter button of the later letter. As an example of merit
<<<<, 103-0906 0003 >>>>>
Let's type 'hugh' and 'chi'.
<<<<< 103-0912 0044 >>>>>
Let's type ‘ugh’. ‘ㅎ ㅠ’
ㅎ This is the second letter of button 8.
While holding down the button 6 from the button 4 or 6, which is the shift button for entering the second letter, press the button 8 to enter ㅎ,
ㅠ is the fourth letter of button 6,
I'm going to press button 8 of the shift button 2 or 8 that allows me to enter the fourth letter. Since button 8 already has a left hand, I want to press button 8 right there, and then press button 6, Since there is already a right hand on button 6, just press button 6 on the spot and enter ㅠ.
<<<<< 103-0913 0003 >>>>>
ㅎ ㅠ
<<<<< 103-0917 0028 >>>>>
Let's type ‘치’. ‘ㅊ ㅣ’
Since this is the third letter of button 7,
While holding down button 9 of button 7 or 9, the shift button that allows you to enter the third letter, press button 7 to enter
You want to press button 9 to enter 'ㅣ', but since button 9 already has your right hand, press button 9 at the right to enter |
<<<<< 103-0919 0002 >>>>>
ㅣ ㅣ
<<<<< 103-0921 0026 >>>>>
As a sixth mentioned advantage
Not only when there are two spellings that cause such a situation, as in the example of explaining the second to fifth advantages, but also when the first letter of each button is sandwiched between the two spellings. In other words, the first letter of each button is sandwiched between two spells in the second advantage.
<<<<< 103-0923 0003 >>>>>
Let's enter 'popo' and 'close'.
<<<<< 103-0944 0044 >>>>> Hold on time
Let's type kiss ㅃ ㅗ ㅃ ㅗ
ㅃ is the fourth letter of button 5
While holding down the button 8 from the button 2 or 8, which is the shift button for entering the fourth letter, press the button 5 to enter ㅃ,
Press button 6 to enter 6,
<<<<< 103-0947 0015 >>>> Withholding in time
When entering the second 번째
Since there was already a left hand on button 8, press button 8 right there, then press button 5 and enter ㅃ again.
Press button 6 to enter ㅗ.
<<<<< 103-0948 0006? 103-0967 >>>>>
Let's type kiss ㅃ ㅗ ㅃ ㅗ
<<<<< 103-0949 0022? 103-0972 >>>>>
Even if the first letter of button 6 is inserted between the fourth letter ㅃ and ㅃ of button 5,
Even when entering the next ㅃ, the shift button 8, which allows the user to enter the fourth letter used to enter the first ㅃ, could be pressed as it is with the copper line at 0.
ㅃ ㅗ ㅃ ㅗ
<<<< 103-0951 0005 >>>>>
Let's type "closed." ㅅ ㅅ ㅙ
<<<<< 103-0955 0037 >>>>>
Since this is the third letter of button 5,
While holding down the button 9 from button 7 or 9, which is the shift button for entering the third letter, press button 5 to enter
ㅖ is the fourth letter of button 8,
While holding down the button 8 with your right hand from the button 2 or 8, the shift button for entering the fourth letter, press the button 8 to enter ㅖ,
Enter button s by pressing button 7.
ㅙ is the fourth letter of a button *,
I want to press button 2 with my right hand from button 2 or 8, which is a shift button that lets you enter the fourth letter. Since your right hand is already on button 2, press button 2 right there and press button *. Enter ㅙ.
<<<< 103-0956 0004 >>>>>
ㅅ ㅅ ㅙ
<<<< 103-0965 0021 >>>>>
The first letter of button 7, ㅅ, is inserted between button 8 and the fourth letter of button *, ㅖ and ㅙ.
Even when you input ㅙ, you could press the button 2, which is a shift button that allows you to enter the fourth letter that you used when you input ㅖ, on the spot with the copper line at 0.
End-No Finish
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Videos29 324 times
Improved Hangul input method of Motorola 1
(Figure 35)
The method of improving Motorola's Hangul input method on the small keypad is the same as the method of improving the input method, which is the essence of Samsung's Anycall,
For more details, please refer to the video description and detailed explanation on how to improve the input method.
The conventional Hangul keyboard of Motorola is shown in <Figure 33>.
Of <Figure 34>
The green letters ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, 완성, are assigned to completion type, but are not marked and hidden.
The blue letters ㅑ ㅕ ㅛ ㅠ can be entered without pressing the button 3 or button 1 or 2 times and then pressing the button #, the phoneme conversion button. That is, it is not assigned to completion.
The traditional Hangul input method of Motorola is described in detail in the manual.
Hangul phonemes are a total of 40, including 19 consonants and 21 vowels.
<Figure 34.5> shows how to input 40 Korean phonemes using the conventional Motorola input method.
In summary, the last part of Figure 34.5,
Seven phonemes that need three strokes,
There are two phonemes that need four strokes,
You can see that there are 9 phonemes that need more than 3 hits.
However, as shown in <Figure 36.65>, in the conventional Motorola Hangul keyboard, the phonemes in red and blue that are not assigned to the completed form are additionally assigned to the completed form.
In the conventional text mode, you can input nine phonemes that require three or more inputs in two, even if you can input them in the conventional way without changing the text mode.
In other words, all 40 Korean phonemes can be entered as one or two.
The phoneme that can be input with two strokes in the conventional way can be inputted with two strokes at a more comfortable posture, at a faster speed, even if the twin input method is used in parallel without changing the character mode.
Another shortcoming of the conventional Motorola input method is that each time you enter the second phoneme of the consonant button, ㅌ ㅌ ㅊ ㅁ ㅎ, or enter ㅑ ㅕ ㅛ 인 which is a character with a stroke added to the main vowel / Next, you need to press the button #, which is a phoneme conversion button, in succession, each time a large copper line is generated in four rows, and both hands are biased in three columns, thus eliminating the interference of both hands and inferior stability of holding the phone. ,
In addition, in the conventional Motorola input method, the first consonant of each consonant button, for example, a and consonant a, for example, a multi-tap method, i.e., by pressing the same button several times, the first consonant of the consonant button When entering consonants consecutively, it is possible to rarely cause consonant collisions that cause inconvenience to move the cursor with the arrow keys.
The auto-cursor time setting method introduced in the detailed manual or the twin-input-only mode does not cause consonant collision at all.
.
As shown in <Figure 35>, special characters are additionally assigned, and special characters can also be input in two characters in the Korean input mode without changing the character mode to the special character mode.
In the conventional input method mode, it is possible to input with the conventional input method, but can also use the twin input method without changing the character mode. There is no risk to apply it.
In addition, in the conventional input method mode, users who want to input Korean characters or special characters quickly by using the twin input method without changing the character mode can be satisfied.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video30 343 times
Motorola's Hangul Input Method Improvement 2
In fact, it doesn't matter which state you use to apply the twin input method.
<Figure 33> Even in the same condition as before, / In the text input mode, call keys that do not respond when pressed are used as toggle keys.
As shown in <Fig. 36.66>, dedicate a part of the display screen.
In the conventional keyboard, red and blue phonemes that are not assigned to the completed form are displayed.The virtual keyboard of the display screen is assigned to the completed form.Then, in the Korean input mode, without changing the character mode, the actual keyboard is pressed You can also enter the phonemes in blue as complete. Of course, you can press the call key again to make the virtual keyboard disappear. If you remember the red and blue phoneme assignment status, you can enter the red and blue phonemes.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 36.65>,
You can also apply the red and blue phonemes that are not assigned to the traditional keyboard / to the completed keyboard / by additionally marking them as complete on the actual keyboard,
As shown in Figure 36.6,
Additional punctuation marks such as (?., () ‘“ / ~!) Can also be applied.
(In the past, English alphabets were written under Korean phonemes, but the English alphabet was written under numbers to make room.)
In addition
As shown in Figure 36.5,
You can assign additional pictures to the emoticons,
As shown in Figure 35,
You can also assign additional picture emoticons.
In addition
As shown in <Figure 36>, you can assign and add one more emoji.
In this type of keyboard, in Hangul input mode, for example, button 6 is assigned to 12 of these buttons,
ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ Left parenthesis Right parenthesis is defined as the first group of button 6,
Lip bob cherry knives and card masked expressions are defined as the second group of buttons 6,
Traditional Korean phonemes can be input in the Korean input mode, but in the conventional Korean input mode without changing the text mode to the special character mode.
ㅗ ㅜ ㅛ ㅠ left parenthesis right parenthesis lip bob cherry knife, card mask
You can find out how to input the video by watching the English input method improvement video or Samsung Anycall input method improvement video or detailed commentary.
(<Figure 16.2>)
In addition, by combining the various actual keyboard states mentioned above and various virtual keyboard states that dedicate part of the following display screen, even special characters on the display screen can be directly inputted by pressing the actual keyboard in 2-3 letters in the normal text mode. Yes.
Display screen
As shown in <Figure 36.66>, the red and blue phonemes, which are not assigned to completion type in the conventional keyboard, may be additionally assigned to the completion type.
As shown in <Figure 16.2>, you can add and apply phonemes that require 3 or more strokes.
It can be applied by adding sentence marks as in <Figure 16.1>.
As shown in <Figure 16>, you can add and apply the emoji first.
Or on the display screen
The first page looks like <Figure 36.66>.
The second page is shown in Figure 16.2.
The third page is like <Figure 16.1>.
The fourth page is shown in Figure 16.
Subsequent pages may continue to assign special characters.
For example, as shown in Figure 16.1.
Among the letters on the display, the single quote sun bouquet is now defined as the third group of button 6, and the buttons on the actual keyboard will be pressed and input from the Hangul input mode to the special character mode without changing the character mode.
(Figure 36)
Single quote sun bouquet
Please refer to Samsung Anycall's input method improvement video or more details on how to input it and how to display and hide the special character table on the display screen with a call key, or change the special character table page on the display screen with volume control buttons. You can see the detailed explanation.
And conventionally assigned letters can be entered in the same situation as the conventional way using the conventional input method,
Added letters can be restricted to input only by twin input method
For more details and various applications, please refer to the Enhancement Videos and Detailed Descriptions.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 31 101-179
LG Electronics Motorola Handol Code Hangul Input Method
<<<<<< 101-179 0011 >>>>>
In this video, I will explain how to apply twin input method to ez Hangul input method of LG Cyon in a slightly different way than the method introduced so far.
<<<<< 101-0180 0144 >>>>>
To mention what has been frequently mentioned as a disadvantage of the conventional EZ input method of LG Electronics,
The Hangul phonetic conversion button called Stroke Add button or Double Consonant button exists in this row.
If you enter 13 consonants called ㅂ ㅈ ㅁ ㅁ ㅎ ㅎ excluding the basic consonants printed here out of 19 consonants and if you enter ㅑ ㅕㅛ ㅑ ㅕㅛ ㅒ 중 in a vowel, add the strokes in line 4 or There was a big disadvantage that a large copper line in 4 rows is necessary because the double consonant button must be operated one or two times.
Since there is only one button * for adding strokes, when using two hands to input, both hands may be biased in this way, so the interference between the thumbs of both hands occurs and the stability of holding the mobile phone is reduced.
The stroke add button has only one button *, and the twin consonant button has only one button #, so the shift buttons of the same function are not located in both the first and third rows as in the twin input method, so the copper wire is bigger and the load is distributed evenly on both hands. There was also an inconspicuous disadvantage of not being.
The Motorola method also uses the button # on the 4th line as a phoneme conversion function, so the shortcomings of the LG Electronics method are almost similar, so the contents presented in this video can be applied in the same way.
<<<<< 102-0185 0010 >>>>.
The functions of buttons * and # in Handol code Hangul input method can be entered much more conveniently and faster than before even if you apply only as suggested in this video.
Hangul Code Hangul Input Method
The button * is used as a phoneme finishing function, and the button # is used as a shift button for inputting the third letter.Also, the disadvantages are almost the same as those of the LG electronic method. It's much easier and faster to type than ever before.
<<<<< 101-0189 0055 >>>>>>
These disadvantages of the conventional LG Electronics input method are /
As far as the twin input method is explained
It is possible to completely solve it by using the shift button to input the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th letters with the letters assigned to it. I've seen it and other conveniences.
But for those who still don't come in contact with the skin, we introduce a transitional phase. In other words, it is not actively recommended, but the shortcomings of the conventional LG Electronics' input method are completely solved by the twin input method, and it is in order to be able to accept the form I actively recommend.
<<<<<< 101-0194 0103 >>>>
Let's see how to apply the twin input method.
The content is simple.
The new twins can use the functions of the double consonant button and the stroke add button in the conventional four lines as they are, that is, they can be input in the conventional manner without changing the text mode, and use the letter button as a shift button for a while. Is to input by input method.
I tried to designate Button 1 and Button 3 as shift buttons that function as consonants.
We have assigned Button 4 and Button 6 as shift buttons for adding strokes.
In the conventional LG keyboard, only 7 is written on button 7, and only 3 is written on button 3, but for the sake of understanding, we have also shown the hidden phonemes, ㅆㅉ ㅆㅉ and ㅑ 돕기.
(((((
<Figure 30>: Shift Button Assignment Table
(Don't mind the numbers in parentheses at this stage)
1 (double consonant)
2 (4) 3 (double consonants)
ㅏㅓ ㅑㅕ
4 (Add Stroke) 5 (5) 6 (Add Stroke)
7 (3)
US 8 (4) 9 (3)
* (6)
Add Stroke 0 (5) # (6)
A double consonant
)))))
<<<<< 101-198 0035 >>>>>>
Traditionally, to type `ㅉ`
7, *, # I typed this:
Press button 7 to display ㅅ on the display
Add a stroke by pressing the Add Stroke button button in row 4 to create a stroke,
I made a 하여 by double consonant by pressing button #, the consonant button in row 4.
That is, there are two large copper wires in four rows.
<<<<<< 101-0218 0139 >>>>>
Now, I'm going to type in the twin input method, as in the conventional LG method, by pressing the Add button or the double consonant button after the basic phoneme, by pressing the shift button while holding the button to which the default phoneme is assigned, that is, shifting than the letter button Let's operate the button later.
Of course, you can manipulate it as before.
To input `ㅉ` using the twin input method
Is the second consonant of button 7, followed by ,,
With button 7 held down, it is easier to press button 3 with the right hand, either button 1 or triple, which is a bi-convolutional shift button.
7 + 3 + 3
There is not big copper wire in four lines as before, and there are few other copper wires and is comfortable.
(The way you run it depends on the rules, so you don't have to decide why.)
Even when using Button *, which is a stroke adding button, and Button #, which is a double consonant button, as in the past, the method changes the rule by inputting 7, #, # instead of 7, *, # to reduce the movement line. It means you can.
<<<<< 101-0220 0109 >>>>>
In addition
To enter the text using the traditional input method,
7, *, *
Press button 7 to display ㅅ on the display
Add a stroke by pressing the Add Stroke button button in row 4 to create a stroke,
You can also add strokes by pressing the Add Stroke button *.
After all, there is big line to four lines.
By applying the twin input method
To enter
Since the second stroke of button 7 is a phoneme,
While holding button 7, it is easier to press button 6 with the right hand of the button 4 or 6, which is the shift button of the stroke add function.
7 + 6 + 6
There is not big copper wire in four lines as before, and there are few other copper wires and is comfortable.
<<<<< 101-0221 0057 >>>>>
In addition
Traditionally, to type `ㅕ`
3,3, *
Double click button 3 to display ㅓ on the display screen.
I made a roll by pressing the Stroke button *.
After all, there is big line to four lines.
To input ㅕ using the twin input method
Since the second stroke of button 3 is a phoneme
While pressing button 3, it is easier to press button 4 with the left hand from the stroke addition button 4 or 6, so press button 4 twice in succession to enter ㅕ.
3 + 4 + 4
There is not big copper wire in four lines as before, and there are few other copper wires and is comfortable.
<<<<<< 101-0228 0050 >>>>>>
(((((((
<Figure 31.5>: Shift Button Assignment Table
(Don't worry about the numbers in parentheses at this stage)
1 (first consonant) 2 (second consonant) 3 (first consonant)
ㅏㅓ ㅑㅕ
4 (additional first stroke) 5 (3) 6 (additional first stroke)
7 (additional stroke 2)
ㅅㅈㅅ ㅆㅉ 8 (2nd consonant) 9 (2nd stroke added)
* (4)
Add Stroke 0 (3) # (4)
A double consonant
)))))))
In another twin input format.
like this
Divide the shift button of the consonant function into a first consonant shift button and a second consonant shift button,
The stroke add function shift button can also be divided into the first stroke add shift button and the second stroke add shift button.
so
I specified buttons 1 and 3 as shift buttons for inputting the first consonants.
I specified buttons 2 and 8 as shift buttons for inputting second consonants.
I specified buttons 4 and 6 as shift buttons for inputting the first stroke addition sound.
We have specified buttons 7 and 9 as shift buttons for entering the second stroke.
<<<<< 101-0241 0037 >>>>>
now
To enter `ㅉ`
ㅉ is the second consonant of button 7,
While button 7 is being pressed, press button 8 from button 2 or 8 of the second double consonant shift button to enter ㅉ.
7 + 8
There is no big line in four lines now, and there are few other lines, too, and it is easy to reduce the number of strokes.
By applying the twin input method
To enter
Since the second stroke of button 7 is a phoneme,
While holding button 7, it is easier to press button 9 with the right hand of the button 7 or 9, which is the shift button of the second stroke adding function.
7 + 9
There is no big line in four lines now, and there are few other lines, too, and it is easy to reduce the number of strokes.
To input ㅕ using the twin input method
Since the second stroke of button 3 is a phoneme
While holding button 3, it is more convenient to press button 7 with the left hand from button 7 or 9, which is the shift button of the second stroke addition function, press button 7 to enter ㅕ.
3 + 7
ㅉ, ,, ㅕ (demonstration) now has no large copper lines in four rows as before, and the other lines are less, more comfortable and fewer strokes.
<<<<< 101-0242 0004 >>>>>
Please refer to the detailed explanation manual for details.
For more details and various applications, please refer to the detailed manual.
To input `ㅉ` using the twin input method
ㅉ is the second consonant of button 7,
While button 7 is being pressed, press button 8 from button 2 or 8 of the second double consonant shift button to enter ㅉ.
7 + 8
There is no big line in four lines now, and there are few other lines, too, and it is easy to reduce the number of strokes.
By applying the twin input method
To enter
Since the second stroke of button 7 is a phoneme,
While holding button 7, it is easier to press button 9 with the right hand of the button 7 or 9, which is the shift button of the second stroke adding function.
7 + 9
There is no big line in four lines now, and there are few other lines, too, and it is easy to reduce the number of strokes.
To input ㅕ using the twin input method
Since the second stroke of button 3 is a phoneme
While holding button 3, it is more convenient to press button 7 with the left hand from button 7 or 9, which is the shift button of the second stroke addition function, press button 7 to enter ㅕ.
3 + 7
There is no big line in four lines now, and there are few other lines, too, and it is easy to reduce the number of strokes.
For more details and various applications, please refer to the detailed manual.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video Number 32
Solving Dilemma of Hangul Input Method and Unification Method of Hangul Input Method
<<<<< 102-0857 0015 103-0064 >>>>>
For foreign language characters other than Korean
Phoneme assignment on small keypads is standardized.
For example, the English alphabet is standardized like this.
Only the character input method is different from the multi-tap method and the T9 method.
<<<<<< 102-0858 0015 >>>>>
In the case of Hangul
Phoneme assignments vary depending on the text input method.
Hangul is easy to make other phonemes by transforming the basic phonemes, so the phoneme assignment depends on how you choose the default phone.
<<<<< 102-0859 0015 >>>>>
If you want to change your phone because it's not a standard phoneme ordered by phone distribution, you need to think about whether the text input method is your preferred type.
So I'm trying to unify the keyboard, but I can't even discuss it.
<<<<< 102-0860 0017 >>>>> Withhold in time
In the case of Samsung's natural input method
As shown in Figure 20.
The basic phoneme (?) Of the vowel is Cheonjiin (ㅣ. ㅡ)
Consonants, even hidden phonemes, assign all consonants to the final form and input them in a multi-tap method.
<<<<< 102-0867 0015 >>>>> Hold in time
For Motorola
The basic phoneme of the vowel is ㅏ ㅓ ㅗ ㅜ ㅡ ㅣ
This is the basic phoneme of consonants. Enter all consonants, including hidden phonemes, in multi-tap and stroke addition.
<<<<< 102-0870 0018 >>>>> Withhold in time
LG Electronics' EZ Input Method
The basic phoneme of the vowel is ㅏ ㅓ ㅗ ㅜ ㅡ ㅣ
The basic phoneme of a consonant is a b b d. Hiding consonant vowels can be entered by adding consonants or strokes.
<<<<< 102-0875 0019 >>>>> Hold in time
In case of Pantech Sky and Curitel
The basic phoneme of the vowel is ㅏ ㅑ ㅗ ㅕ ㅗ ㅛ ㅠ ㅡ ㅣ
This is the basic phoneme of consonants. All consonants, even hidden phonemes, are assigned to completion and multi-taped.
<<<<< 102-0877 0010 >>>>> Hold in time
There are many other ways to continue to be born.
If you think Korean, you can come up with a new character input method.
<<<<< 102-0881 0039 >>>>>
However, there is a dilemma in the Hangul input method.
It is easy to type the strokes required for handwriting on the keyboard and press the buttons that are assigned the strokes in the order of handwriting strokes. This method is not preferred for memorizing the keyboard, so it is preferred for people who type text once, and the thumb is uncomfortable.
Such is the vowel input method of Samsung Electronics Cheonjiin method.
Cheonjiin is the preferred method for those in their 30s and over who type fewer characters.
<<<<< 102-0888 0030 >>>>> Hold in time
If you enter consonants, ㅇ ㅡ Ⅰ / ＼ (circle, horizontal stroke, vertical stroke, left diagonal, right diagonal) and optionally the phoneme finish button, double consonant button, you only need to enter in the order of handwriting. It's very easy, but you'll get a lot of strokes.
If you enter consonants like this and vowels in a heavenly way, you can say that it is a true filial piety phone.
<<<<< 102-0895 0043 >>>>>
In addition
In case of inputting phoneme assigned to completion type including hidden phoneme in multi-tap method,
If the phoneme is assigned to the phoneme rather than the standard sequence of ㄱㄴㄷㄹ ~ ㄷㅎ, it is a little difficult to memorize the phoneme assignment status at first. There is a fatal disadvantage of having to move the cursor manually by pressing the right button.
This is the case when you input consonants in Samsung's natural world and Pantech's Sky or Curitel method.
<<<<< 102-0933 0035 >>>>>
If you enter a hidden phone among the phonemes that are assigned to the completed type, including the hidden phonemes, using a phoneme conversion button such as a double consonant button or a stroke add button,
Since the phoneme is assigned to the phoneme rather than the standard sequence of ㄱㄴㄷㄹ ~ ㄷㅎ, it is a little difficult to memorize the phoneme assignment state at first. A large copper line to the line takes place, and it takes time to get used to it, but there are few strokes.
<<<<< 102-0935 0019 >>>>>
Thumbs are preferred because they have fewer strokes when entering double consonants and vowels (especially double vowels).
For example, LG EZ type consonant and vowel input method.
The Motorola way is the same.
This is the preferred method for teenagers and teenagers with a lot of text input.
<<<<< 102-0938 0010 >>>>>
However, with the development of twin input method, it became a way to find that there are still many disadvantages. I'll tell you later.
<<<<< 102-0939 0012 >>>>>
That is, each character input method has its own advantages and at the same time its own disadvantages. In other words, there is no way with only advantages and no way with only disadvantages.
<<<<< 102-0948 0036 >>>>>
From 2001 to 2007, ETRI, the Korea Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute,
TTA, or telecommunications-related government agencies, including the ICT Commission, has consulted several times with cell phone manufacturers to unify their keyboard assignments. However, it is also because there are many people who prefer each approach rather than being selfish.
<<<<< 102-0961 0037 >>>>>
However, as mentioned above, there are advantages and disadvantages for each character input, and each user's preferred method is also different. Now, when the twin input method is developed, a part of the display screen is devoted to the completion type from each conventional method. If the unassigned phonemes are additionally assigned to the completed type, and the twin input method is combined with each of the conventional methods without changing the character mode, the input method of 40 Korean phonemes is inputted as 1 or 2 strokes. As you can
<<<<< 102-0970 0014 >>>>>
Consumers who prefer each type of conventional input can be satisfied, and they can also satisfy the thumb that desires faster input.
In the age of the Internet through mobile phones, information exchange becomes possible.
<<<<< 102-0972 0025 >>>>>
So you don't have to try to unify, but if you still need unification
Now, even if it is not perfect unification, it will be easy to unify the input method by twin input method by setting a standard for assigning 40 Korean phonemes to the completed form by dedicating part of the display screen as shown in <Figure 16.3>.
<<<<< 102-0973 0007 >>>>>
In this way, one more Korean input mode called standard input mode should be incorporated.
<<<<< 102-0977 0016 >>>>>
In any case, it is necessary to think that complex phonemes of Hangul phonemes can be entered faster than conventional methods by breaking the stereotype of trying to input only through transformation and combination of basic phonemes.
<<<<< 102-0979 0013 >>>>>
In English alphabet, in fact,
ㅡ Ⅰ / ＼ ⊂ ⊃ J O U S You can complete all the alphabet in a combination of about, because a lot of strokes required
All alphabets are assigned to complete type only.
<<<<< 102-0994 0016 >>>>>
Actually,
The consonants of the heaven and the earth also included all the consonants in the green, and all of the consonants were already assigned. The same is true of the Pantech family of Sky and Curitel.
<<<<< 103-00005 0027 >>>>>
LG EZ-type consonants were also input using the Stroke Add button or the Double Consonant button.
The same goes for Motorola.
<<<<< 103-0006 0006 >>>>>
Now only the vowels are assigned to the completed form, and all that remains is to enter them with the twin input method.
<<<<< 103-0008 0012 >>>>
anyway,
Even beginner is satisfied while being able to use conventional method,
All of the Korean phonemes should be assigned to the complete form, so that the experienced users can be satisfied by entering them quickly.
<<<<< 103-0009 0035 >>>>>
So what I said before
The best way is Samsung's heaven and earth,
-LG EZ is the best way.
It makes no sense,
from now on
-The best combination of Samsung's Cheonjiin and twins input method,
-The best way is to combine LG EZ and twin input.
-The best combination of Pantech's Sky and Curitel's method and twin input method,
-The combination of Motorola and twin input is the best way.
<<<<< 103-0010 0008 >>>>
Anyway, when you send a text message contest on the small keypad, the way you apply the twins is unconditionally number one.
(To date
If you look at various mobile community boards and portal site comments,
`Samsung Cheonjiin can learn quickly, but when you write, you get a lot of strokes, and when you enter the phonemes assigned to the same button consecutively, it becomes inconvenient because there are many problems that require you to manually move the cursor using the right button. And 'LG EZ method is difficult to learn because there are many hidden (= derived) phonemes, but once you learn, you can enter easily and quickly because there are fewer strokes and no problem with the same button.
In fact, LG EZ is ranked first in various character input competitions and is recognized for its excellence in speed.
(However, there are 15 phonemes that require 3 or more strokes to enter the LG EZ method, and there is a problem that there is a large copper line for pressing the button * (stroke add function) and button # (double consonant function) on the 4th row. ,
The twin input method solves all the problems of the conventional input method, whether it is a natural or LG ez method, so that in the conventional input mode, all phonemes can be input within 1 or 2 tyres using the twin input method without changing the character mode. , Can be very small in 1 ~ 3 rows.)
<<<<< 103-0026 0031 >>>>
This is summarized in the table in Figure 36.9.
Out of 40 phonemes
Samsung Cheonjiin way
9 phonemes you can enter
12 phonemes that can be input by two
13 3 tag
4 Taga 4
There are two five strokes, so you need an average of 2.45.
The Pantech Sky or Curitel method averages 1.95 hits,
<<<<< 103-0030 0004 >>>>>
LG EZ averages 2.18 strokes.
<<<<< 103-0031 0004 >>>>>
Motorola averages 1.98 hits.
<<<<< 103-0042 0028 >>>>>
All 12 buttons on your phone are used except for Samsung.
If you just list all 40 phonemes on 12 buttons, you'll get an average of 2.2.
As you can see, the traditional methods could reduce the number of phonemes displayed on the button, but did not contribute much to reducing the average number of strokes.
The number of vowels in the form of heaven and earth, LG, and Pantech was only optional rather than special.
<<<<< 103-0050 0005? 103-0063 >>>>>
Conventionally, the more phonemes assigned to completion type, the lower the average stroke.
<<<<< 103-0057 0033 >>>>>>
Also, after listing 40
When the twin input method is applied, the average number of strokes is 1.7 strokes by simple calculation, and the fatal shortcomings of the conventional input methods are not generated. When there is a sequence of letters in the same order for each button, which is the effect presented in the video, if the various effects such as the same use of the shift button pressed in the back can be used as it is and the number of moving lines is reduced, Qwerty keyboard can be entered so that the average average speed is 1.2 ~ 1.3 strokes.
<<<<<< 9999 >>>>>
Wrap-up
Please refer to the detailed descriptions in this cafe for details, applications and details that have not been mentioned so far.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 33: Proof of the fastest twin input method on mobile phones
<<<<< 103-0975 0041 >>>>>
Let's prove that the twin input method is the fastest when entering text on a mobile phone with a small keypad.
Cell phones with small keypads have 12 buttons, buttons *, #, 0-9.
Since there are 12 buttons, only 12 letters can be entered by pressing the button once.
The long press method is less efficient when entering general characters such as alphabets or Korean characters, but not special characters.
<<<<< 103-0977 0023 >>>>>
Now consider the case of entering more than one letter.
Multi-tap method by pressing the same button several times until the desired character appears.
There are many strokes, and if you enter the letters assigned to the same button consecutively, you will have a fatal problem of moving the cursor manually.
<<<<< 103-0981 0021 >>>>>
So if you enter a combination of two buttons, you can enter two.
Without any combination rules, you can't remember and enter a combination of 12 buttons that you pressed first and 12 buttons that you pressed later, that is, 12 * 12 to match 144 combinations and 144 characters,
<<<<< 103-0986 0023 >>>>>
It's easier to remember, and it's more efficient to enter a specific combination rule that's convenient.
Among the methods with such combination rules
If you enter the twin input method,
These videos
((((((
1 “Experimental input of alphabets A to Z quickly in conventional keyboard“
2 “6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example 1”
3 “6 New Advantages of Entering Words Using English Words as an Example 2”
4 “Quickly enter 40 English words”
or
5 “How to apply to Samsung Anycall Cheonin input method”
6 “Method 2 for Samsung Anycall Cheonin”
7 “How to apply to Samsung Anycall Cheonin input method 3”
))))))
Due to the advantages described in Theory, the speed of normal text input is the fastest on mobile phones with twin input pads.
<<<<< 103-0991 0043 >>>>>
In addition,
A button with a letter assigned to it
The buttons assigned to any particular function, such as the character mode change function, the case change function, and the addition of the double consonant stroke, can be shifted into twins, so that the shift button functions can be assigned in various ways. Because there are various advantages such as easy input even if you assign a character, special characters such as punctuation marks and picture emoticons can be easily entered in the normal character mode without changing the character mode to the special character mode.
So the input speed of special characters is the fastest.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Videos Number 34
Implement CLR, INS, DEL, ENTER functions in letter format
<<<<< 102-0623 0013 >>>>>
CLR, INS, DEL, ENTER functions
You can assign it to buttons 1, 2, 3, and 5 as shown in <Figure05>.
<<<<< 102-0629 0030 >>>>>>
In Korean keyboard as in <Figure 06>
I've assigned the CLR, INS, and DEL functions to the fourth letters on buttons 1, 2, and 3.
I assigned the enter function to the 6th letter of button 5.
These are the buttons on the computer keyboard, which I added to eliminate the inconvenience of not being on the phone keypad.
In the age of mobile phone Internet seems to be a necessary feature.
<<<<< 102-0630 0013 >>>>>
Enter function is
In the text input mode, you will need this when you want to change a line while typing a sentence.
When not in text input mode, it can be used as OK button function.
<<<<< 102-0634 0017 >>>>>
In conventional mobile phones, the CLR button functions as the backspace of the computer keyboard in the text input mode.
Since there is no button that functions as an insert button and a delete button on the computer keyboard, I added INS and DEL functions.
<<<<< 102-0641 0035 >>>>>
And there was a CLR button in the conventional mobile phone. Why did you add the CLR function,
If you mistyped any phoneme while typing Hangul,
Conventionally, when you press the CLR button, the entire syllable is erased.
Now, if you don't want to erase the whole syllable, but only the phonemes you accidentally mistyped
Erase phonemes one by one
To cancel / cancel a function that was realized just before / including a stroke addition function or a double consonant function.
I tried adding it as a function.
<<<<< 102-0647 0053 >>>>>
For example, in the input method
When operating the celestial button to enter ㅙ
. ㅡ ㅣ. ㅣ In order
. When you type ㅡ ㅣ ㅣ
This function does not erase the entire Hangul character, but also deletes only the phonemes that you entered by mistake.
Since the CLR function is the fourth letter of button 1
Press and hold down the shift button to enter the fourth character, then press button 1 assigned to. After erasing only the last wrong entry. ㅣ Enter more in that order.
<<<<< 102-0652 0029 >>>>
In English, this is not the same as Korean, but conventionally, to press the CLR button, you have to press the CLR button directly above the 12 keyboards, so the copper wire is cut.
Now, even if you use the shift button to hit the conventional CLR function, the copper wire is much less, so if you are familiar with the twin input method, it may be more convenient than before.
<<<<<< 102-0656 0031 >>>>
If you want to use CLR, INS, DEL, ENTER, etc. continuously,
E.g
If you want to demonstrate the DEL function continuously
DEL is assigned to the fourth letter of button 3
Press button 2 from the button 2 or 8, which is the shift button to input the fourth letter, and keep pressing the button 3 continuously in this state.
<<<<<< 102-0659 0013 >>>>
You can also add function buttons such as the HOME button, END button, PAGE UP button, PAGE DOWN button, and ESC button on the computer keyboard in the same way.
<<<<<< 0660 >>>>>
Wrap-up
Please refer to the detailed descriptions in this cafe for details, applications and details that have not been mentioned so far.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Videos35 times
Fast space input
<<<<< 102-0662 0026 >>>>>
On a computer keyboard, the space button is the button most often used for typing sentences, so it has the largest size.
In the multi-tap method of inputting characters in any language, the cursor must be moved to the space function when the characters assigned to the same button are continuously input, but the space function is necessary.
<<<<<< 102-0664 0031 >>>>>
So, in fact, I need to be able to enter spaces faster and more conveniently than normal alphabets or Korean phonemes.
To tell you the conclusion,
The batting requires two strokes, but the copper line is zero, so the conventional method is one stroke, but it's much easier and faster than pressing the right button or the dedicated space button.
<<<<< 102-0667 0016 >>>>>
There are two ways to input space in the conventional mobile phone.
Firstly, like when you type in Hangul, there is a way to use the right button as a space button.
<<<<< 102-0670 0025 >>>>>
Secondly, there is a way to use button *, 0, or button # as the space button button, as in English.
This way every time you enter a space
I need a big vertical line in four rows,
Each time you press the Space button with both hands, you also need a large horizontal line.
<<<<< 102-0677 0016 >>>>>>
The space button on your computer's keyboard is always in a position where you can easily get your thumb on both hands without moving your hands.However, in the case of a mobile phone, you need to consciously move your thumb to the space-only button.
<<<<< 102-0681 0025 >>>>>
On a computer's keyboard, the thumb is only used when the space button is pressed.
Cell phones with QWERTY press all the buttons with their thumbs, so to enter a space, you have to consciously move your thumb to the space-only button anyway.
<<<<< 102-0684 0020 >>>>>
In any case, the conventional mobile phone was the most frequent letter (?), But the consideration was not enough.
So let me introduce four ways to handle space easily in such a small pad.
The third and fourth methods are recommended.
<<<<< 102-0687 0023 >>>>>
First,
As in Figure 22, the CLR, INS, DEL, and Enter functions are assigned as letters.
There is a way to set the space for a particular sequence of characters on a button.
The more spaces you assign to the buttons, the more convenient it will be.
Detailed explanations can be found in the detailed description.
<<<<< 102-0690 0035 >>>>>
The second,
As if the twin input method is uniquely applied to LG Electronics' Hangul input method, the function of adding stroke or double consonant button is shifted.
The function of the space button is shifted so that any space can be entered by holding down the button to which the space function is assigned.
(The more shift buttons in the space function, the easier it will be to enter the space.)
Detailed explanations can be found in the detailed description.
<<<<< 102-0696 0039 >>>>>
(<Host cell phone>)
Third,
When two or more buttons are pressed simultaneously, a space is entered. No matter where your current two-handed thumb is, just close your eyes and press two or more of these. It can be applied to almost all conventional character input methods.
However, in the character input method with twin input method, twin input method does not seem to use this method because it presses the shift button and presses the button assigned the desired letter.
<<<<< 102-0701 0055 >>>>>
(<Host cell phone>)
So there is a fourth way
When three or more buttons are pressed simultaneously, a space is entered. No matter where your current two-handed thumb is, just close your eyes and press three or more of these.
In reality, you can think of a two-handed thumb holding two buttons per hand, two buttons per hand, for a total of 0.2 seconds.
Then anyway, three or more are pressed.
You can press the button so that the button is close to the center of the thumb's pressing area.
Like this, the type with the border between the button is pressed well.
<<<<< 102-0704 0027 >>>>>
The third and fourth method
Wherever your thumb is
Just press it on the spot,
You only need to move to the button position needed for the next letter and just press it. Since the copper wire to input only space is 0 (ZERO), the speed is increased by one stroke.
<<<<< 102-0709 0036 >>>>>
You need to press two or more buttons, but it's much faster than pressing the right button, and it's much faster. So 3 and 4 are the most recommended.
Of course, it can be done in parallel with the conventional method of pressing the right button or pressing the space-only button on the fourth row.
And you can also use the 1,2,3,4 method all together.
<<<<<< 9999 >>>>>
Wrap-up
Please refer to the detailed descriptions in this cafe for details, applications and details that have not been mentioned so far.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 36 101-0351
T9 input method improvement 1
<<<<< 101-0351 0043 >>>>>
(<Figure 03>)
In fact, even before the twin input method was developed, the T9 method was unnecessary when entering Korean characters. Now, when the twin input method is developed, the T9 method is no longer necessary for any character input including English.
For example, it is because English can be input faster than twin input method than Hangul which input speed is greatly increased by twin input method.
However, there are some users who prefer the T9 method, and the twin input method solves the fatal disadvantage of the conventional T9 method.
<<<<< 101-0358 0039 >>>>>
The most popular text input method in the world is the multi-tap method of pressing the same button several times until the desired letter appears.
The next most commonly used method is the T9 method.
When entering English in Korean mode and English mode in Korea, only multi-tap method is used.
Except for a few countries including Korea, there are two built-in methods, text input method, multi tap method and T9 method.
<<<<< 101-0365 0120 >>>>>>
What is T9 method
Spelling is not confirmed by pressing the button once even though multiple letters are assigned to one button. The user / is a way of entering a letter / by selecting the desired word.
So it is also called single tap method.
Samsung's T9 mode, Motorola's iTAP mode, and Nokia's PREDICTIVE TEXT INPUT mode have different names and methods.
For example, if you press the `4663` button
Button 4` is assigned 'GHI`.
Button 6` is assigned 'MNO`,
Because button 3` is assigned `DEF`
When the device searches the dictionary database for the combination, the device presents `GONE`,` HOME`, `HOOD`,` HOOF`, `HONE`, and` GOOF` in order of frequency of use. The format to choose from.
<<<<< 101-0374 0152 >>>>>
At first glance, it seems very convenient, but it has the following disadvantages.
In other words,
Words that are not in the DB cannot be entered in T9 mode, you can change to the multi-tap mode, enter a word you want, register it in the DB, or return to T9 mode, and enter other words in T9 mode.
so
The vocabulary dictionary DB should be configured in advance in the system, but the new vocabulary and abbreviated words that occur continuously must be registered in the vocabulary dictionary. In particular, it is practically impossible to register all the vocabulary necessary for information communication environment such as person's name and internet address in DB in advance.
Therefore, if the vocabulary is not registered in advance, you must use the multi-tap method, so the single tap method of one key per character has a limitation.
In addition, Korean and Japanese do not have a fixed fixed part and change in various forms. Therefore, the number of cases cannot be accommodated in many cases.
(English also seems to have difficulty in using the T9 method because of adding ~ ed to past tense, presenting ~ ing, and plural ~ s.)
Even without this problem, Hangul can be typed faster in the conventional way than in the twin input method, so there is no need for the T9 method, which requires the user to move the cursor to the desired word among the candidate words.
<<<<< 101-0389 0057 >>>>>
Anyway, even though the T9 system is embedded in a mobile phone with a small keypad, it is inconvenient to input text.
(<Quarterly keyboard photo>)
I have a cell phone with a QWERTY keyboard.
Now, even on a small keypad, you can type too quickly with twin input, so you don't need a QWERTY phone like you do in Korea.
And when there are a lot of candidate words, the T9 method is very cumbersome because it takes a lot of strokes to move the cursor several times to the desired word.
In addition, Japanese has five letters per button. However, the number of characters assigned to each button increases the number of candidate words presented.
<<<<< 101-0390 0029 >>>>>
(<Figure 03>)
Speaking of how to apply the twin input method in T9 mode,
In T9 mode, you can use the conventional T9 method, but you can use the twin input method without changing the character mode.
In T9 mode, you can enter all phonemes in two strokes.
The definitive method is to input all phonemes including the first letter in the twin input method.
<<<<<< 101-0394 0059 >>>>
Assigned to each button
Use button 1 or button 3 momentarily to enter the first letter,
Use the shift button to enter the second letter, use button 4 or button 6 momentarily,
Use the shift button to enter the third letter, use button 7 or button 9 for a while,
It is a shift button for inputting the fourth letter. It is a twin input method such as using Button 2 or Button 8 momentarily.
In other words, the first letter assigned to each button is also entered as the twin input method, compared to the multi-tap and twin input methods.
finally,
If you input by single input, it is inputted as a candidate letter, and it is regarded as input by the conventional T9 method.
If you use the shift button with the twin input method, it is inputted as a fixed letter.
Thus, there are three advantages that improve the shortcomings of the conventional T9 method.
<<<<< 101-0397 or 102-0397 102-0003 0022 >>>>
Firstly, words that are not in the DB can be inputted in the form of one or two strokes in T9 mode without changing to the multi-tap mode, and various advantages of the twin input method are displayed.
<<<<< 101-0410 0031 >>>>>
(MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI)
In the video titled 40 English words, the first letter of any button M, WGTPTA was entered as a single stroke when entering the twin input mode in the multi-tap mode, but now it is possible to use the shift button as the twin input method in T9 mode. The difference between the speed and the last time is not much.
<<<<< 101-0411 0016 >>>>>
(MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI)
(Quick input)
<<<<<< 101-0420 0045 >>>>>
In the first letter, M, W G T P T A also used the shift button to quickly enter the words here.
However, it is much faster than the conventional multi-tap method or the conventional Hangul input speed.
Because you can enter all the phonemes in one or two strokes, the load is distributed evenly on both hands, and the shift button of the same function is only in one or three rows, not in four large rows, mainly in the first and third columns. Because they are on both sides, the copper lines are smaller and you can enter them quickly and easily.
<<<<< 101-0422 0041 >>>>
Should we try again slowly?
(MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI)
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Videos37 times
T9 input method improvement 2
<<<<< 101-0431 0019 >>>>>
Secondly, it's a secondary one,
Even if only one spelling is entered and entered, the number of candidate words presented by the device is drastically reduced so that the user can enter the words quickly.
The more definite letters, the more candidate words are reduced.
<<<<<< 101-0436 0105 >>>>>
For example, if you want to type `HOOD`
If you press 4663 by the conventional T9 method, six words of `GONE`,` HOME`, `HOOD`,` HOOF`, `HONE`, and` GOOF` are suggested as candidate words and you need to move the cursor to HOOD.
Now, if you enter 466 and only the last letter D is fixed, that is, if you press D button 3 while pressing button 1 from the button 1 or 3, which is the shift button for entering D, the device enters D Since only one `HOOD` is presented as a candidate word, the user can quickly move the cursor to the desired word such as selecting and giving without moving the cursor.
The fewer letters you use, the fewer candidates you will have.
<<<<< 101-0437 0014 >>>>
Words that contain a lot of derivatives or prefixes or roots have a huge number of candidate words, and even if only one or two letters are confirmed, the number of candidate words is greatly reduced.
<<<<< 101-0443 0044 >>>>>
Thirdly, it's also a secondary one. With the twin input method, the special characters * or? Can be easily typed, making it easy to find words and phone numbers using the single letter * or?
And
In T9 mode, special characters, including punctuation and picture emoticons, are assigned to each button to make the most of the twin input method.
In case of inputting by the conventional T9 method, that is, the single stroke, it is better to restrict the recognition to the candidate letters and to input only by the twin input method.
<<<<< 101-0445 >>>>>
Please refer to the detailed description for more details and various applications.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 38: Improved the way of searching Chinese words or searching English phone book by T9 method
<<<<< 104-0128 0016 >>>>>
You can understand this video by watching the video “T9 Input Method Improvement 1,2” first, and the description of this video will be explained very briefly.
<<<<< 104-0131 0030 >>>>>
When entering Chinese characters on a mobile phone in China
After the Chinese alphabet is represented in the English alphabet, several kanji or kanji words that match it are presented, and the most frequently used method is to select and input the desired one.
It's like Hyeonsi which converts Hanja to Korean after inputting Hanja in Korean word processor, except that it uses English alphabet instead of Hangul.
<<<<< 104-0136 0044 >>>>>
If the name 中華民國 大 統領 is in the phone book or word database,
If this is expressed in the English alphabet
Expressed as JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG.
In the past, in order to search for what is written in Chinese characters 中華民國 大 統領,
(((((
1 JUNG
2 JUNGHWA
3 JUNGHWAM
4 JUNGHWAMINGUK DE
5 JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLI
6 JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG
)))))
In this way, you must enter search terms in order from the beginning.
<<<<< 104-0146 0030 >>>>>
However, if you enter a search term in this way
Enter a short search term like 1.2
Even with a short input, it is difficult to input the English alphabet in the conventional multi-type method, and too many candidate words are presented.
To enter a long search term like 5,6 so that a small number of candidate words are presented, there are too many troubles to enter the search term.
<<<<< 104-0147 0037 >>>>
I present
The way to do this is to enter only part of the translation of each kanji into the English alphabet.
And to separate each kanji is to use a separator such as space or comma.
In this video, we will use commas.
You can also omit the comma when only the first alphabet of each Chinese character is used as a search term. In other words, if there are no commas in the search term, only the first alphabet of each kanji is written.
<<<<< 104-0157 0054 >>>>>
This is because JHMGDTL, the first alphabet of conversion of each Chinese character to the alphabet of the President of the Republic of China, is used as a search word, so there is no comma separating each Chinese character.
(((((
The first letter of JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG
J
J D
J DTL
JH
JH DT
JHM
JHM D
JHMG
DTL
TL
JHMG D
JHMG DT
JHMG DTL
)))))
<<<<< 104-0171 0103 >>>>>
Even if only the first alphabet is used, if you use comma, which is a separator between each Chinese character, you can enter a search word in this way.
Omitted here and here.
Anyway, you can search like this.
(((((
JUNGHWAMINGUK DETONGLIONG
J
J D
J D, T, L
J, H
J, H D, T
J, H, M
J, H, M D,, L
J, H,, G
DTL
TL
J,, M, G D
J, H, M, G D, T
J, H, M, G D, T, L
)))))
<<<<< 104-0175 0055 >>>>>
If you have a comma, the search term doesn't just use the first alphabet.
like this
(((((
1 J, HWA, M, GU
2 JU, HW, MI, GUK
3 JUNG, HWA, M, G D, T, L
4 JUN, H, MIN, GU DE, TONG, L
5 JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG
6 J, HWA, MIN, GUK D, TONG, LIONG
7 J, H, M, G D, T, LIONG
8 J,,, DE, TONG, LIONG
9 J, HWA, MI, GUK DE, T, LIONG
10 J, H, MIN, GUK D, T, L
11 JUN, HW, MIN, G DE,, LI
12 JUNG, HWA, M, G DE, T, L
)))))
You can also enter, for example.
<<<<< 104-0183 0029 >>>>>
And,
If anything on your computer mobilizes the letters * and?
5 searches ((5 JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG
)) Can be modified in many ways, including in this case.
* Also used? Also used is the number of candidate letters.
((((((
JUNG, HWA, MIN, GUK DE, TONG, LIONG
JUN?, H ??, MI?, GU? D?, TO ??, LI ???
5U6?, H ??, MI?, G8? D?, T6 ??, L4 ???
J *, H *, MI?, GU * D?, TONG, LI? NG
6 *, 4 *, MI?, G8 * D?, T66G, LI? N4
5864,492, M ??, G85 D *, * O6G,? IONG
)))))
Anyway, as we have seen
You can enter many forms of search terms.
You can type the search terms you are most comfortable with, but you can also find the Hanja data you want quickly and easily.
<<<<< 104-0189 0059 >>>>>
And
Phone book in English-speaking countries
VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON MOZART
Is a search term to search for the name
If you use some spelling of VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON MOZART,
You can use various queries like this.
These things are so simple.
Anyway, you can find the data you want easily and quickly.
(((((
VOLFGANG AMADEUS VON MOZART
1 669278
2 2623387 866
3 387
4 V A V M
5 VO AM V MOZ
6 MOZART
7 A6? 3E8S V * 6
8 M6 * 2
9 A6 * 3E V *
10 * 8S V *
)))))
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 39: Example of a text conversation using punctuation pictures emoticons
<<<<< 103-0001 0026? 103-0999 >>>>
If you use the twin character input method, you can enter punctuation or picture emoticons easily and quickly.
When you talk with your phone text message, you can insert a lot of punctuation marks or picture emoticons to convey meaning more accurately, and have a more emotional and fun conversation.
Many people have already been longing for it.
<<<< 104-0013 0050 >>>>>
First, let's look at a conversation consisting of only normal characters without punctuation or picture emoticons.
If you are happy to see if you are mischievous or angry, you will not know exactly the emotional state and intention of men and women, and the conversation will be dry.
Read for 30 seconds
((((((((
Man: Baby, what are you doing now?
Woman: Just stay home
Man: not taking a bath
Woman: You're crazy
Man: Congratulations on your birthday.
Woman: Thank you. But you are the only one
Man: Give me a birthday present. Watch a movie together
Woman: Yeah, let's watch a movie, eat rice, have a cocktail, and have a beer.
Man: Great, even karaoke
Woman: See you later
Man: OK
)))))))
<<<<< 104-0027 0107 >>>>>
The following is a case of using a lot of punctuation marks and picture emoticons.
You can express the mental state of men and women well, the meaning is more clear, more emotional, and fun conversation.
You'll want to do text chat over and over again.
If you often write a heart like this at the end of a sentence,
Older adults will now also send a lot of texts to their children, colleagues and friends.
((((((((
Man: Baby (((What are you doing now?
Woman: I'm just at home.
Man: Do not take a bath? ♨
Woman: To be naughty ~. Crazy ~
Man: What is your birthday today? congratulations.
Woman: Thank you. It's only you though.
Man: Give me a birthday present. Watch a movie together ~
Woman: Okay, let's eat movies, have a cocktail, and have a beer.
Man: Great, even karaoke
Woman: See you later.
Man: OK
)))))
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video Number 40
Quick composition or play
<<<<< 102-0617 0041 >>>>>
By applying the twin input method, you can quickly enter a number of characters, including letters, letter symbols, and picture emoticons.
Even products that have the ability to compose or play on the phone can use the twin input method to draw or play notes at high speed.
One octave consists of seven basic notes, five semitones, and a total of 12 notes.
0 ~ 9, *, # 12 buttons make 12 notes, and different octaves can be expressed using shift buttons of different functions.
<<<<< 102-0618 0035 >>>>>
Each button is pressed once to express the reference octave,
Six different shift buttons represent different octaves,
You can easily express a total of seven octaves.
Because all notes of seven octaves are used in one or two strokes, even with two strokes, both hands can be used in one beat, and the advantages of the twin input methods, such as the six advantages of entering words, are displayed. is.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 41 101-256
Hangul input with ultra compact keyboard with 4 ~ 8 buttons
<<<<< 101-0256 0049 >>>>
While mobile phones are becoming larger and larger, such as liquid crystals,
In the future, you may develop the smallest mobile phone with few buttons.
There is one inconvenience in using conventional recording and recording devices such as digital camcorders, digital cameras, and digital recorders.
The recorded or recorded file name is stored only as a serial number that contains numbers, and the device may not be able to do so even if the user wants to change the file name to text format.
However, such devices also have at least 4 to 8 buttons, including four-way buttons, so I suggest that you assign letters or numbers to those buttons as well.
<<<<< 101-0262 0057 >>>>
First of all, let me introduce how to input Korean with 4 buttons.
The vowel is input by the input method of Samsung Electronics.
Consonants are typed almost like LG's ez method.
Let's find out in detail.
<Figure 55>
1 ㅣ Stroke? 2 . Pair a
3 ㄴ ㄹ ㅁ 4 ㅡ ㅅ ㅇ
Button1
The first letter is Cheonjiin's cloth, or vowel |
The second letter is stroke addition
The third letter is just a special character. I've assigned to
Button 2
The first letter is Cheonjiin's Ji (.)
The second letter is double consonant function,
The third letter is a
Button 3
The first letter is b
The second letter is ㄹ
The third letter is ㅁ
Button 4
The first letter is Cheonjiin's seal,
The second letter is ㅅ
The third letter is ㅇ.
<<<<< 101-0274 0038 >>>>>
Use Button 1 or Button 2 as a shift button to enter the second letter,
By using Button 3 or Button 4 as a shift button to enter the third letter,
Of each button
The first letters, Cheonjiin and ㄹ are entered as danta,
The second letter is entered by pressing the button assigned to the letter you want to enter while pressing Button 1 or Button 2.
The third letter can be entered by holding down the button 3 or the button 4 and pressing the button to which the letter to be entered is assigned.
<<<<< 101-0276 0055 >>>>>
The use of the collection Cheonjiin (pointing to) is the same as that of the conventional Samsung mobile phone.
In consonants
In the conventional LG Electronics EZ method, all of the ㄱ ㄹ ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ could be entered as a single stroke
Now only b can be entered as a single stroke, and ㄱ ㄹ ㅁ ㅅ ㅇ is entered only by the twin input method.
(Because it is to input the collection as it is in the conventional way.)
In addition
In double consonant function or stroke addition function,
Previously, the button * or # was placed as a dedicated button.
Now, the consonant function and the stroke addition function will be performed by inputting letters.
<<<<< 101-0278 0021 >>>>>
If you want to enter
Just like the conventional LG electronic method, you can make stroke by adding stroke to ㅅ, and stroke by adding stroke to ㅅ.
There are two ways, A and B. (It's up to the rules, but I recommend the B method.)
<<<<< 101-0280 0046 >>>>>
First, enter it in the A method
Since this is the second letter of button 4,
Press and hold button 1, the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter, and press button 4 to display ㅅ on the screen.
Since the stroke add function is the second letter of button 1,
Press and hold button 2, which is a shift button that allows you to enter a second letter, and press button 1 to activate the stroke addition function to make ㅅ,
In addition, while pressing Button 2, press Button 1 to activate the Stroke Add function to make.
Let's do it quickly
H
<<<<< 101-0281 0039 >>>>>
In B method
Since this is the second letter of button 4,
Press and hold button 1, the shift button that allows you to enter the second letter, and press button 4 to display ㅅ on the screen.
Since the stroke add function is the second letter of button 1,
Press and hold button 2, which is the second button to enter the second letter, and press button 1 two times to activate the stroke addition function twice, making s and s.
Let's do it quickly
H
<<<<< 101-0293 0107 >>>>>
I've tried A and B methods like this
Vowel input speed is the same as that of Samsung Electronics.
In consonant input
When typing the basic letters except a and b and adding strokes or double consonants, two strokes are required.
When using the B method, when entering the second double consonant or the second additional consonant letter, the stroke is increased by one stroke more than the number of strokes when the first double consonant or the first stroke additional letter is input. ,
Since there are 4 buttons and there are very few wires,
It is calculated that the consonant input speed will be about 1.5 times that of the conventional LG EZ method.
So, in the end, the consonants and vowels are calculated to be only 1.2 ~ 1.3 times that of the combination of conventional Cheonjiin and EZ.
<<<<<< 101-0308 0121 >>>>>
Now let's see how to enter Korean with 6 buttons.
(Figure 54)
It is almost the same as the traditional Samsung Electronics input method.
The vowel is input by the conventional cheonjiin input method with cheonjiin assigned as the first letter of buttons 4, 5, 6,
Use Button 1 or Button 2 as a shift button to enter the second letter,
Use button 3 or button 4 as a shift button to enter the third letter,
Enter button 5 or button 6 as the shift button to enter the fourth letter.
Two consonants with 19 consonant special characters, including ㄲ ㄸㅃ ㅆㅉ, can be entered as twin or single strokes.
Conventional input method of Samsung Electronics Cheonji, while using nine buttons, consonant collision occurs when consonants are input, and two consonants are required.
Like this, even with 6 buttons, you can input all consonants as 1 or 2 strokes and there is no consonant collision phenomenon.
In a sense, it is more efficient than the conventional method of Samsung Electronics.
<<<<< 101-0309 0034 >>>>>
Now let's see how to enter Korean with 8 buttons.
(Figure 53)
All 40 Korean phonemes were assigned to each of the five buttons for each button.
Shift button operation to 2, 3, 4, 5
You can enter all 40 Korean phonemes as 1 or 2 strokes.
In the conventional mobile phone, even though 12 buttons were used, the entirety of 40 Korean phonemes could not be input within 2 tyres, but 3, 4 and 5 strokes were required.
<<<<< 101-0316 0034 >>>>
And,
Numbers are in numeric mode
You can assign one to three numbers per button to make typing easier than letters.
However,
If you want to input up to the number in normal text mode, you can assign 1 ~ 3 numbers per button and input it in other group letters input method (eg 2 ~ 3 group letters input method).
Please refer to the detailed description for details and various applications other than the above mentioned.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 42 number 101-318
English input with ultra small keyboard of 4 ~ 8 buttons
<<<<< 101-0318 0048 >>>>>
While mobile phones are becoming larger and larger, such as liquid crystals,
In the future, you may develop the smallest mobile phone with few buttons.
While using a recording and recording device such as a conventional digital camcorder, digital camera, digital recorder, there was one inconvenience.
Recorded or recorded file names are only stored as serial numbers that contain numbers, and on those devices, users sometimes wanted to change the file name to text format, which was a pity.
However, such devices also have at least 4 to 8 buttons, including four-way buttons, so I suggest that you assign letters or numbers to those buttons as well.
<<<<< 101-0327 0104 >>>>>
First let's see how to enter the alphabet with the eight buttons.
<Figure 49>
1 A B C D 2 E F G H
3 H I J K 4 L M N O
5 P Q R S 6 T U V W
7 XYZ? 8 ! & $
Four letters are assigned per button.
I've assigned up to spaces and four special characters.
Operate the shift button 2, 3, 4
(Use button 3 or button 4 as a shift button to enter the second letter,
Use button 5 or button 6 as a shift button to enter the third letter,
Use button 7 or button 8 as a shift button to enter the fourth letter.
(There is no need to shift buttons to Button 1 or Button 2.
if not
You can also use Button 1 or Button 2 as a shift button to enter the first letter.)
(<Figure 03>)
In the conventional mobile phone, even though nine buttons are used including the space button, an alphabet that requires three or more strokes
There were 10 c, f, Ilor svyzs, and if you enter the letters assigned to the same button consecutively, you can enter them continuously only after moving the cursor with the space button. And special characters and spaces can also be entered in one or two strokes, and letters assigned to the same button can be entered immediately without having to move the cursor artificially.
<<<<< 101-0328 0028 >>>>>
Now let's see how to enter the alphabet with the six buttons.
<Figure 50>
1 A B C D
E 2 F G H I
J
3 K L M N
O 4 P Q R S
T
5 U V W X
Z 6 Y? ! ~
The first line of each button has four letters and special characters, and the second line has one letter and a space.
Shift button operation to 2, 3, 4,
The second line of text is long press to enter.
<<<<< 101-0335 0034 >>>>>
Or you can do something like this.
Per button
The first line has three alphabets or special characters assigned to it.
The second line is assigned two alphabetic or special characters.
<Figure 51>
1 A B C
D E 2 F G H
I J
3 K L M
N O 4 P Q R
S T
5 U V W
X Y 6 Z? !
~
The shift button operation is set to 1,2,3, and the second line characters can be input by the second group character input method.
How to enter after that is described in the detailed explanation.
<<<<< 101-0341 0044 >>>>>
Now let's enter the alphabet with the four buttons.
<Figure 52>
1 A B C
D E F
G ~ 2 H I J
K L M
N @
3 O P Q
R S T
U? 4 V W X
Y Z
/:
Of each button
The letter in the first line is defined as the first group,
Define the letter in the second line as the second group,
By defining the letter in the third line as the third group,
Divided into three groups, the first to third groups may be input by a twin letter input method.
Use Button 1 or Button 2 as a shift button to enter the second letter,
Use button 3 or button 4 as a shift button to enter the third letter.
Please refer to the detailed explanation for more details.
<<<<<< 101-0342 0032 >>>>>
And
Numbers are in numeric mode
You can assign one to three numbers per button to make typing easier than letters.
However,
If you want to input up to the number in normal character mode, assign one or two numbers per button and input them in other group character input method (eg, second or third group character input method).
Please refer to the detailed description for more details and various applications other than the above mentioned.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Videos43 times
Comparison of twin input method with star &# method
<<<<< 102-0406 0054 >>>>>
There is a way to use the shift button like the twin input method.
I've named it '* &# WAY'.
The traditional `* &# method '
When no characters are assigned to button * and button #
Use the button * as a shift button to enter the second letter assigned to each button,
The button # is used as a shift button to enter the third letter assigned to each button.
In other words
After pressing the button * and releasing it, if you press a letter button, the second letter assigned to the letter button is entered.
After pressing button #, releasing and pressing any letter button, the third letter assigned to a letter button is entered.
(You can also follow Button * or Button # to a character button.)
<<<<< 102-0420 0115 >>>>>
By the way, almost all mobile phones have button * or button #
As in Korea, regular characters are assigned, used as the phoneme conversion button for Korean phonemes, or used as a button for text mode conversion,
In addition, since 1 ~ 7 special characters are assigned in foreign countries, or used as a function key for any function such as character conversion function, case conversion function, space function, etc., if you do not move them to other buttons, the `* &# method is used. It's practically impossible to speak `.
It's like LG Electronics Cyon's EZ Hangul Input Method
Use the button * as a stroke add button,
The button # can be used as a consonant button.
(So LG EZ Hangul input method is almost the same as the `* &# method` problem that will be mentioned soon.
Motorola Hangul input method does not have a character conversion function of button *, a character is assigned, and only button # is used as a stroke adding button, so about half of LG EZ method or `* &# method` occurs.)
<<<<< 102-0455 0133 >>>>>>
Disadvantages of `* &# way`
Since only Button * and Button # are used as Shift Buttons,
As shown in <Figure 22.7>, the improved Hangul keyboard type with a button assigned 4 letters per button,
It is not applicable to the writing system of virtually any language that has buttons with more than 4 letters assigned to each button, including English, Roman, Japanese, and Thai.
In English only,
In the standard keyboard as shown in Fig.03 where 4 buttons are assigned to Button 7, and 4 WXYZ are assigned to Button 9, the '* &# method' does not have a shift button for inputting the fourth letter.
You can't enter the fourth assigned S and Z in two strokes,
To enter S, press Button 7 four times in succession.
When entering Z, button 9 must be pressed four times in succession.
As shown in <Fig.04>, even if only 3 alphabets are assigned per button, which is used only in Korea or in English, '* &#' does not have a shift button to input the first letter. Since the first letter cannot be entered decisively, `* &#'can not be combined with T9 mode without changing the rub mode.
<<<<<< 102-0461 0033 >>>>>
Another `* &# way` drawback
Since button * or button # is in four rows, every time button * or button # is pressed, a large copper line in four rows is required, so the vertical copper line is large. And when I press *, # on the 4th row, the angle of thumb bending is also inconvenient.
Twin input method
The shift button can be operated as 2, 3 or 4, so there is no big line in 4 rows.
<<<<< 102-0473 0054 >>>>>
Also, the `* &# method`
The left hand should cover both rows 1,2,3 and the right hand should cover rows 1,2,3, so the horizontal line is large.
And when you enter H, Q, the second letter in the first column, and F, O, Y, the third letter in the third column, the two-handed thumb is biased in the first and third columns, causing interference between the thumbs of both hands.
Especially
Press button * with your left thumb to type Q and press button7 with your right thumb.
Pressing button # 9 with your left thumb after pressing button # with your right thumb to type Y causes both thumb interference to increase.
<<<<< 102-0475 0030 >>>>>
Just like HO, when you enter the second letter H in the first column and the third letter O in the third row, the disadvantages just mentioned will now occur continuously.
Only when entering the second letter of the first column and the third letter of the third column, the copper line is not bigger, but the second and third letters are continuously entered anywhere in 1,2,3, column. Even when you do, the copper line gets bigger.
<<<<< 102-0476 0027 >>>>>
The same is true when entering H, I, the second and third letters of button 4
When you enter K, L, the second and third letters of button 5 like this,
This is also the case when K, O, the second letter of button 5, and O, the third letter of button 6, are entered.
<<<<< 102-0482 0045 >>>>>
But the twin input method
Since there are two shift buttons in the same row, one row, three row, and two rows (pointing to two), the two shift buttons that function the same when you press the shift button are closer to the current position of your right thumb or left thumb. Since the shift button is selected and pressed, the first row covers the left hand, the third row covers the right hand, and the second row covers the right hand or the left hand, depending on the situation. Equalization is better and the stability holding the device is improved.
<<<<< 102-0485 0031 >>>>>
Even when entering the second letter H in the first column and the third letter O in the third column like HO, if you enter H O in this way, you can enter the wires very easily, easily and quickly.
`House input using twin input method is much smaller than` * &#'.
<<<<< 102-0487 0028 >>>>>
At first glance, it seems that a little difference in the speed of movement on the small keypad will not affect the input speed.However, if you actually enter it, there is a big difference in whether you can enter more than one stroke due to the difference in movement.
There are some real examples in the description, including HO, which will touch the skin.
<<<<< 102-0491 0022 >>>>>
And so far, I have only criticized the `* &#'method, but if the gear prefers the` * &#', it may be combined with the twin input and `* &#'. In other words, you can use '* &#' and 'twin' in parallel mode without changing the text mode.
<<<<< 102-0494 0010 >>>>>
Please refer to the detailed descriptions in this cafe for details, applications and details that have not been mentioned so far.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
Video 44 times
Comparison between twin input method and adjacent key input method
Adjacent Key Details
<<<<< 102-0543 >>>>>
The adjacent key input method uses a shift button like the twin input method.
The adjacent key input method is
As a way to use when three letters are assigned to one button
To explain Button 5 as an example,
Press button 5 once to enter the second letter K, which is the second letter.
If you press button 5 while pressing button 4 on the left of button 5, use button 4 as the left button for a while to input J, the first letter of button 5,
If you press button 5 while pressing button 6 on the right side of button 5, you can use button 6 as a shift button for a while so that the third letter L of button 5 is entered.
<<<<< 102-0547 0008 >>>>>
The disadvantage of adjacent key input method
This is the only method used when there are 3 or fewer letters on the button.
<<<<< 102-0550 0006 >>>>>
As shown in <Figure 22.7>, the improved Hangul keyboard type with a button assigned 4 letters per button,
<<<<< 102-0555 0045 >>>>>
There are buttons with more than four letters assigned to each button, including English, Roman, Japanese, and Thai. In fact, they cannot be applied to the writing system of virtually any language.
In English only,
In the English standard keyboard as shown in Fig.03, where 4 PQRSs are assigned to Button 7, and 4 WXYZ are assigned to Button 9, the adjacent key input method does not have a shift button for inputting the fourth character.
You can't enter the fourth assigned S and Z in two strokes,
To enter S, press Button 7 four times in succession.
When entering Z, button 9 must be pressed four times in succession.
<<<<< 102-0560 0038 >>>>>
As shown in <Figure 04>, even in the case of the buttons 7 and 9, which are used only in Korea, and in the case where only three alphabets are assigned, the adjacent key input method has no shift button for inputting the second letter. Since the 2nd letter cannot be input in the mode definitely, the adjacent key input method cannot be combined with the T9 method without changing the character mode.
The twin input method can be parallel with the T9 method without changing the text mode.
<<<<< 102-0561 0021 >>>>>
And,
Adjacent key input method
If you want to enter the first letter of the first column, you want to press the left button of the first row button, but there is no left button in the first row, so without the left button, there is an inconsistent rule to use the upper button.
<<<<< 102-0565 0020 >>>>>
E.g
When button 4 is assigned 'G, H, I'
If you want to type `H`, just press button 4.
To input `I`, press button 4 while pressing button 5 on the right.
<<<<< 102-0570 0032 >>>>>
If you want to enter 'G', even if you try to enter the button on the left side of button 4 in combination with the button and button 4, there is no button on the left side of button 4. By shifting to, you have to adopt the method of inputting G by pressing button 4 while holding button 1, which is inconsistent.
<<<<<< 102-0577 0028 >>>>> After typing the first letter of the buttons 1, 4, and 7 in the first column, you now have the same problem just mentioned.
In addition, button 1 has no left button and no upper button, so button 1 cannot be assigned the first letter, and only two second and three letters can be assigned.
<<<<< 102-0584 0039 >>>>>
To enter the third letter of the third column, F, O, Y, I want to press the right button of the third column button, but there is no right button in the third column, so if there is no right button, it is impossible to use the lower button. The falling law was born again.
To input the third letter of button 9, Y, you need to use the button # of 4 lines with large copper lines as the shift button.
Twin input method
Shift button operation can be done in 2, 3, so there is no big copper line in 4 rows.
<<<<< 102-0596 0054 >>>>>
In addition
When you enter G, P, the first letter assigned to a button in column 1, and F, O, Y, the third letter assigned to a button in column 3, which button should be applied to the shift button? It's easy to get confused if you're not an expert, and the two buttons that are combined are vertically connected so that both hands are biased in one or three rows, causing severe interference between the two hands and lowering the stability of holding the device. It happens more frequently than the #method.
The left hand should cover both 1,2,3 rows, and the right hand should cover both 1,2,3 rows.
<<<<< 102-599 0031 >>>>>
And in a slide-type cell phone
If you hold down button 4 with your left thumb and try to press button 1 with your right thumb, your right thumb will be stuck on the upper slide with the liquid crystal, making it difficult to press button 1.
If you hold down button 6 with your right thumb and try to press button 3 with your left thumb, your left thumb is stuck on the upper slide with the liquid crystal, making it difficult to press button 3.
<<<<< 102-0605 Copy >>>>>
But the twin input method
Since there are two shift buttons in the first row, three rows, and two rows (pointing to two) in the same way, when you press the shift button, the shift button is close to the current position of your right thumb or left thumb. Since the shift button is selected and pressed, the first row covers the left hand, the third row covers the right hand, and the second row covers the right hand or the left hand, depending on the situation. Equalization is better and the stability holding the device is improved.
<<<<< 102-0610 0010 Copy >>>>>
Please refer to the detailed descriptions in this cafe for details, applications and details that have not been mentioned so far.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 45:
Miscellaneous-Improved computer keyboard-Improved toggle keys such as Korean-English key case keys
<<<<< 104-0200 0010 >>>>>
This video uses the computer keyboard toggle key as an example, but it can also be applied to the keyboard toggle keys of mobile phones and PDAs.
<<<<< 104-0201 0037 >>>>>
Toggle keys are keys that change the mode each time you press that key.
Your computer keyboard has the following toggle keys.
This is Han Young key, and Korean and English toggle key.
This is a CAPS LOCK key. Toggle between upper and lower case letters.
This is the INSERT key. Toggle between inserting and modifying letters when entering characters.
Other than that
There is also a NUM LOCK key and a SCROLL LOCK key.
<<<<< 104-0202 0007 >>>>>
When you change modes with the toggle on your computer keyboard, you make a lot of mistakes.
<<<<< 104-0206 0029 >>>>>
I want to type in English
Even though the current language mode is correctly set to English mode, I think that it is Korean mode.
I want to type in English
Even though the current language mode is Korean mode, I am not sure that it is English mode, and I didn't press the Han Young key.
<<<<< 104-0209 0031 >>>>>
I'm trying to type in capital letters
Even though the current text mode is correctly set to uppercase mode, I think that it is a lowercase mode.
I'm trying to type in capital letters
Even though the current text mode is in lowercase mode, I am not sure that it is in uppercase mode, but I do not press the caps lock key.
<<<<< 104-0212 0019 >>>>>
And
I've been typing in lowercase letters in English, but now I'm changing to Hangul mode, and now I'm trying to change to English mode.
When you need to switch between language mode, uppercase and lowercase mode, you make more mistakes.
<<<<< 104-0215 0020 >>>>>
Caps Lockie makes a lot of mistakes even when there is a lamp that tells you the current mode.
It's because you don't look at the lamp because you think you're right or maybe you're right, even though you've misjudged the current mode.
<<<<< 104-0216 0029 >>>>>
At any rate, it's easy to make mistakes when you're working with Toggle.
In this situation, I've been blaming myself on my own so far, but when I think about it, I'm still making a lot of toggle key mistakes to use my computer for nearly 20 years, so I think it's time to fix the system to prevent it.
<<<<< 104-0221 0028 >>>>>
It's not a big system,
In the past, such a mistake occurred because a mode change signal, such as a Korean mode and an English mode, was given by the same signal of the same pressing method of pressing once.
Now, if you give a mode change signal of a different signal for each mode, it is unlikely that such a mistake will occur.
<<<<< 104-0224 0049 >>>>>
There are several ways to give different signals for each mode.
Let's take Hanyoung Key as an example.
Firstly, the method of pressing Hanyoung key is different. If you press Hanyoung key once, you can switch to Korean mode or double click to English mode.
Secondly, the Korean and English keys can be set separately. If you press the Korean key, you can switch to the Korean mode.
If you press the Han-Young key alone, you can switch to Korean mode, press any key other than the Han-Young key with the English-English mode,
Fourthly, you can change Korean and English mode by voice command.
<<<< 104-0225 0015 >>>>>
Now let's explain in more detail how to change the first method of pressing method by mode.
Other methods can be applied in the same way, please refer to the application for details.
<<<<< 104-0228 0038 >>>>
If the signal is divided into single and double clicks,
In the way of pressing the Hanyoung key
Hangul mode unconditionally
If you double click like this,
In the way of pushing the cap lock
If this is a single stroke unconditionally lowercase mode
If you double click like this,
If you change the mode by pressing Han Young or Caps Lock, there will be little mode change.
<<<<< 104-0231 0030 >>>>>
so
If you want to input in Korean but you are not sure whether the current mode is Korean mode or English mode, just press Hanyoung key to confirm Korean mode.
If you want to input in English but you are not sure whether the current mode is Korean mode or English mode, just double-click Hanyoung key to confirm it in English mode.
<<<<< 104-0235 0028 >>>>>
In addition
If you want to enter lowercase letters in English, but you are not sure whether the current mode is Korean or English mode, and if you are not sure whether you are in lowercase or uppercase mode,
For confirmation, just double click Hanyoung key to confirm in English mode,
For confirmation, just tap the cap lock key to confirm the lowercase mode.
<<<<< 104-0237 0028 >>>>>
In addition
If you want to input in uppercase letters, but you are not sure whether the current mode is Korean or English mode, and if you are not sure whether it is lowercase or uppercase mode,
For confirmation, just double click Hanyoung key to confirm in English mode,
For confirmation, just double click the cap lock key to confirm the capitalization mode.
<<<<< 104-0238 0027 >>>>>
Pressing in this way is much better than making the mistake and erasing the wrong entry and then typing again, and much more nervous than checking the lamp or checking the language mode on the computer screen. You can use less, and it seems to be a way to make sure the mode change you want while using less energy.
<<<<< 104-0239 0010 >>>>
So it is very good to make it a habit to press the toggle keys to the desired working mode.
<<<<< 104-0240 0014 >>>>>
When using an electronic calculator, it is a habit or similar to press the 0 or clear button two or three times when making a new calculation because the previous calculation may be included in the next calculation.
<<<<< 104-0241 0035 >>>>>
And when you enter your password when you join the Internet site, your input is not written in numbers or letters, but only in several dots. Even in the situation, double-click Hanyoung key to confirm in English mode, and caps lock key once to confirm in lower case mode.
<<<<< 104-0244 0020 >>>>>
In some cases, there are programs that do not display the language mode on the computer screen, and some programs hide the language mode display under the desktop. Will.
<<<<< 104-0245 0006 >>>>>>
For reference, if you make the most common toggle mode changes, here are a few more
<<<<< 104-0249 0027 >>>>>
To maximize the task pane at all times, set the taskbar auto-hide mode on the Windows desktop taskbar menu, and the language bar displayed on the taskbar will disappear when the program window is maximized. Of course, the language mode is not always known when you work on the Internet while maximizing the task pane in taskbar auto hide mode.
<<<<< 104-0251 0020 >>>>>
Some programs, such as Notepad, cannot display the language mode because the program itself does not display the language mode. However, even though the current language mode is uncertain, the mouse pointer is moved to the bottom of the monitor screen to make the task bar visible. It is annoying to check the language mode, and it is very likely that the current language mode is the language mode you want, and you just typed the letters in that state, but unfortunately because of the wrong language mode. There are many.
<<<<< 104-0254 0030 >>>>>
In addition, when entering a user ID or password when registering a member on the website, especially when entering a password, only the dot is displayed as a dot. After changing to English mode, there is a lot of trouble to input again, and even though it must be entered in lowercase letters, the current text mode is entered in English uppercase mode, so an error message appears.
When signing up at any site where you can also enter uppercase English mode, you were trying to enter your ID or password in lowercase letters. I couldn't log in and remembered that I was embarrassed.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video46
Others-Computer Keyboard Improvements-Shift Control Alt Button
<<<< 104-0313 0017 >>>>>
Computer keyboard
The control button, the shift button, and the alt button are not pressed alone to perform any operation. Instead of pressing the control, shift, and alt button while pressing another button, that is, a hotkey operation is performed.
<<<<< 104-0316 0022 >>>>>
There is nothing wrong with doing this with both hands,
If your right hand is on a mouse, trying to do it with one hand, such as when you are only doing it with your left hand, is quite difficult.
This is because the control, shift and alt buttons are not ergonomic.
<<<<< 104-0317 0014 >>>>>
This is because the left index finger or thumb pressing other buttons while holding those buttons with the left hand finger does not angle the position of the finger and the button.
<<<<< 104-0319 0012 >>>>>
For example, copying and pasting is a common command on a computer, and it's faster to use keyboard shortcuts than pressing a mouse.
<<<<< 104-0323 0026 >>>>>
To copy, hold down the Control button and press the C button.
To paste, press the V button while holding down the control button.
However, the finger angle is not well matched, so the wrist does not look so natural, it must be bent upwards, and the muscles of the back of the hand are stiff.
<<<<< 104-0326 0027 >>>>>
If the control button is on the top, the wrist does not need to be intentionally folded like this, and the back of the hand is not stiff and can be in this comfortable position.
If this is a control button
Control + C is easy to do
Control + V makes this easy.
<<<<< 104-0329 0026 >>>>.
In other words, it is more ergonomic to have the control button, shift button and alt button on the top.
While there are conventional ergonomically curved keyboards, controls, shifts, and alt buttons are more inconvenient than these, and you can't bend the keyboard on a laptop.
<<<<< 104-0330 0015 >>>>>
Again, control buttons, shift buttons, alt buttons
Currently at the bottom,
Moving these buttons upwards will allow you to work with the shortcut keys with one hand.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 47: Others-Improved computer keyboard-Change position of letter key arrow key number key
1 <<<<< 104-0270 0014 >>>>>
A typical computer keyboard looks like this.
Divided into three sections
This is where the letter buttons are mainly
With this part
This can be divided into the number pad part.
2 <<<<< 104-0298 0016 >>>>>
By the way, this batch is probably the batch that was used until the mouse was developed.
So there is one inconvenience here with the mouse on the right side of the keyboard as it is today.
3 <<<<< 104-0301 0015 >>>>>
When you type text here and you want to move your right hand with the mouse on the right side of the keyboard
When I try to move my right hand from the mouse here to the character buttons here, the movement is too large and it is inconvenient.
4 <<<<< 104-0281 0010 >>>>>
In a sense, a conventional keyboard like this might be called left-handed, working with the mouse on the left side of the keyboard.
5 <<<<< 104-0287 0016 >>>>>
And when you put this type of keyboard in the center of your body and type, the letter buttons are placed on the left side, so both hands are shifted from the center of your body to the left side.
6 <<<<< 104-0280 >>>>>
And the load on both hands is not evenly distributed.
In the current state, the right hand is doing as much as the left hand does in this part, and the work here and here and the mouse are responsible for the right hand alone.
7 <<<<< 104-0289 0005 >>>>>
so
Center the letter buttons like this
8 <<<<< 104-0295 0010 >>>>>
If you place the letter buttons right next to the mouse, the right hand movement between the mouse and the letter button will be smaller.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 48: Place the numeric buttons of the guitar-electronic calculator close to the display
<<<<< 104-0257 0008 >>>>>
Electronic calculator
Rather than these function buttons
These numbers are much more frequently used.
<<<<< 104-0262 0030 >>>>>
By the way
In the related art, such function buttons having a relatively less frequent use than the number buttons are disposed between the display screen and the number buttons so that the focus of the eye is more and more here and there. The travel distance is inconvenient, and the work speed is slowed down.
I felt uncomfortable because I used a lot of industrial calculators.
<<<<< 104-0266 0032 >>>>>
So I want to change the positions of the function buttons and the number buttons like this.
Now, the focus of the eyes is mainly from here and there, so the focus movement distance of the eyes becomes smaller, and the working speed seems to be faster.
In general, such as non-industrial calculators, there are some function buttons between the display screen and the number buttons, and I would like to change the position.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 49 Twin character input method Simple description
<<<<< 104-0347 0021 >>>>>
What's the fastest way to type text on your phone?
Until now it was Hangul.
However, if you use the twin character input method, you can enter a foreign language faster than Korean. Of course, Hangul is also faster and more comfortable than before.
<<<<< 104-0351 0013 >>>>>
After the development of the twin-character input method, I was able to read articles like these, which are now wrong.
If you search in Naver or Google, it comes out.
<<<<< 104-0352 0014 >>>>>
“The science of Hangeul is shining brighter in the age of knowledge and information. See our teens sending and receiving cell phone text messages. There is no “Thumb tribe” because their hands are dazzling. ”
<<<< 104-0355 0009 >>>>>
"It's an unparalleled speed compared to Japanese, which requires up to five toggles per key, or an alphabet with three."
<<<<< 104-0357 0011 >>>>>
The gesture of the "Thumb tribes" is not agile, so it is close to mythology. "Speed," the life of the information age, is also inseparable from the characteristics of Hangeul. "
<<<<< 104-0359 0011 >>>>>
"The Umji tribe, who plays more than 150 strokes of text on a cell phone, would not have been possible without the Hangeul created by King Sejong."
<<<< 104-0360 0006 >>>>>
“Is there another character in the world that is as comfortable as Hangul when typing text messages on mobile phones?
<<<< 104-0361 0007 >>>>
The input speed of Korean characters on a mobile phone is faster than Japanese or Chinese characters and Roman characters. ”
<<<< 104-0362 0013 >>>>
"There are twelve text buttons on mobile phones, and the only people in Korea who use Korean characters are the ones who can transfer their native languages most conveniently with these limited text buttons."
<<<<< 104-0367 0030 >>>>>
The main point of these articles is that Hangul is scientific, so you can type in the phone faster.
It is true that Hangeul creation is original and scientific, which does not originate from the world, but because Hangul is scientific, it was not the fastest to input on a mobile phone.
It is irrelevant that the creation principle of any writing system is scientific and enters quickly.
<<<<< 104-0368 0030 >>>>>
However, the conventional input method could not input a foreign language other than Korean as fast as Korean, and by adopting the twin character input method, Greek and Roman characters including English can be input much faster than Korean, and Japanese hiragana and katakana Also, if you input Hangul using the traditional Hangul input method, you can input faster, and you can input Chinese characters faster than before.
<<<<< 104-0369 0007 >>>>>
Of course, if you introduce the twin input method Hangul can be entered much faster and more convenient than before.
<<<<< 104-0370 0008 >>>>>
Special characters such as punctuation and emoticons can be entered immediately without changing the text mode.
<<<<< 104-0372 0016 >>>>
The English alphabet is 26 characters and Hangul is 19 characters and 21 vowels, but 40 characters. However, if you input English using the traditional input method, it is almost half speed compared to Korean. Why?
<<<<< 104-0373 0035 >>>>>
The main reason is that Hangul has a rule that must have a vowel after the consonant, but English words have no such rule, so there are a lot of consonants and vowels. If you divide them into parts, it makes no sense, so the keyboard is arranged in alphabetical standard enumeration order, so there are many cases where you need to enter the alphabet assigned to the same button consecutively.
<<<<< 104-0378 0105 >>>>
For example, to enter MONO the conventional way,
Press Button 6 once to enter M,
I'm trying to type O, but O is assigned to Button 6 like M, so I'll move the cursor manually by pressing the Right or Space button,
Press Button 6 three times to enter O,
I'm going to enter N, but N is assigned to Button 6 like O, so I can move the cursor manually by pressing the right button or the space button
Press Button 6 twice to enter N,
I'm trying to type O, but O is assigned to Button 6 like N, so I can move the cursor manually by pressing the right button or the space button
Press button 6 three times to enter O.
<<<<< 104-0379 0003 >>>>>
Too cumbersome and uncomfortable.
<<<<< 104-0381 0007 >>>>>
However, if you want to input MONO by the twin character input method, you can enter like this.
<<<<< 104-0384 0003 >>>>>
M, O, N, O (Trial)
<<<<< 104-0385 0001 >>>>
Too easy?
<<<<< 104-0386 0021 >>>>>
How do you input it like that?
Use buttons 4 and 6 as shift buttons to enter the second letter assigned to each button,
We used buttons 7 and 9 as shift buttons to enter the third letter assigned to each button.
<<<<< 104-0388 0026 >>>>
To explain again
Since M is the first letter of button 6, press button 6 once to enter M,
Since O is the third letter of button 6, press O while pressing button 7 from among button 7 or 9, which is a shift button to input the third letter, and enter O,
<<<<< 104-0389 0030 >>>>>
Since N is the second letter of button 6, while holding down button 4 from button 4 or 6, which is a shift button for entering the second letter, press button 6 to enter N,
Since O is the third letter of button 6, O was pressed by pressing button 6 while pressing button 7 from button 7 or 9, which is a shift button for entering the third letter.
<<<<< 104-0390 0004 >>>>>
Should we try again?
M, O, N, O (Trial)
<<<<< 104-0391 0013 >>>>>
In addition, every time you enter a Hangul character, it is possible to input it in the same way as before, or to use the twin input method, without changing the character mode.
<<<<< 104-0395 0037 >>>>>
The twin input method is a shift button that binds two pairs of twelve mobile phone keyboards and makes six pairs and inputs six letters of the second to seventh characters. Even if it is assigned, the first letter is inputted by pressing the single stroke as before, and the other letters are inputted by pressing the button assigned to the letter you want to input while pressing the appropriate shift button.
<<<<< 104-0397 0041 >>>>>
Also, even with two strokes, it is two strokes that use both hands, so it is almost the same speed as one stroke with only one hand.
Since each character can be inputted with 1 or 2 strokes per button, 7 characters can be assigned to the number of spaces in which no general characters are assigned, and the general character mode without changing the character mode. You can easily type in
So, you can easily enter Japanese with 5 letters, and you can easily enter up to 2 special characters for each button.
<<<<< 104-0399 0023 >>>>>
When you input Hangul in the conventional way, you need more than 3 out of 40 Hangul phonemes.
To enter in the same way as Samsung Anycall,
There are 15 ways to enter LG Cyon's easy method, and you can also input two phonemes by typing them in Hangul.
<<<<< 104-0400 0004 >>>>>
Let's quickly type the following English words:
MONO FOLLOW ING STOP TAXI
<<<<<< 401 0015 >>>>> Quickly in Figure 03
<<<<<< 402 0017 >>>>> Fast on your phone
<<<<< 104-0405 0029 >>>>>
The reason for this quick and comfortable input is
Not only because you can enter all the spellings in one or two strokes, but also because these letters are used as shift buttons. This is because the advantages were demonstrated, and the six advantages were described in detail in videos 11 and 12.
<<<<< 104-0407 0009 >>>>>
Of course, this advantage of the twin character input method is common when typing characters in all languages, including Korean.
<<<<< 104-0410 0011 >>>>>
We also proved in video 33 that the fastest way to enter text on these keyboards is to use twin input.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
*** \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\
Video 50 Investment Fair
<<<<< 104-0411 0020 >>>>>
Can I generate income from text input?
An example is Samsung Anycall's Korean input method, Cheonjiin input method.
If you enter "heaven 90 billion" as a search term in Naver or Google, a lot of related articles appear.
<<<<< 104-0412 0003 >>>>>
Let me introduce two of them
<<<<< 104-0413 0023 >>>>>
Among the reports from sbs on 2004-01-31
“Cheonjiin,” Samsung's Korean phone input method. Because of its convenient and convenient operation, it has been adopted in over 30 million mobile phone keyboards so far.
It's a patented technology worth $ 9 billion in money. ”
<<<<< 104-0414 0002 >>>>>
There is a part called
<<<<< 104-0425 0050 >>>>>
Among the reports reported by the Chosun Ilbo on June 2, 2006
The court ruled that a patent would be granted to an individual who had worked with Samsung Electronics for the patent rights of a mobile phone keyboard Hangul input device, which is known as the 'Cheonjiin' dispute. If Cho wins the final case, the royalties he will receive will be astronomical. Even if you calculate Samsung's mobile phones made up until 2002, you can get 90 billion won in damages (30 million mobile phones × 3000 won per unit). ”
Until 2002, 30 million mobile phones were manufactured with built-in input methods, and royalties of 3000 won were calculated.
<<<<< 104-0426 0002 >>>>>
There is a part called.
<<<<< 104-0429 0016 >>>>>
Cheonjiin input method is input method that is limited to Hangul input only, but the twin character input method that I patented in Korea is the fastest way to input characters from all over the world including Hangul on the mobile phone.
<<<<< 104-0430 0017 >>>>>
How many mobile phones are made in a year worldwide?
You can find out by typing “1.1 billion mobile phones” as a search term in Naver or Google.
About 1.1 billion units are made a year.
<<<<< 104-0435 0010 >>>>>
Since the disputes of heaven and earth demanded a fee of 3,000 won per unit, multiplying 1.1 billion units by 3,000 won yields 3.3 trillion a year.
<<<<< 104-0436 0008 >>>>>
It's hard to get that much in reality, but anyway, it's hugely profitable.
<<<<< 104-0438 0012 >>>>>
Trillion
If you achieve only tenths of your income, you'll earn 330 billion dollars a year.
Attaining only one-hundredth generates $ 33 billion a year.
<<<<< 104-0440 0015 >>>>>
If you've come up with a really breakthrough idea of text input, knowing that you can generate huge revenues from cell phone text input, you'll think you'll have to patent it too.
<<<<< 104-0441 0017 >>>>>
By the way, I may or may not be registered as a patent, and I have to apply for a patent and pass the examination by investing money and time. I have already registered the twin character input method as a patent in Korea.
<<<<< 104-0444 0012 >>>>>
Patent registration details are as follows.
The application number is like this and the registration number is like this.
((((((
-Patent information (patent search site: http://www.kipris.or.kr, http://www.wipo.org can be searched)
Twin Character Input Method Korean Patent Application No.: 10-2007-0093341 (Increasing Button Efficiency of Electric and Electronic Equipment)
Twin Character Input Method Korean Patent Registration No.: 10-0846042 (Increasing Button Efficiency of Electric and Electronic Equipment)
Twin Character Input Method PCT Number (International Application No.): PCT / KR2008 / 000349 (THE METHOD OF PROVIDING MORE BIGGER EFFECT OF BUTTON)
)))))))
<<<<< 104-0454 0028 >>>>>
Under international patent law, I filed a patent application in Korea on February 1, 2007. If I fail to file a patent in each country by 30 July 2009 within 30 months, it becomes a patent technology that can be used for free in other countries. .
Therefore, patents must be applied for each country abroad. By the way, it is expensive.
<<<<< 104-0455 0016 >>>>>
It costs about 10 ~ 15 million won for each country, including Korean patent attorney's service fee, each country's patent agent service fee, translation fee, patent application and registration fee.
<<<<< 104-0462 0019 >>>>>
The company will invest about 100 million won to apply for priority applications in China, the US, India, Japan, Brazil, Europe, Germany, the UK, and France, which are the 10 major countries that make up 70-80% of the global mobile phone market.
<<<<< 104-0467 0027 >>>>>>
Invest 100 million
In the year mentioned above, we could generate 33.3 trillion won,
If you achieve only tenths of your income, you'll earn 330 billion dollars a year.
Attaining only one-hundredth generates $ 33 billion a year.
You may be able to return 33,000 times, 3300 times, or 330 times your investment.
<<<<< 104-0468? 104-0482 >>>>>
That is year after year. It is possible for 20 years under the patent law.
<<<<< 104-0469 0031? 104-0468 >>>>>
And we want to give back to investors about 50% of the net profit generated from the investment.
If you fail to apply for each country by 2009.7.22, it will be a free patent technology. So, in order to raise funds quickly, you will be offered a lot of money back to investors.
Please refer to the contract for the details of the 50% return.
<<<<< 104-0470 0010? 104-0515 >>>>>
Even if you introduce the investor, some of the investor introduces you as 10% of the invested amount.
<<<<< 104-0471 0016 >>>>>
As a developer, I have patent rights only in Korea, which is still a very small market.
The world market is 1.1 billion units a year, and Korea has only 2303 million markets a year.
<<<<< 104-0472 0013 >>>>>
If you type in the search term "23.3 million domestic mobile phone market in 2008" in Naver or Google, you will get it.
<<<<< 104-0474 0012 >>>>>
In other words, the Korean market is only about 2% of the global market.
I would like to share the remaining 98% of the market with half of my investors.
<<<<< 104-0476 0021 >>>>>
I've already proved that I can be registered as a patent. What are you waiting for?
Do not hesitate,
You have a good idea for yourself, so don't be afraid to invest 10,000 won for the first time that you want to register a patent.
<<<<< 104-0487 0020 >>>>>
As you invest, you will make the world more convenient, realizing the founding concept of Hongik humanity, which means to benefit the world widely. Opportunity.
<<<<< 104-0479 0007 >>>>>
Naturally, the larger the amount invested, the more income will go to each investor.
<<<<< 104-0480 0042? 104-0535 >>>>
There are situations such as bank deposit interest where you can make an investment and see if there is a profit, but there are situations where you have to invest in an inseparable situation such as a patent. Still, many people are investing in patents. If you enter “patent attorney 600 million” as a search word in Naver, you can see that the average salary of patent attorneys is 600 million, twice that of doctors and lawyers, which is about 300 million, and is the top professional salary.
Think about the case well and invest with pleasure.
<<<<< 104-0544 0004 >>>>>
It does not seem to be a patent without an investment worth of just 1 yuan.
<<<<< 104-0545 0009 >>>>
Attracting investments by the end of 2009.6.20 or around 100 million may result in early termination of the investment.
<<<<< 104-0546 0006 >>>>
Please contact us if you have any questions.
(((((
Name: Kim Gi Joo
Account Number:
cell phone
Café
))))))
Thank you.
<<<<< 104-04888 0003 >>>>>
Let's just recognize it now
<<<<< 104-0489 0007 >>>>>
50% divide by 40%, 4%, 6%
<<<<< 104-0493 0009 >>>>>
1. Distribute 40% of net profit to direct investors (investable from 10,000 won)
<<<<< 104-0495 0019 >>>>>
2. Distribute 4% of net profits to those who attracted the investment.
(Introducing the investor alone means that he or she considers 10% of the invested person's investment.
<<<< 104-0501 0006 >>>>>
However, I need to invest at least 50,000 won to take 4%.)
<<<<< 104-0507 0019 >>>>>
The reason for the 50,000 won rule is that when you invite others to invest, you have set a minimum amount of conscience.
Who would invest if he told others to invest 1 million won and 10 million won without investing 50,000 won?
<<<<< 104-0508 0015 >>>>>
3. In the investment promotion organization formed by the introduction of myself, 6% of the investment amount excluding my investment amount shall be distributed by 1% up to 6 levels based on the person who invested more than 100,000 won.
<<<<< 104-0514 >>>>>>
This means, in a nutshell, that one-fifth, or 2.5%, of the team's total investment up to six levels, made by a team member under him, is considered to have been invested.
Claims (37)
If a letter button is on while another letter button is on,
Either the first letter button is written in the specified sequence number assigned to the later letter button, or the later letter button is assigned to the first letter button assigned. In designating a combination induction button that causes a sequence of letters to be written,
A method of increasing the button efficiency of an electric and electronic device, characterized in that two or more combination induction buttons for writing letters of the same designation order are designated.
The designation order of letters written by the combination induction button does not change depending on the spatial positional relationship with other buttons combined with the combination induction button, and is always the same regardless of the spatial positional relationship with other buttons. ,
Among two or more combination induction buttons that cause letters of the same designation sequence to be written,
At least two relations are also induced the remaining combination buttons except for their function as character button, that to involve himself with each other to induce the combination button to be written is the character of the specified sequence numbers letters of the assigned to the character button Method for increasing button efficiency of an electric and electronic device characterized in that.
In the phoneme input method of the following 40 phonemes,
(When the whole phoneme is defined as 40 below)
By assigning one or more of the phonemes that are not assigned to completion to the button,
Added without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
40 phonemes in Korean
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2. 5 consonants : ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
3. 10 basic collections: ㅏ, ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
4.11 vowels: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
In the Korean alphabet consonant phoneme input method as below 19,
(When the Korean consonant phoneme is the same as 19 below)
By assigning one or more of the consonants that are not assigned to completion to the button,
Added without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
19 Hangul consonants
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2. 5 consonants : ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
In the basic Korean phonetic phoneme input method as below 10,
(When Korean basic vowel phonemes are equal to 10 below)
By assigning one or more of the default vowel phonemes that are not assigned to completion as complete,
Added without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
10 basic vowel phonemes: ㅏ, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
In the Korean alphabet vowel phoneme input method as below 11,
(When Korean vowel phonemes are equal to 11 below)
By assigning one or more of the consonants that are not assigned to completion to the button in addition,
Added without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
11 double phonemes: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
In the phoneme input method of the following 40 phonemes,
(When the whole phoneme is defined as 40 below)
One or more of the phonemes
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
40 phonemes in Korean
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2. 5 consonants : ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
3. 10 basic collections: ㅏ, ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
4.11 vowels: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
In the Korean alphabet consonant phoneme input method as below 19,
(When the Korean consonant phoneme is the same as 19 below)
One or more of the consonants
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
19 Hangul consonants
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2. 5 consonants : ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
In the basic Korean phonetic phoneme input method as below 10,
(When Korean basic vowel phonemes are equal to 10 below)
One or more of the default vowel phonemes
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
10 basic vowel phonemes: ㅏ, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
In the Korean alphabet vowel phoneme input method as below 11,
(When Korean vowel phonemes are equal to 11 below)
One or more of the phoneme vowels
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
11 double phonemes: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
In the basic method of inputting the Korean consonant phoneme as below 14 characters,
Under
One or more of the phonemes
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
14 basic consonants in Korean::, ㄴ, ㄹ, ㅁ, ㅂ, ㅅ, ㅇ, ㅈ, ㅋ, ㅌ, ,, ㅎ
In the method of inputting the letters of the Korean consonant phoneme as shown below,
Under
One or more of the phonemes
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
5 Hangul Twin Consonants : ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
Under
One or more of the phonemes
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
Phoneme: ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅗ, TT, ㅡ, ㅣ
Under
One or more of the phonemes
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
Phoneme: ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅗ, TT
Under
One or more of the phonemes
Without changing the text input mode,
How to enter in complete, or
Adding strokes, typing in a non-complete way that includes a combination of two or more characters
Method of increasing the button efficiency of the electric and electronic device, characterized in that to be selected from the input.
Phoneme: ㅑ, ㅕ, ㅛ, ㅠ
In a device having a few letter buttons including buttons 0-9, *, and #,
One or more of the 40 phonemes listed below
When the Korean phonemes are the same as below 40,
(Add one or more of the phonemes that aren't finalized to the final button.
Added without changing the text input mode,)
The method of increasing the button efficiency of an electric and electronic device, characterized in that the input can be selected from a non-complete method including a combination of two or more phonemes or a method of inputting a complete type.
40 phonemes in Korean
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2. 5 consonants : ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
3. 10 basic collections: ㅏ, ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
4.11 vowels: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
In the Korean alphabet consonant phoneme input method as below 19,
When the Korean phonemes are the same as below 40,
By assigning one or more of the phonemes that are not assigned to completion to the button,
Added without changing the text input mode,
The method of increasing the button efficiency of an electric and electronic device, characterized in that for adding a stroke, selecting from a non-complete method including a combination of two or more letters or a method of inputting a complete type.
19 Hangul consonants
1. 14 basic consonants: a, b, c, d, l, w, m, o, h, h, h, h, h, h
2. 5 consonants : ㄲ, ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅆ, ㅉ
In the basic Korean phonetic phoneme input method as below 10,
When the Korean phonemes are the same as below 40,
By assigning one or more of the phonemes that are not assigned to completion to the button,
Added without changing the text input mode,
The method of increasing the button efficiency of an electric and electronic device, characterized in that for adding a stroke, selecting from a non-complete method including a combination of two or more letters or a method of inputting a complete type.
10 basic vowel phonemes: ㅏ, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
In the Korean alphabet vowel phoneme input method as below 11,
When the Korean phonemes are the same as below 40,
By assigning one or more of the phonemes that are not assigned to completion to the button,
Added without changing the text input mode,
The method of increasing the button efficiency of an electric and electronic device, characterized in that for adding a stroke, selecting from a non-complete method including a combination of two or more letters or a method of inputting a complete type.
11 double phonemes: ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅔ, ㅖ, ㅚ, ㅘ, ㅙ, ㅟ, ㅝ, ㅞ, ㅢ
Character transformation function including stroke addition function button, double consonant function button, character finish function button and shift function button
Characterized input method characterized in that any one or more buttons to which a letter is assigned to be a combination-induced button to perform such a character transformation function.
Character transformation function including stroke addition function button, double consonant function button, character finish function button and shift function button
Characterized input method characterized in that any two or more buttons to which a letter is assigned, a combination-induced button for such a character transformation function.
In the conventional LG EZ system,
After hitting a button and launching the first phoneme assigned to that button,
After pressing the Stroke button, press the double consonant button to enter the phoneme.
Character input method characterized in that to input the desired phoneme even when pressing the consonant button only once or twice without pressing the stroke button.
(Mainly want to enter ㄸ, ㅃ, ㅉ like that)
In the conventional LG EZ system,
After pressing a button twice, launching the second phoneme assigned to that button,
Press the Add Stroke button to enter the phoneme
By pressing a button twice, without the second phoneme assigned to that button,
After hitting a button and launching the first phoneme assigned to that button,
Character input method characterized in that to input the desired phonemes only by pressing the Stroke button.
(Mainly want to enter ㅕ, ㅠ)
Perform a predetermined operation by a combination situation including a combination of two or more buttons that are ON at the same time, a sequence of combinations, or a pressing method,
Electro-electronics characterized in that two or more combination induction buttons for inducing the same designation operation to induce the same designation operation even if the combination induction button is replaced with other combination induction buttons for inducing the same designation operation In the method of increasing the button efficiency of the device (so far, the contents of paragraph 6 of 10-2007-0093341),
Characters are characterized in that the button is a combination induction button function to induce any function other than the letter assigned to the button assigned to the letter, the character button is a combination induction button, the character button functions as a letter button, and also the combination induction button function Input method.
What kind of function is
Character transformation function including double consonant, stroke addition function,
Punctuation, punctuation, including spaces,
Functions of buttons on computer keyboards but not on mobile phones, including CAPS LOCK, CONTROL, ALT, SHIFT, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN buttons.
Character input method characterized in that said.
In generating a signal to issue any command including text input,
By changing the type of pressing method of one or more of the two buttons
A signal generation method, characterized by generating a new signal.
(Or whether the button that was previously turned ON is in the ON state or changed to the OFF state,
In a device that generates a signal including a character input by a button combination, that is, a combination of two or more buttons, to buttons that are turned on afterwards, generating a new signal while changing the pressing method of the combined buttons. A button operation method characterized by.)
The type of push method,
A signal generating method comprising a double click, a triple click, a press for more than a predetermined time.
Pressing a button is a signal that you are about to enter one of the phonemes assigned to that button,
Then, when you press a button, you are selecting one of the letters assigned to the button you pressed earlier,
Specify two or more selection buttons that select the same sequence of letters.
Character input method characterized in that.
Even though the letters represent the same pronunciation, they are divided into two types of languages.
Quickly enter the second character without changing the character mode in the first character mode (e.g., enter uppercase letters without changing the character mode in the lowercase alphabetic mode or enter katakana quickly without changing the character mode in the Japanese hiragana mode)
Making it possible to quickly enter the first character without changing the character mode in the second character mode (eg, to enter a lower case letter without changing the character mode in the English uppercase mode or the character mode in the Japanese Katakana mode) Character input method that allows you to enter Hiragana quickly without change.
Character input method characterized in that at least one of the way the combination induction button precedes the character button
Character input method characterized by more than any one of the method that the combination induction button is followed by the character button
ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (the phoneme finish button, double consonant button may be added)
ㄱ ㄴ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (You may have additional phoneme finishing buttons and double consonant buttons.)
ㅅ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ / ＼ (You may have additional phoneme finishing button and double consonant button.)
ㄱ ㄴ ㅅ ㅇ ㅡ ㅣ (You may have additional phoneme finishing buttons and double consonant buttons.)
1. Set the specific sequence letter of the first group as space.
2. Create a space combination induction button and press any button while holding the button to enter a space.
3. If a character input method is a method that does not function by the button combination in which both buttons are pressed simultaneously,
When two or more buttons are pressed simultaneously, a space is entered.
4. In the current letter input method, if there are some functions (or many) that use a combination of buttons in which two buttons are pressed at the same time, such as twin or 'adjacent key input method'.
If any 3 ~ 4 buttons are pressed at the same time, space is inputted.
If you press a button while holding down one of the keypad buttons on the phone,
A method for operating buttons in a telephone, characterized in that used as a shortcut, including performing a specific function or displaying a specific screen.
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| KR1020100000556A KR20110080376A (en) | 2010-01-05 | 2010-01-05 | Inputting method of character |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| KR1020100000556A KR20110080376A (en) | 2010-01-05 | 2010-01-05 | Inputting method of character |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| KR20110080376A true KR20110080376A (en) | 2011-07-13 |
Family
ID=44919298
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| KR1020100000556A KR20110080376A (en) | 2010-01-05 | 2010-01-05 | Inputting method of character |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| KR (1) | KR20110080376A (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN113458933A (en) * | 2021-06-02 | 2021-10-01 | 洛阳海创自动化科技有限公司 | Can get rid of toxic gas's concave-convex surface processing environmental protection polisher |
-
2010
- 2010-01-05 KR KR1020100000556A patent/KR20110080376A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
Cited By (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN113458933A (en) * | 2021-06-02 | 2021-10-01 | 洛阳海创自动化科技有限公司 | Can get rid of toxic gas's concave-convex surface processing environmental protection polisher |
| CN113458933B (en) * | 2021-06-02 | 2022-12-16 | 台州乔克科技有限公司 | Can get rid of toxic gas's concave-convex surface processing environmental protection polisher |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CA2156822C (en) | Keyboard-type input apparatus | |
| US8079766B2 (en) | Key input system and device incorporating same | |
| US20210081103A1 (en) | Data entry systems | |
| WO2014127337A2 (en) | Improved data entry systems | |
| KR101913359B1 (en) | The method of inputtimg special character | |
| WO2010131759A1 (en) | Computer allowing chinese language input | |
| EP3180703A2 (en) | A mnemonic relative position international keyboard system set on new focus field platform | |
| KR101753389B1 (en) | The easy method of inputting symbol and others | |
| CN109739365A (en) | Middle and primary schools' teaching Multi-Function Keyboard and professional input Multi-Function Keyboard | |
| KR20110080376A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| Gottlieb | Written Japanese and the word processor | |
| KR20100080576A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20180118096A (en) | The method of changing a part of character in the characters which is allocated on the button of keyboard | |
| KR20110099934A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20110071149A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20110005759A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| Unger | Japanese orthography in the computer age | |
| KR20100069509A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20100064261A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20100069510A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20100080573A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20100080577A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20100080575A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20100053742A (en) | Inputting method of character | |
| KR20100064265A (en) | Inputting method of character |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| N231 | Notification of change of applicant | ||
| WITN | Withdrawal due to no request for examination |